An historical & geographical description of the great country & river of the Amazones in America. Drawn out of divers authors, and reduced into a better forme; with a mapp of the river, and of its provinces, being that place which Sr Walter Rawleigh intended to conquer and plant, when he made his voyage to Guiana. / Written in French by the Count of Pagan, and dedicated to Cardinall Mazarine, in order to a conquest by the Cardinals motion to be undertaken. And now translated into English by William Hamilton, and humbly offered to his Majesty, as worthy his consideration.
         Pagan, Blaise François de, comte de Merveilles, 1604-1665.
      
       
         
           1660
        
      
       Approx. 236 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 98 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2009-10 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A90519
         Wing P162
         Thomason E1805_2
         ESTC R209931
         99868777
         99868777
         170395
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A90519)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 170395)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Thomason Tracts ; 225:E1805[2])
      
       
         
           
             An historical & geographical description of the great country & river of the Amazones in America. Drawn out of divers authors, and reduced into a better forme; with a mapp of the river, and of its provinces, being that place which Sr Walter Rawleigh intended to conquer and plant, when he made his voyage to Guiana. / Written in French by the Count of Pagan, and dedicated to Cardinall Mazarine, in order to a conquest by the Cardinals motion to be undertaken. And now translated into English by William Hamilton, and humbly offered to his Majesty, as worthy his consideration.
             Pagan, Blaise François de, comte de Merveilles, 1604-1665.
             Hamilton, William, gent.
          
           [32], 153, [7] p. : map.
           
             Printed for John Starkey at the Miter in Fleet-street near Temple-Barre,
             London, :
             1661. [i.e. 1660]
          
           
             Annotation on Thomason copy: "nouemb:"; the 0 in the imprint date has been altered in MS. to a "1".
             Reproduction of the original in the British Library.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           America -- Discovery and exploration -- Early works to 1800.
           America -- Discovery and exploration -- Maps -- Early works to 1800.
        
      
    
     
        2008-04 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2008-10 SPi Global
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2008-11 John Pas
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2008-11 John Pas
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2009-02 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
           AN
           Historical
           &
           Geographical
           DESCRIPTION
           
             OF
             THE
          
           Great
           Country
           &
           River
           OF
           THE
           AMAZONES
           
             IN
             AMERICA
          
           .
        
         
           Drawn
           out
           of
           divers
           Authors
           ,
           and
           reduced
           into
           a
           better
           forme
           ;
           with
           a
           Mapp
           of
           the
           River
           ,
           and
           of
           its
           Provinces
           ,
           being
           that
           place
           which
           Sr
           
             Walter
             Rawleigh
          
           intended
           to
           conquer
           and
           plant
           ,
           when
           he
           made
           his
           Voyage
           to
           Guianu
           .
        
         
           Written
           in
           French
           by
           the
           Count
           of
           Pagan
           ,
           and
           dedicated
           to
           Cardinall
           Mazarine
           ,
           in
           order
           to
           a
           Conquest
           by
           the
           Cardinals
           motion
           to
           be
           undertaken
           .
        
         
           And
           now
           translated
           into
           English
           by
           
             William
             Hamilton
          
           ,
           and
           humbly
           offered
           to
           his
           Majesty
           ,
           as
           worthy
           his
           Consideration
           .
        
         
           LONDON
           ,
           Printed
           for
           
             John
             Starkey
          
           at
           the
           Miter
           in
           Fleet-street
           near
           Temple-Barre
           ,
           1660.
           
        
         
      
       
         
         
           TO
           THE
           Imperial
           Majesty
           OF
           CHARLES
           II
           of
           
             Great-Brittain
             ,
             France
          
           ,
           and
           Ireland
           ;
           Defender
           of
           the
           Faith
           of
           Protestants
           ,
           and
           of
           Protestants
           themselves
           by
           his
           Title
           of
           signal
           providence
           ;
           Happiness
           ,
           Victories
           ,
           Triumphs
           .
        
         
           
             Gracious
             Sir
             ,
          
        
         
           
             NOt
             only
          
           freewill-offerings
           
             and
             gifts
             were
             acceptable
             to
             God
             ,
             though
             they
             had
             a
             member
             ,
             or
             members
          
           superfluous
           ,
           
             or
             were
          
           deficient
           
             in
             some
             ,
             and
             so
             had
             much
          
           imperfection
           ,
           
             so
             it
             were
             not
             of
             the
             nature
             of
          
           unsincerity
           ,
           
             in
             which
             respect
             they
             behoved
             to
             be
          
           without
           blemish
           ;
           
           
             (
             Levit.
             22.23
             .
             )
             but
             in
          
           trespass-offerings
           
             also
             ,
             which
             were
             commanded
             and
             not
             left
          
           free
           ,
           
             if
             the
             Party
             was
             poor
             ,
             not
             only
             a
          
           single
           Turtle
           ,
           
             or
             young
          
           Pigeon
           
             was
             accepted
             (
             for
             the
             other
             was
             for
             an
             Holocaust
             )
             but
             a
          
           single
           meat-offering
           ,
           
             a
             very
             little
             Flower
             or
          
           Meal
           ,
           
             and
             a
          
           little
           Salt
           
             to
             it
             ,
             were
             accepted
             for
          
           both
           Holocaust
           and
           trespass-offering
           
             under
             one
          
           :
           (
           Lev.
           5.7
           .
           )
           
             which
             being
             doubtlesly
             in
             use
             from
          
           Noahs
           
             time
             ,
             or
          
           Adams
           
             rather
             ,
             as
             elsewhere
             I
             hope
             to
             make
             it
             appear
             ,
             gave
             as
             undoubtedly
             the
             beginning
             to
             that
             practice
             and
             proverb
             among
             the
          
           Heathens
           (
           Heathenism
           
             being
             but
             an
             inveterate
             corruption
             of
          
           heresie
           and
           schism
           
             from
             the
             Religion
             delivered
             by
             God
             to
          
           Adam
           ,
           and
           Noah
           ,
           
             as
             shall
             also
             God
             willing
             be
             made
             appea●
          
           )
           molâ
           salsâ
           litant
           ,
           qui
           non
           habent
           thura
           ;
           such
           may
           acceptably
           sacrifice
           to
           God
           with
           meal
           and
           salt
           ,
           who
           have
           not
           frankincense
           .
           
             The
             like
             debonnairety
             to
             accept
             of
          
           mean
           gifts
           from
           good
           mindes
           ,
           
             hath
             also
             been
             annumerated
             to
             the
             heroick
             indowments
             of
             the
             greatest
             Kings
             .
             Thus
          
           Artaxerxes
           
             disdained
             not
             a
             pitcher
             of
             water
             from
             a
             Paisant
             .
             And
          
           Plutarch
           
             in
             his
             Apophthegms
             shows
             by
             one
             of
             them
             ,
             the
             property
             of
             a
             royall
             disposition
             to
             have
             been
             esteemed
             this
          
           ;
           Non
           minus
           est
           regium
           parvula
           accipere
           ,
           quam
           largiri
           magna
           ,
           It
           is
           no
           less
           Kingly
           to
           accept
           of
           little
           things
           ,
           than
           freely
           to
           bestow
           great
           matters
           .
        
         
           
             And
             this
             ,
             Royall
             Sir
             ,
             is
             my
             humble
             request
             to
             your
             saered
             Majesty
             at
             this
             time
             ;
             That
             you
             will
             graciously
             accept
             a
          
           mean
           gift
           
             from
             a
          
           mean
           giver
           ,
           
           
             and
             by
             your
             royall
             return
             of
             justice
             and
             bountie
             to
             enable
             me
             to
             serve
             God
             ,
             and
             your
             Majesty
             with
             better
             ;
             God
             himself
             inviting
             you
             thereto
             by
             his
             example
             ,
             who
             allowed
             even
             of
          
           poor
           freewill-offerings
           ,
           
             made
             to
             him
             of
             purpose
             ,
             to
             obtain
             his
             bountifull
             returns
             of
             some
             eminent
             benefits
             or
             favours
             .
             And
             yet
          
           a
           mean
           gift
           ,
           
             Sir
             ,
             I
             call
             this
             of
             mine
             ,
             not
             that
             the
          
           work
           it self
           
             should
             be
             so
             accounted
             ,
             but
          
           my
           work
           about
           it
           ;
           
             which
             is
             but
             a
             Translation
             .
             For
             the
             Book
             though
             in
             bulke
             but
             small
             ,
             in
             its
             concernments
             is
             very
             rich
             ;
             and
             ,
             as
             highly
             commendable
             in
             it self
             ,
             so
             not
             much
             less
             in
             the
             Author
             .
             In
             its
             natural
             language
             it
             made
             its
             first
             address
             to
             Cardinal
          
           Mazarine
           ,
           
             in
             order
             to
             have
             set
             his
             Majesty
             of
          
           France
           
             on
             conquest
             of
             the
             great
             Kingdome
             of
             the
          
           Amazone
           
             to
             himself
             .
             But
             having
             these
             five
             years
             at
             least
             ,
             that
             now
             it
             hath
             been
             abroad
             ,
             not
             made
             use
             of
             it
             that
             way
             ,
             it
             comes
             now
             by
             me
             to
             beg
             your
             Majesties
             favourable
             acceptance
             ,
             in
             hope
             of
             that
             large
             retribution
             to
             your self
             ,
             when
             your
             Majesty
             shall
             think
             fit
             to
             apply
             your
             thoughts
             to
             it
             ,
             for
             which
             it
             was
             intended
             to
             another
             .
             It
             was
             by
             an
             old
             servant
             of
             your
             Majesties
             Royall
             Fathers
             ,
             and
             Gandfathers
             ,
          
           I.
           L.
           D.
           
             brought
             over
             ,
             and
             communicate
             to
             one
             of
             your
             Majesties
             most
             expert
             Seamen
             ,
          
           C.
           W.
           
             who
             from
             his
             youth
             up
             ,
             and
             often
             times
             since
             ,
             hath
             been
             in
             ,
             and
             knowes
             perfectly
             all
             the
             coasts
             of
             the
          
           Southern
           America
           .
           
             Both
             these
             are
             very
             confident
             ,
             at
             least
             wish
             heartily
             ,
             and
             my self
             with
             the
             like
             affection
             do
             now
             humbly
             present
             it
             also
             ,
             That
             your
             Majesty
             would
             so
             consider
             of
             that
             great
             Empire
             ,
             as
             if
             it
          
           
           
             were
             already
             your
             own
             ;
             as
             it
             may
             be
             with
             much
             ease
             ,
             if
             your
             applications
             be
             seasonable
             ,
             and
             suitable
             to
             its
             worth
             .
             For
             it
             is
             possest
             by
             the
             barbarous
             Natives
             only
             ,
             except
             in
             two
          
           Skirts
           ;
           Brasile
           
             on
             the
             East
             ,
             where
             the
          
           Portuguaise
           
             pitched
             ;
             and
          
           Peru
           
             upon
             the
             West
             ,
             where
             the
          
           Spaniard
           
             is
             divided
             from
             the
          
           Inland
           
             by
             the
             tract
             of
             the
          
           Andes
           ,
           or
           Cordeliere
           hills
           :
           
             but
             in
             the
          
           Peninsular
           
             great
             continent
             your
             Majesty
             may
             dresse
             an
          
           Empire
           
             of
             near
             nine
             thousand
             miles
             in
             circuit
             ,
             of
             the
             pleasantest
             ,
             fertilest
             ,
             and
             richest
             continent
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             whether
             for
             air
             ,
             waters
             ,
             or
             soil
             ;
             to
             which
             no
             Prince
             can
             pretend
             ,
             much
             less
             lay
             a
             claim
             .
             For
             the
             discoveries
             of
             that
             River
             by
             the
          
           Portugaise
           ,
           and
           Spaniards
           ,
           
             were
             more
             to
             satisfie
             their
             curiosity
             ,
             than
             that
             they
             could
             then
             hope
             for
             a
             conquest
             .
             And
             the
             Natives
             not
             only
             in
             their
             forlorn
             condition
             ,
             but
             by
             singular
             junctures
             of
             providence
             ,
             call
             for
             the
             Christian
             Religion
             from
             us
             ,
             while
             others
             cease
             from
             that
             duty
             ,
             as
             the
             man
             of
          
           Macedon
           did
           Paul
           
             to
             help
             them
             while
             he
             was
             hindred
             to
             go
             into
          
           Bithynia
           ,
           
             Act.
             16.7
             ,
             9
             ,
             10.
             and
             others
             have
             been
             hindred
             hitherto
             to
             go
             to
             them
             for
             such
             end
             ;
             but
             they
             may
             also
             easily
             be
             made
             to
             receive
             your
             Majesties
             Government
             with
             friendship
             ,
             if
             wisely
             dealt
             with
             .
             For
             while
             neither
          
           Portugall
           ,
           nor
           Spain
           ,
           nor
           France
           
             pursued
             the
             design
             here
             offered
             ,
             God
             in
             in
             his
             providence
             amidst
             ,
             your
             Majesties
             and
             your
             good
             Subjects
             troubles
             ,
             seems
             not
             obscurely
             to
             have
             been
             designing
             this
             for
             you
             ,
             and
             your
          
           Brittain
           ;
           
             as
             may
             be
             hoped
             from
          
           ancient
           prediction
           ,
           
             not
             liable
             to
             exception
             from
             the
             solidest
             and
             soberest
             wits
             (
             as
             
             at
             another
             occasion
             I
             may
             fullier
             clear
             ,
             if
             your
             Majesty
             command
             it
             )
             and
             so
             much
             the
             more
             ,
             as
             his
             providence
             hath
             prevented
             your
             projecting
             ,
             having
             already
             made
             way
             and
             brought
             to
             pass
             for
             your
             Majesties
             interest
             an
             opportune
             and
             considerable
             Colonie
             ,
             by
             that
             noble
             Lord
          
           Willoughbee
           of
           Parham
           ,
           
             to
             his
             great
             travels
             ,
             hazards
             ,
             and
             vast
             expenses
             ;
             both
             seeming
             to
             concurre
             with
             the
             foresaid
             prediction
             ,
             and
             to
             point
             out
             your
             Majesty
             for
             the
             layer
             of
             such
             a
             foundation
             both
             to
             Christ
             ,
             and
             your self
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Author
             of
             this
             work
             is
             a
             French
             Earl
             of
             a
             most
             ancient
             Nobility
             and
             descent
             from
             those
             famous
             and
             honourable
             Commanders
             in
             the
             holy
             Warres
             ,
             who
             for
             their
             wise
             conduct
             and
             rare
             valour
             were
             imployed
             in
             places
             of
             great
             trust
             ,
             and
             transmitted
             them
             with
             the
             Coat
             of
             arms
             and
             name
             of
          
           Pagan
           ,
           
             (
             which
             was
             the
             badge
             of
             their
             great
             exploits
             in
             mating
             and
             killing
             the
          
           Pagans
           ,
           or
           Infidels
           )
           
             to
             their
             suecessors
             of
             the
             same
          
           name
           and
           family
           ,
           
             as
             the
             Author
             himself
             showes
             at
             large
             in
             the
             Dedication
             of
             his
             rare
             Book
             of
             Fortifications
             ,
             to
             another
             noble
             branch
             of
             the
             same
             family
             :
             of
             whose
             rare
             accomplishments
             for
          
           gentile
           and
           manly
           learning
           ,
           and
           Souldiery
           ,
           
             lest
             I
             should
             here
             presume
             too
             much
             upon
             your
             Majesties
             patience
             ,
             I
             shall
             leave
             further
             account
             of
             him
             to
             my
             Epistle
             to
             the
             Reader
             ,
             and
             only
             present
             your
             Majesty
             with
             the
             summe
             of
             what
             he
             sayes
             to
             the
          
           Cardinal
           
             about
             the
             conquest
             ;
             and
             that
             is
          
           ;
           
             
               That
               it
               will
               neither
               be
            
             hard
             nor
             expensive
             ,
             
               as
               neither
               needing
               great
               Armies
               ,
               to
               give
               battels
               ;
               nor
               great
               provision
               of
               Artillery
               ,
               for
               carrying
               on
            
             
             
               of
               sieges
               .
               There
               is
               need
               only
               of
               preparations
               fitting
               for
               planting
               of
               five
               Colonies
               at
               the
               first
               aboard
               .
               The
               first
               whereof
               is
               to
               be
               in
               the
            
             Isle
             of
             the
             Sun
             ,
             
               for
               guarding
               the
               best
               entrie
               into
               the
               great
               Rivers
               mouth
               .
               The
               second
               on
               the
               famous
            
             Bosphore
             or
             Strait
             
               thereof
               ,
               to
               defend
               ,
               or
               keep
               this
               Rivers
               passage
               .
               The
               third
               on
               the
               renowned
            
             point
             
               of
               the
            
             Comanares
             ,
             
               for
               the
               best
               seat
               of
               that
               whole
               Empire
               .
               The
               fourth
               near
               to
               the
               mountain
               of
            
             Swana
             ,
             
               whereby
               to
               be
               master
               of
               the
               gold-mine
               there
               .
               And
               the
               fifth
               and
               last
               on
               the
               mouth
               of
               the
               River
               of
            
             Maragnon
             ,
             
               to
               watch
               over
               the
               Frontier
               of
               that
               side
               of
               the
            
             Andes
             .
             
               And
               in
               favours
               of
               such
               a
               first
               establishment
               ,
               there
               might
               easily
               be
               added
               the
            
             alliances
             
               of
               the
               Illustrious
               and
               renowned
               Nations
               of
               the
            
             Homagues
             ,
             
               of
               the
               generous
               and
               noble
            
             Yorimans
             ,
             
               of
               the
               valiant
               and
               redoubted
            
             Topinambes
             ;
             
               and
               order
               given
               for
               a
            
             Fleet-volant
             
               of
               about
               twelve
               men
               of
               Warre
               ,
               continually
               to
               be
               visiting
               ,
               and
               going
               between
               these
               Colonies
               :
               because
               the
               distance
               by
               sailing
               ,
               of
               the
               farthest
               of
               them
               from
               the
               others
               ,
               will
               be
               at
               the
               least
               a
               thousand
               Spanish
               leagues
               and
               alwayes
               upon
               the
               channell
               of
               the
               great
            
             Amazone
             it self
             .
          
           
             Thus
             he
          
           .
        
         
           
             I
             call
             my
             gift
             also
             ,
             a
             mean
             gift
             from
          
           a
           mean
           giver
           ;
           
             not
             that
             I
             was
             ,
             or
             am
             so
          
           mean
           
             in
             my self
             ,
             as
          
           made
           so
           
             by
             the
             late
             troubles
             ,
             and
             troublers
             of
             the
             times
             .
             For
             ,
             Royall
             Sir
             ,
             my
             Father
             Sir
          
           Robert
           Hamilton
           of
           Goswick
           ,
           
             was
             Gentleman
             of
             the
             Privy-Chamber
             both
             to
             your
             Royall
             Father
             and
             Grandfather
             ;
             and
             my
             Mother
             was
             by
             King
          
           
           James
           
             himself
             preferred
             to
             his
             Queen
             ,
             for
             one
             of
             her
             Maids
             of
             honour
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             also
             by
             himself
             bestowed
             in
             marriage
             upon
             Sir
          
           Hadrian
           Dammane
           ,
           Lord
           Bisterveldt
           and
           Fair-hill
           ;
           
             after
             whose
             decease
             my
             Father
             married
             her
             .
             My
             Father
             ,
             and
             any
             estate
             I
             should
             have
             had
             by
             him
             ,
             I
             lost
             through
             the
             troubles
             of
             the
             times
             ;
             and
             have
             wanted
             them
             now
             these
             seventeen
             years
             ;
             for
             reparation
             whereof
             ,
             and
             coming
             hither
             to
             wait
             for
             it
             ,
             I
             left
             one
             place
             of
             considerable
             value
             in
          
           Scotland
           ,
           
             and
             spent
             here
             in
             three
             years
             attendance
             for
             reparation
             ,
             what
             I
             could
             then
             bring
             with
             me
             ;
             and
             then
             embracing
             another
             place
             here
             in
          
           England
           ,
           
             not
             much
             worse
             than
             the
             former
             ,
             was
             not
             only
             again
             put
             from
             it
             ,
             before
             I
             had
             enjoyed
             it
             full
             two
             years
             to
             an
             end
             ,
             for
             keeping
             my
             fidelity
             to
             your
             Majesty
             in
             refusing
             to
             subscribe
             an
             engagement
             ,
             or
             allegiance
             (
             for
             so
             it
             was
             indeed
             ,
             whatever
             they
             called
             it
             )
             to
             another
             Soveraignty
             ;
             but
             suffered
             also
             four
             or
             five
             years
             banishment
             ,
             to
             the
             almost
             irreparable
             detriment
             of
             my
             health
             and
             estate
             both
             ;
             yea
             ,
             and
             refused
             all
             preferments
             from
             the
             usurpers
             ,
             and
             the
             least
             compliances
             with
             them
             ,
             both
             before
             my
             banishment
             ,
             and
             now
             for
             seven
             years
             after
             ,
             though
             I
             was
             wooed
             thereto
             ,
             and
             might
             have
             got
             considerable
             advancement
             with
             ease
             ,
             could
             I
             have
             embraced
             it
             with
             complyance
             ;
             but
             would
             never
             so
             much
             as
             commence
             suit
             under
             them
             ;
             though
             but
             for
             recovering
             some
             debts
             ,
             or
             defending
             my self
             from
             others
             unjust
             pursuits
             .
             And
             that
             these
             losses
             ,
             Sir
             ,
             wherein
             consisted
             all
             my
             estate
             ,
             and
             that
             a
             considerable
             one
             too
             ,
             when
             your
             Majesty
             shall
             know
             the
             
             particulars
             ,
             should
             make
             me
             poor
             ,
             is
             little
             wonder
             ;
             and
             that
             poverty
             through
             its
             disadvantages
             ,
             and
             my
             former
             disparity
             of
             life
             ,
             should
             ruine
             my
             health
             ,
             is
             as
             little
             wonder
             ;
             and
             that
             all
             the
             disadvantages
             ,
             that
             a
             ruined
             health
             ,
             and
             poverty
             can
             bring
             a
             man
             to
             ,
             should
             disable
             me
             to
             do
             such
             thing
             as
             otherwise
             I
             could
             ,
             and
             would
             have
             done
             ,
             to
             present
             your
             Majesty
             with
             ,
             is
             yet
             as
             little
             strange
             ,
             as
             the
             former
             :
             but
             that
             I
             should
             yet
             be
             alive
             ,
             poor
             as
             I
             am
             ,
             to
             offer
             this
             poor
             gift
             unto
             your
             Majesty
             ,
          
           that
           is
           the
           wonder
           .
           
             And
             indeed
             it
             is
             Gods
             good
             hand
             towards
             me
             ,
             whom
             I
             hope
             he
             hath
             reserved
             for
             doing
             himself
             ,
             and
             your
             Majesty
             some
             greater
             service
             ,
             before
             I
             be
             called
             hence
             .
             For
             ,
             Royall
             Sir
             ,
             God
             hath
             not
             made
             me
             so
          
           poor
           
             in
             gifts
             of
             minde
             ,
             (
             of
             which
             as
             I
             may
             not
             brag
             ,
             but
             by
             glorying
             in
             him
             ,
             and
             in
             my
             infirmities
             or
             sufferings
             for
             him
             ;
             so
             may
             I
             not
          
           ungratefully
           
             conceal
             ,
             lessen
             ,
             or
             undervalue
             to
             his
             dishonour
             ,
             what
             they
             are
             ,
             but
             with
             modesty
             confess
             ,
             when
             just
             occasion
             flagitates
             and
             extorts
             it
             from
             me
             )
             through
             his
             blessing
             ,
             if
             your
             Majesty
             will
             but
             patronize
             me
             (
             I
             shall
             not
             say
          
           Mecaenas
           -
           
             like
             ;
             for
             that
             is
             too
             little
             for
             you
             ,
             though
             it
             was
             truely
             said
             of
             him
             ,
          
           Mecaenas
           atavis
           edite
           regibus
           !
           but
           Angustus
           
             like
             rather
             ,
             beyond
             whom
             himself
             your
             Majesty
             is
             in
             this
             also
             ,
             that
             you
             can
             number
             more
             Kings
             of
             your
             Progenitors
             ,
             than
             were
             in
             all
             the
             Roman
             race
             of
             Kings
             ,
             and
             Emperors
             both
             ,
             either
             before
             ,
             or
             after
          
           Augustus
           
             to
             this
             day
             )
             I
             hope
             to
             honour
             your
             Majesty
             with
             such
             gifts
             of
             mine
             own
             store
             ,
             as
             never
             a
             King
             in
             Christendome
             for
             these
             sixteen
             hundred
             years
             ,
             ever
             had
             Subject
             ,
             that
             did
             
             the
             like
             ,
             though
             many
             have
             attempted
             ,
          
           absint
           &
           jactantia
           ,
           &
           invidia
           verbo
           :
           
             but
             your
             Majesty
             must
             midwife
             them
             ,
             and
             my self
             both
             into
             the
             world
             again
             ,
             and
             then
             by
             Gods
             assistance
             shall
             I
             renew
             my
             strength
             and
             youth
             ,
             as
             the
             Eagle
             ,
          
           &
           sublimi
           feriam
           sidera
           vertice
           .
        
         
           
             If
             here
             it
             be
             wondred
             ,
             that
             thus
             I
             implore
             your
             Majesties
             justice
             and
             favour
             ,
             and
             made
             not
             rather
             a
             privater
             address
             ,
             for
             repairing
             of
             my
             losses
             ;
             I
             shall
             humbly
             and
             truely
             profess
             ,
             that
             I
             have
             not
             left
             privater
             wayes
             unattempted
             ;
             but
             finde
             all
             so
             obstructed
             with
             difficulties
             ,
             and
             non-considerancies
             ,
             or
             cold
             layings
             to
             heart
             of
             my
             case
             ,
             that
             neither
             the
             health
             of
             my
             body
             ,
             nor
             the
             strength
             of
             my
             purse
             would
             suffer
             me
             to
             hope
             for
             much
             good
             otherwayes
             ,
             and
             from
             Courtiers
             ,
             than
             thus
             by
             ushering
             in
             my
             Petition
             ;
             and
             then
             I
             hope
             more
             seasonably
             ,
             and
             succesfully
             to
             reap
             the
             fruits
             of
             a
             privater
             application
             .
             I
             thought
             often
             of
             that
             course
             ,
             that
             the
             poor
             Widow
             took
             with
          
           Philip
           of
           Macedon
           ,
           
             the
             Father
             of
          
           Alexander
           
             the
             Great
             :
             who
             when
             she
             had
             attempted
             by
          
           Courtiers
           ,
           and
           Favourites
           
             to
             get
             justice
             done
             her
             ,
             but
             could
             not
             prevail
             with
             them
             to
             preferre
             her
             business
             to
             the
          
           King
           ;
           
             resolved
             to
             attaque
             him
             her self
             ,
             the
             best
             she
             could
             ,
             come
             of
             it
             what
             would
             ;
             though
             of
             him
             at
             worst
             ,
             she
             hoped
             much
             better
             ,
             than
             of
             any
             of
             his
             Courtiers
             ,
             as
             I
             also
             do
             of
             your
             Majesty
             now
             .
             Casting
             her self
             therefore
             in
             his
             way
             ,
             when
             she
             knew
             ,
             he
             was
             to
             ride
             out
             ,
             with
             high
             vociferations
             she
             cryed
             after
             him
             ,
          
           Help
           my
           Lord
           ,
           O
           King
           ;
           help
           O
           King
           !
           
             He
             commanding
             to
             stand
             ,
             and
             see
             what
             ailed
             her
             ;
             she
          
           
           
             desired
             him
             to
             read
             and
             answer
             her
             Petition
             with
             justice
             .
             He
             answering
             that
             it
             was
             unfit
             then
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             had
             not
             leasure
             for
             it
             ;
             she
             replyed
             upon
             him
             boldly
             ,
             That
             then
          
           he
           should
           not
           be
           at
           leasure
           to
           be
           King
           ,
           
             if
             he
             could
             not
             have
             leasure
             to
             right
             his
             meanest
             Subjects
             ,
             when
             all
             their
             patience
             and
             endeavours
             were
             otherwayes
             frustrate
             and
             wearied
             out
             .
             Upon
             which
             he
             was
             so
             far
             from
             being
             dissatisfied
             with
             her
             ,
             that
             rather
             admiring
             her
             resolution
             ,
             he
             most
             generously
             and
             heroickly
             gave
             her
             a
             present
             hearing
             ,
             and
             full
             right
             of
             her
             wrong
             .
             Sir
             ,
             my
             way
             is
             not
             so
             course
             ,
             as
             hers
             was
             ,
             but
             by
             a
             gift
             (
             which
             both
             with
             God
             ,
             and
             all
             noblest
             spirits
             among
             men
             ,
             finds
             acceptance
             )
             though
             but
             a
             poor
             onee
             ,
             to
             have
             the
             softer
             access
             to
             your
             Majesties
             favour
             ,
             and
             a
             cordialler
             consideration
             of
             my
             case
             ,
             when
             it
             comes
             to
             your
             Majesty
             in
             a
             more
             particular
             way
             ;
             and
             an
             easier
             grant
             of
             privacy
             for
             immediate
             imparting
             your
             Majesty
             with
             some
             things
             ,
             which
             is
             more
             for
             your
             Majesties
             good
             ,
             than
             for
             my
             particular
             .
             Thus
             wise
          
           Abigail
           
             not
             only
             pacified
          
           David
           
             towards
             an
             unthankefull
             and
             churlish
          
           Nabal
           ,
           
             but
             made
             way
             for
             her self
             for
             such
             a
             surplussage
             of
             favour
             ,
             as
             she
             little
             dreamed
             of
             ,
             to
             become
             a
             Kings
             wife
             ,
             and
             royal
             bedfellow
             ,
             and
             her
             issue
             preferred
             in
             the
             entail
             of
             the
             Crowr
             ,
             before
             all
             other
             of
          
           Davids
           
             children
             ,
             except
          
           Bathshebaes
           .
           
             It
             is
             re
             ported
             of
          
           Alexander
           Severus
           ,
           bAelius
           Lampridius
           
             in
             his
             life
             ,
             that
             be
             quarrelledy
             with
             every
             vertuous
             person
             ,
             that
             be
             knew
             ,
             who
             either
             asked
             nothing
             of
             him
             ,
             or
             but
             little
             .
          
           Quid
           est
           (
           inquit
           )
           quod
           nihil
           petis
           ?
           An
           me
           vis
           tibi
           fieri
           
           debitorem
           ?
           Why
           ask
           you
           nothing
           of
           me
           ?
           Would
           you
           have
           me
           to
           die
           in
           your
           debt
           ?
           
             Sir
             ,
             lest
             I
             presume
             too
             much
             upon
             your
             Majesties
             great
             affairs
             ,
             in
             exceeding
             the
             bounds
             of
             an
             Epistle
             to
             so
             great
             a
             Prince
             ,
             for
             the
             length
             whereof
             already
             I
             humbly
             beg
             pardon
             ,
             my
             hopes
             and
             desires
             are
             that
             you
             shall
             not
             come
             short
             of
             any
             of
             those
             Worthies
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             most
             heroick
             Princes
             ,
             but
             surmount
             them
             all
             ,
             in
             all
             royall
             endowments
             ,
             to
             your
             becoming
             the
             Crown
             and
             rejoycing
             of
             all
             the
          
           reformed
           ,
           
             in
             prosecuting
             their
             interest
             ,
             which
             is
             Gods
             ,
             and
             becoming
             their
          
           uniter
           and
           head
           ,
           
             that
             you
             may
             be
          
           Carolo
           magno
           major
           ,
           
             as
             undoubtedly
             you
             will
             ,
             if
             thus
             you
             do
             :
             and
             which
             that
             you
             may
             do
             ,
             Long
             may
             your
             Majesty
             live
             in
             all
             piety
             ,
             plenty
             ,
             and
             peace
             ;
             or
             else
             just
             and
             happy
             triumphs
             here
             ;
             and
             hereafter
             in
             the
             joyes
             and
             triumphs
             of
             heaven
             ,
             where
             there
             is
             nothing
             but
             glory
             ,
             triumphs
             ,
             and
             joy
             without
             end
             .
             So
             prayeth
          
        
         
           
             
               Your
               Majesties
               most
               humble
               ,
               loyall
               ,
               and
               faithfull
               Subject
               and
               Servant
               ,
            
             William
             Hamilton
             .
          
        
         
      
       
         
         
           TO
           THE
           Courteous
           and
           Candid
           READER
           .
        
         
           
             
               
                 Courteous
                 Reader
                 ,
              
            
             
               I
               Must
               give
               thee
               some
               more
               account
               of
               the
               Author
               of
               this
               Booke
               ,
               and
               of
               its
               worth
               ,
               and
               of
               my self
               ,
               his
               Translatour
               ,
               and
               so
               bid
               thee
               farewell
               .
               About
               the
               Author
               ,
               I
               shall
               not
               repeat
               ,
               what
               hath
               been
               said
               of
               him
               before
               ,
               in
               my
               Dedication
               to
               his
               Majesty
               for
               his
               just
               commendation
               ,
               and
               of
               this
               Book
               of
               his
               in
               particular
               ,
               but
               referre
               thee
               thither
               ,
               if
               thou
               art
               desirous
               to
               know
               it
               .
               I
               shall
               here
               only
               adde
               ,
               That
               he
               was
               in
               great
               employment
               and
               favour
               with
               the
               late
               King
               of
               
                 France
                 ,
                 Lewis
              
               the
               thirteenth
               ,
               for
               his
               great
               parts
               of
               conduct
               and
               valour
               in
               his
               service
               ;
               wherein
               unfortunately
               he
               received
               a
               shot
               of
               a
               Pistoll
               in
               the
               left
               eye
               ,
               whereby
               it
               was
               quite
               lost
               ,
               and
               the
               conjugation
               of
               the
               optick
               nerves
               so
               crushed
               ,
               that
               he
               hath
               lost
               the
               use
               of
               both
               now
               above
               these
               twenty
               yeares
               :
               yet
               ,
               which
               is
               wonderfull
               ,
               
               is
               still
               penning
               new
               Books
               ,
               and
               in
               Mathematicks
               especially
               ,
               which
               indeed
               needs
               least
               the
               outward
               sense
               ;
               amongst
               which
               is
               that
               master-piece
               ,
               The
               ten
               Books
               of
               Geometricall
               Theorems
               ,
               wherein
               he
               compleated
               and
               demonstrated
               so
               many
               diverse
               ,
               and
               distinct
               parts
               of
               Mathematicall
               Sciences
               .
               His
               Book
               of
               the
               theory
               of
               Planets
               is
               Geometrically
               demonstrated
               ,
               without
               any
               mixture
               of
               Physicall
               equations
               ,
               by
               which
               Reignoldus
               and
               Kepler
               laboured
               so
               much
               to
               perfect
               the
               Geometricall
               ,
               wherein
               their
               deferents
               ,
               and
               Epicicles
               could
               not
               serve
               their
               turn
               .
               But
               this
               Gentleman
               hath
               found
               out
               both
               the
               center
               of
               the
               Planets
               ,
               and
               demonstrated
               their
               motions
               to
               be
               ellipticall
               ,
               which
               no
               man
               afore
               him
               could
               attain
               to
               .
               And
               in
               consequence
               to
               his
               theory
               ,
               he
               published
               Astronomicall
               tables
               two
               yeares
               ago
               ,
               wherein
               with
               great
               facility
               and
               exactness
               ,
               the
               motions
               of
               all
               the
               Planets
               may
               be
               supputate
               ,
               the
               Eclipses
               of
               the
               two
               great
               luminaries
               ,
               and
               the
               celestiall
               configurations
               :
               and
               in
               consequence
               to
               them
               ,
               a
               facile
               method
               of
               finding
               out
               the
               true
               longitudes
               ,
               both
               by
               sea
               ,
               and
               land
               .
               His
               more
               than
               ordinary
               skill
               in
               Geography
               ,
               may
               be
               seen
               by
               his
               two
               Advertisements
               to
               Geographers
               ,
               at
               the
               end
               of
               this
               Booke
               ,
               and
               by
               the
               Book
               it self
               :
               wherein
               with
               great
               judgement
               and
               brevity
               he
               hath
               given
               an
               excellent
               ,
               and
               the
               clearcst
               description
               of
               a
               great
               part
               of
               America
               ,
               that
               any
               where
               is
               to
               be
               had
               :
               he
               having
               collected
               this
               out
               of
               all
               the
               best
               relations
               ,
               and
               discoveries
               ,
               that
               were
               extant
               ;
               and
               corrected
               their
               errors
               ,
               adding
               a
               Mapp
               of
               his
               own
               .
               All
               which
               his
               Pieces
               here
               mentioned
               ,
               and
               in
               my
               Dedication
               
               to
               his
               Majesty
               shall
               be
               by
               me
               made
               English
               Denizens
               ,
               if
               this
               be
               well
               accepted
               ,
               and
               the
               other
               required
               .
               The
               Books
               are
               not
               here
               to
               be
               had
               for
               money
               ,
               but
               from
               such
               ,
               as
               himself
               gifted
               them
               to
               ;
               amongst
               whom
               is
               an
               old
               servant
               of
               his
               Majesties
               ,
               my
               
                 L.
                 D.
              
               from
               whom
               this
               Book
               came
               ,
               and
               who
               still
               keeps
               a
               correspondence
               with
               him
               ,
               and
               is
               gifted
               with
               every
               Piece
               ,
               that
               be
               publisheth
               .
               The
               Author
               is
               still
               a
               privy
               Counsellour
               to
               his
               now
               Majesty
               of
               France
               ;
               and
               as
               his
               naturals
               appear
               to
               have
               been
               great
               ,
               so
               also
               they
               have
               been
               much
               adorned
               ,
               and
               elevated
               by
               his
               Gentlemanny
               learning
               ,
               which
               he
               hath
               industriously
               followed
               ;
               and
               consists
               in
               these
               dayes
               (
               the
               greater
               the
               fault
               of
               Pedants
               ,
               that
               make
               any
               learning
               ungentile
               ;
               as
               indeed
               none
               is
               where
               it
               hath
               a
               gentile
               client
               )
               chiefly
               in
               Politicks
               ,
               and
               History
               ,
               and
               Mathematicks
               with
               their
               appendants
               ,
               as
               conducible
               to
               a
               Gentleman
               ,
               and
               a
               Souldier
               :
               and
               after
               he
               was
               disabled
               from
               Field-action
               ,
               by
               the
               loss
               of
               his
               sight
               ,
               some
               theoreticaller
               Mathematicks
               also
               .
               This
               is
               not
               rare
               in
               France
               ,
               That
               Grandees
               there
               are
               well
               versed
               in
               such
               studies
               ,
               as
               by
               Duke
               
                 de
                 Rohanes
              
               Interest
               of
               Princes
               ,
               and
               
                 Perfect
                 Capitaine
              
               ,
               and
               many
               other
               
                 French
                 Gentlemens
              
               Pieces
               of
               a
               like
               nature
               ,
               may
               appear
               .
               And
               it
               were
               to
               be
               wished
               .
               That
               elsewhere
               also
               ,
               Grandees
               and
               Gentry
               were
               both
               as
               well
               trained
               up
               ,
               and
               had
               as
               good
               opportunity
               of
               such
               peculiar
               Academies
               ,
               where
               all
               gentile
               ,
               and
               Souldierly
               exercises
               ,
               and
               requisites
               for
               conduct
               and
               command
               ,
               are
               taught
               ,
               as
               the
               French
               have
               ;
               and
               the
               
                 Prince
                 of
                 Orange
              
               ,
               to
               his
               
               immortall
               praise
               (
               himself
               having
               been
               bred
               in
               the
               Academy
               of
               Benjamin
               in
               Paris
               ,
               where
               I
               my self
               saw
               him
               at
               his
               exercises
               )
               to
               the
               Weal
               of
               his
               Countrey
               ,
               and
               from
               his
               own
               estate
               ,
               was
               going
               to
               enrich
               the
               confederate
               Provinces
               ;
               that
               as
               they
               were
               before
               a
               School
               of
               Warre
               ,
               for
               experience
               and
               practice
               ,
               especially
               about
               sieges
               ,
               and
               taking
               in
               of
               Towns
               ;
               so
               they
               might
               be
               for
               breeding
               also
               to
               field-services
               ,
               and
               all
               warlike
               atchievements
               .
            
             
               Yet
               the
               French
               are
               so
               far
               from
               envying
               others
               ,
               that
               attain
               to
               any
               perfection
               in
               these
               things
               ,
               otherwayes
               ,
               or
               elsewhere
               ,
               that
               there
               is
               no
               where
               readier
               preferment
               for
               their
               merits
               ,
               or
               more
               honour
               done
               to
               such
               ,
               as
               I
               could
               instance
               of
               late
               memory
               ;
               which
               is
               
                 truly
                 noble
              
               .
               For
               there
               is
               a
               money-nobility
               ,
               or
               Gentry
               ,
               that
               is
               now
               crepe
               into
               the
               world
               ,
               through
               abuse
               ,
               and
               pesters
               it
               with
               many
               inconveniences
               ,
               having
               nothing
               of
               the
               thing
               ,
               but
               the
               name
               only
               ,
               and
               empty
               titles
               ;
               nor
               of
               that
               connexion
               of
               virtues
               ,
               and
               with
               virtue
               ,
               without
               which
               
                 true
                 Gentry
              
               ,
               or
               Nobility
               cannot
               be
               ,
               nor
               subsist
               ,
               had
               it
               never
               so
               much
               
                 riches
                 ,
                 antiquity
                 of
                 descent
              
               ,
               or
               windy
               titles
               from
               Prince
               or
               State.
               For
               
                 true
                 Gentry
              
               is
               
                 virtus
                 generis
                 ,
                 vertue
                 running
                 in
                 a
                 blood
                 ,
              
               and
               either
               increasing
               ,
               or
               descending
               in
               a
               race
               ,
               or
               breed
               .
               It
               's
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               i.
               e.
               generosity
               ,
               or
               an
               excellency
               of
               
                 a
                 kindred
              
               ,
               or
               family
               ,
               but
               sustained
               ,
               or
               encreased
               still
               with
               vertue
               suitable
               to
               its
               beginning
               ,
               or
               first
               
                 advancement
                 .
                 Nobilitas
                 sola
                 est
                 ,
                 atq
                 :
                 unica
                 virtus
                 .
              
               All
               mankind
               was
               made
               of
               
                 one
                 blood
              
               ,
               and
               all
               Nations
               of
               men
               ,
               that
               dwell
               upon
               all
               the
               face
               of
               the
               earth
               ,
               
                 Act.
                 17.26
              
               .
               
               (
               there
               were
               no
               Praeadamites
               ,
               as
               brainsick
               Pierrier
               dreamed
               )
               to
               whom
               God
               determined
               the
               times
               before
               appointed
               ,
               and
               the
               bounds
               of
               their
               habitations
               ;
               so
               as
               none
               ,
               either
               men
               ,
               or
               Nations
               ,
               can
               claim
               truly
               any
               prerogative
               of
               nobleness
               ,
               but
               by
               their
               virtue
               ,
               as
               the
               Bereans
               are
               witnessed
               to
               have
               been
               more
               noble
               ,
               than
               the
               Jews
               of
               Thessalonica
               ,
               for
               their
               unprejudicateness
               and
               candour
               ,
               by
               Gods
               own
               unerring
               Spirit
               ,
               because
               they
               unpartially
               examined
               ,
               what
               was
               proposed
               to
               them
               ,
               and
               held
               not
               the
               truth
               of
               God
               ,
               With
               acception
               of
               persons
               ,
               
                 Act.
                 17.11
              
               .
               All
               were
               certainly
               noble
               at
               first
               ,
               and
               had
               ever
               continued
               so
               ,
               had
               it
               not
               been
               for
               sin
               ,
               because
               all
               were
               the
               ofspring
               of
               God
               ,
               
                 Act.
                 27.28
                 ,
                 29.
              
               
               And
               God
               begot
               ,
               or
               made
               no
               ignoble
               children
               ,
               as
               the
               Greeks
               and
               French
               use
               to
               phrase
               it
               .
               Sin
               only
               brought
               in
               ignobleness
               then
               ,
               and
               degeneracy
               ,
               as
               virtue
               only
               makes
               and
               maintains
               the
               contrary
               :
               what
               for
               
                 virtue
                 naturall
              
               (
               let
               not
               Sciolists
               here
               mistake
               me
               ;
               for
               
                 virtue
                 naturall
              
               rightly
               expounded
               ,
               is
               no
               wayes
               contrary
               to
               sound
               Divinity
               )
               what
               for
               acquired
               ;
               what
               for
               intellectuall
               ;
               what
               for
               morall
               ;
               what
               for
               
                 hereditary
                 and
                 transmitted
              
               by
               descent
               (
               which
               is
               all
               one
               with
               naturall
               ;
               there
               being
               
                 igniculi
                 ;
                 &
                 semina
                 virtutum
              
               in
               nature
               ,
               which
               are
               called
               naturall
               or
               
                 hereditary
                 vertues
              
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               there
               is
               in
               sicknesses
               ,
               and
               soundness
               of
               health
               )
               it
               is
               only
               vertue
               still
               ,
               that
               makes
               
                 true
                 gentry
              
               ,
               or
               generosity
               ,
               and
               keeps
               it
               
                 afoot
                 .
                 Est
                 in
                 equis
                 patrum
                 virtus
                 ,
                 nec
                 imbelles
                 &
                 degeneres
                 procreant
                 aquilam
                 columbae
                 .
              
               The
               ground
               of
               generosity
               ,
               whence
               other
               gentry
               regularly
               proceeds
               ,
               I
               mean
               
               that
               of
               preheminence
               
                 in
                 offices
              
               ,
               or
               power
               ,
               whether
               Oeconomick
               ,
               or
               Civil
               ;
               where
               unto
               I
               must
               not
               now
               enlarge
               my self
               ,
               to
               speak
               in
               particular
               )
               Jacob
               in
               his
               testament
               to
               his
               sons
               ,
               doth
               both
               philosophically
               and
               divinely
               set
               down
               ,
               to
               wit
               ,
               the
               
                 impregnation
                 of
                 nature
              
               ,
               and
               
                 elevating
                 of
                 the
                 phancy
                 and
                 spirits
                 ,
              
               to
               the
               highest
               and
               noblest
               thoughts
               ,
               and
               inclinations
               ,
               that
               ones
               condition
               ,
               and
               way
               of
               breeding
               can
               suffer
               them
               to
               mount
               up
               to
               ;
               which
               God
               himself
               also
               teaches
               in
               another
               place
               ,
               when
               he
               says
               ,
               that
               
                 he
                 would
                 rejoyce
                 over
                 Israel
                 ,
                 as
                 a
                 bridegroom
                 rejoyceth
                 over
                 his
                 bride
                 .
              
               For
               then
               is
               that
               special
               time
               of
               loves
               ,
               Ezek.
               16.8
               .
               (
               not
               romantick
               only
               ,
               much
               sinfully
               such
               ,
               as
               most
               romances
               are
               wicked
               ,
               and
               have
               death
               in
               the
               pot
               ,
               but
               common
               and
               natural
               ,
               especially
               to
               common
               men
               ;
               though
               wise
               men
               ,
               that
               under
               stand
               nature
               ,
               and
               can
               govern
               her
               ,
               may
               both
               inhance
               that
               without
               sin
               ,
               and
               make
               other
               times
               equall
               ,
               if
               not
               go
               beyond
               it
               )
               and
               love
               is
               the
               seminary
               of
               all
               nobleness
               ,
               and
               productive
               of
               all
               vertue
               ,
               and
               
                 vertuous
                 emulation
              
               to
               vertuous
               actions
               ,
               and
               growth
               therein
               ;
               as
               hatred
               and
               envy
               are
               of
               the
               contrary
               ;
               witness
               that
               example
               
                 Act.
                 17
                 5
                 ,
                 6
                 ,
                 7
                 ,
                 11
                 ,
                 12.
                 
              
               And
               it
               must
               needs
               be
               so
               ,
               seeing
               
                 conjugall
                 love
              
               was
               the
               first
               measure
               ,
               and
               fountain
               of
               all
               neighbourly
               love
               ,
               and
               neighbourly
               love
               is
               the
               fulfilling
               of
               the
               Law
               ;
               as
               the
               first
               summe
               of
               the
               second
               Table
               ,
               or
               
                 thou
                 shalt
                 love
                 thy
                 neighbour
                 as
                 thy self
              
               ;
               and
               
                 do
                 to
                 others
                 as
                 thou
                 would
                 be
                 done
                 to
              
               ;
               was
               virtually
               included
               in
               that
               divinely
               inspired
               sentence
               of
               Adams
               ;
               This
               is
               now
               bone
               of
               my
               bone
               ,
               and
               flesh
               of
               my
               flesh
               :
               according
               to
               that
               pronounced
               of
               
                 all
                 poor
              
               ,
               
               though
               never
               so
               great
               strangers
               ;
               
                 Hide
                 not
                 thy self
                 from
                 thy
                 own
                 flesh
                 .
                 Primogeniture
              
               then
               and
               nobleness
               were
               divinely
               and
               naturally
               both
               supposed
               to
               be
               conjunct
               ,
               and
               consequent
               one
               to
               the
               other
               ,
               because
               there
               the
               might
               of
               the
               parents
               ,
               and
               beginning
               or
               flowr
               of
               their
               strength
               ,
               both
               as
               to
               body
               and
               mind
               were
               put
               forth
               in
               point
               of
               affection
               ,
               and
               affections
               are
               the
               seats
               of
               virtues
               :
               and
               therefore
               also
               to
               primogeniture
               was
               given
               the
               
                 excellency
                 of
                 dignity
              
               ,
               and
               the
               
                 excellency
                 of
                 power
              
               ,
               i.e.
               the
               preeminence
               and
               precedency
               before
               others
               ,
               both
               of
               merit
               ,
               and
               of
               office
               ;
               or
               of
               
                 nobility
                 and
                 high
                 places
              
               of
               trust
               ,
               whether
               in
               Church
               ,
               or
               State-relation
               ,
               and
               much
               more
               in
               Oeconomick
               :
               yet
               so
               ,
               as
               it
               was
               alwayes
               forfeitable
               by
               vice
               ,
               and
               devolvable
               to
               others
               more
               vertuous
               ,
               as
               by
               
                 Cain
                 ,
                 Ishmael
                 ,
                 Esau
                 ,
                 Reuben
              
               and
               many
               more
               ,
               is
               manifest
               .
               But
               want
               of
               breeding
               to
               noble
               thoughts
               ,
               and
               ends
               ;
               and
               instruction
               to
               inure
               to
               chast
               and
               continent
               love
               ,
               and
               not
               to
               deflore
               so
               much
               as
               their
               fancies
               ,
               before
               the
               due
               and
               lawfull
               time
               ;
               abuse
               also
               of
               marriage
               to
               base
               ends
               and
               by-respects
               ,
               especially
               of
               money
               ;
               and
               imprudent
               choices
               in
               sundry
               other
               respects
               ,
               grown
               common
               with
               prodigality
               ,
               luxury
               ,
               and
               many
               other
               vices
               ,
               have
               in
               these
               Countreys
               and
               times
               flatted
               and
               unspirited
               all
               natural
               nobleness
               and
               generosity
               either
               into
               a
               soft
               effeminacy
               ,
               or
               sowr
               vineger
               of
               pride
               ,
               and
               vanity
               ,
               imbittered
               with
               the
               gall
               of
               many
               other
               vices
               ,
               instead
               of
               the
               generous
               wine
               ,
               they
               came
               of
               .
               And
               where
               natural
               gentry
               ,
               or
               generosity
               is
               not
               ,
               seldome
               is
               the
               other
               of
               morall
               and
               acquired
               to
               be
               found
               ;
               and
               so
               we
               are
               left
               to
               empty
               
               names
               of
               
                 civill
                 tities
              
               entailed
               upon
               riches
               and
               descent
               ,
               by
               creation
               ,
               or
               patent
               .
               Certainly
               there
               is
               a
               wisdome
               ,
               if
               we
               studied
               it
               as
               well
               ,
               as
               some
               do
               the
               other
               ,
               of
               having
               a
               
                 noble
                 breed
              
               of
               men
               and
               women
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               there
               is
               of
               
                 Horses
                 ,
                 Cocks
              
               ,
               and
               Cattle
               .
               None
               will
               think
               dunghill-Cockrell
               ,
               fit
               for
               game
               ;
               nor
               a
               jadish
               race
               for
               the
               services
               of
               a
               gallant
               Jennet
               :
               and
               yet
               we
               think
               any
               thing
               
                 fit
                 enough
              
               for
               our
               Progenie's
               ,
               that
               hath
               but
               money
               enough
               .
               High
               birth
               and
               fortunes
               ,
               are
               in
               themselves
               ,
               both
               of
               them
               ,
               the
               good
               blessings
               of
               God
               ,
               and
               are
               in
               honour
               with
               all
               persons
               of
               honour
               ,
               where
               ever
               they
               are
               ,
               or
               have
               been
               in
               any
               ,
               that
               have
               suitable
               vertues
               ,
               but
               have
               parted
               with
               fortunes
               for
               vertues
               sake
               .
               But
               for
               a
               Gentleman
               whose
               fortunes
               are
               become
               unsuitable
               to
               his
               ranke
               ,
               whether
               by
               his
               own
               fault
               ,
               or
               others
               ,
               or
               by
               neither
               ,
               but
               by
               wrong
               ,
               or
               misfortune
               ,
               for
               reparation
               of
               an
               estate
               ,
               so
               far
               to
               forget
               himself
               ,
               as
               to
               make
               money
               his
               
                 leading
                 motive
              
               in
               a
               choice
               ,
               is
               ignoble
               enough
               ,
               and
               ungenerous
               ,
               and
               can
               hardly
               expect
               better
               fruits
               of
               his
               way
               .
               We
               know
               ,
               he
               was
               a
               wise
               man
               ,
               that
               said
               ,
               
                 Blessed
                 art
                 thou
                 ,
                 O
                 land
                 ,
                 when
                 thy
                 King
                 is
                 the
                 son
                 of
                 nobles
                 !
              
               Eccles
               .
               10.7
               .
               And
               he
               that
               said
               ,
               
                 Nam
                 genus
                 ,
                 &
                 proavos
                 ,
                 &
                 quae
                 non
                 fecimus
                 ipsi
                 ,
                 vix
                 ea
                 nostra
                 voco
                 ,
              
               in
               opposition
               to
               too
               much
               standing
               on
               ,
               or
               vaunting
               of
               descent
               without
               competent
               vertue
               and
               wisdome
               to
               correspond
               with
               it
               ;
               said
               also
               ,
               
                 Et
                 Mi
                 genus
                 ab
                 Jove
                 summo
                 ,
              
               to
               show
               his
               esteem
               of
               descent
               ;
               and
               with
               virtue
               answerable
               ;
               especially
               of
               such
               a
               descent
               ,
               as
               claimed
               to
               the
               best
               ,
               that
               could
               be
               reckoned
               to
               .
               He
               that
               would
               be
               ashamed
               to
               claim
               so
               honourable
               a
               priviledge
               ,
               
               if
               he
               can
               do
               it
               truely
               ,
               and
               hath
               just
               occasion
               and
               circumstances
               to
               extort
               it
               from
               him
               ,
               would
               show
               but
               himself
               too
               modest
               at
               best
               ,
               and
               almost
               unworthy
               of
               it
               ,
               especially
               if
               he
               had
               a
               better
               Jupiter
               in
               place
               to
               make
               both
               his
               address
               and
               claim
               to
               ,
               than
               the
               other
               had
               .
               For
               as
               low
               as
               my
               fortunes
               are
               ,
               I
               can
               claim
               to
               the
               best
               blood
               in
               England
               ,
               and
               that
               by
               England
               ,
               and
               neither
               very
               far
               off
               ,
               nor
               in
               an
               illegitimate
               way
               .
               Neither
               need
               I
               to
               be
               ashamed
               of
               my
               fortunes
               (
               though
               hitherto
               ,
               which
               was
               my
               weakness
               ,
               I
               have
               been
               ashamed
               of
               them
               ,
               whereas
               I
               ought
               not
               to
               have
               been
               ashamed
               ,
               but
               of
               sin
               )
               seeing
               I
               parted
               from
               them
               willingly
               ,
               for
               retaining
               to
               vertue
               ,
               and
               a
               good
               conscience
               .
               Solomon
               hath
               told
               me
               ,
               that
               
                 all
                 things
                 come
                 alike
                 to
                 all
              
               ;
               and
               that
               the
               
                 race
                 is
                 not
                 to
                 the
                 swift
                 ,
                 nor
                 the
                 battell
                 to
                 the
                 strong
                 ,
                 nor
                 bread
                 to
                 the
                 wise
                 ,
                 nor
                 riches
                 to
                 men
                 of
                 understanding
                 ,
                 nor
                 favour
                 to
                 men
                 of
                 skill
                 ;
                 but
                 time
                 and
                 chance
                 happeneth
                 to
                 them
                 all
                 ,
              
               Eccles
               .
               
                 9.2
                 ,
                 11
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               I
               was
               never
               lower
               yet
               ,
               than
               that
               great
               and
               noble
               Generall
               ,
               of
               that
               great
               Emperour
               Justinian
               ,
               was
               unjustly
               brought
               ,
               to
               his
               masters
               no
               little
               dispraise
               ,
               Belisarius
               of
               immortall
               renown
               .
               And
               why
               should
               I
               be
               ashamed
               to
               lay
               open
               my
               case
               to
               so
               Royall
               a
               Physician
               ,
               as
               I
               have
               done
               ;
               or
               be
               diffident
               of
               the
               cure
               ,
               since
               the
               fountain
               of
               civil
               honour
               (
               which
               he
               is
               )
               will
               do
               nothing
               contrary
               to
               true
               honour
               ;
               and
               Gods
               
                 Great
                 Steward
              
               of
               fortunes
               and
               preferments
               ,
               that
               are
               in
               his
               own
               gift
               ,
               in
               his
               own
               dominions
               ,
               will
               neither
               deal
               niggardly
               ,
               ungenerously
               ,
               or
               unjustly
               ,
               where
               nothing
               but
               justice
               and
               right
               is
               sought
               ?
               Far
               be
               any
               thing
               of
               this
               ,
               from
               being
               taken
               
               as
               contrary
               to
               the
               first
               founders
               of
               a
               noble
               race
               ;
               who
               ,
               though
               they
               cannot
               claim
               descent
               ,
               yet
               are
               beyond
               most
               of
               those
               ,
               that
               can
               :
               since
               it
               is
               more
               to
               give
               ,
               or
               make
               a
               noble
               descent
               ,
               than
               to
               receive
               it
               ,
               and
               most
               cadets
               ,
               prove
               oftner
               cadents
               ,
               than
               culminants
               ,
               and
               seldome
               equall
               their
               founders
               ,
               but
               unspirit
               themselves
               ,
               and
               evaporate
               to
               a
               vappidness
               of
               money
               —
               or
               prediall-gentility
               .
               I
               mean
               not
               so
               much
               that
               ,
               which
               is
               bought
               with
               momy
               (
               for
               that
               may
               be
               so
               ,
               where
               it
               deserved
               to
               have
               been
               given
               )
               as
               that
               which
               hath
               nothing
               but
               riches
               to
               sustain
               it
               .
               Cicero
               answered
               Salustius
               his
               objection
               of
               an
               upstart
               ,
               well
               ,
               (
               if
               we
               suppose
               the
               invectives
               to
               be
               theirs
               )
               
                 Ego
                 meis
                 majoribus
                 virtute
                 praeluxi
                 ;
                 Tu
                 tuis
                 turpiter
                 offudisti
                 tenebras
                 .
              
               And
               as
               for
               occupations
               ,
               and
               offices
               ,
               though
               some
               be
               justly
               accounted
               more
               fordid
               ,
               and
               illiberall
               ;
               others
               more
               honourable
               and
               gentile
               ;
               yet
               all
               that
               are
               lawfull
               ,
               coming
               from
               God
               ,
               and
               from
               his
               Spirit
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               these
               mentioned
               ,
               and
               implyed
               ,
               
                 Exod.
                 31.3
              
               .
               &c.
               none
               joyned
               with
               virtue
               ,
               can
               justly
               ignobilitate
               any
               .
               Yea
               ,
               I
               know
               none
               of
               the
               basest
               and
               meanest
               of
               them
               ,
               but
               in
               conjunction
               with
               virtue
               ,
               and
               piety
               ,
               but
               especially
               when
               they
               come
               to
               put
               on
               something
               of
               the
               nature
               of
               piety
               it self
               ,
               or
               
                 immediate
                 service
              
               to
               God
               ,
               as
               some
               of
               them
               did
               under
               the
               Old
               Testament
               ,
               God
               hath
               left
               place
               for
               them
               to
               be
               
                 pareille
                 to
              
               ,
               or
               in
               conjunction
               with
               the
               highest
               .
               Thus
               David
               wished
               rather
               to
               be
               a
               doorkeeper
               in
               the
               house
               of
               his
               God
               (
               a
               Porter
               of
               the
               Temple
               )
               than
               to
               be
               a
               King
               in
               the
               Tents
               of
               wickedness
               .
               And
               to
               Moses
               his
               posterity
               ,
               though
               King
               in
               Jeshurun
               ,
               yea
               
               more
               than
               a
               King
               ,
               a
               King
               ,
               Priest
               and
               Prophet
               ,
               which
               is
               more
               than
               ever
               we
               read
               of
               any
               other
               (
               except
               Christ
               ,
               of
               whom
               be
               was
               therein
               a
               singular
               Type
               ;
               ever
               a
               typicall
               Mediatour
               ,
               for
               be
               consecrated
               Aaron
               to
               his
               Priesthood
               ,
               which
               without
               being
               Priest
               ,
               he
               could
               not
               have
               dine
               )
               yet
               there
               was
               no
               more
               allotted
               to
               them
               ,
               but
               to
               be
               
                 chief
                 Porters
              
               in
               the
               house
               of
               God.
               What
               calling
               meaner
               than
               a
               Butcher
               ?
               Yet
               the
               High-Priest
               ,
               the
               second
               person
               in
               the
               Kingdome
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               ,
               and
               in
               some
               respects
               ,
               the
               first
               ,
               was
               by
               his
               calling
               a
               
                 sacred
                 Butcher
              
               ;
               and
               if
               I
               be
               not
               mistaken
               ,
               as
               I
               hope
               in
               my
               Scripturall
               researches
               I
               may
               show
               ,
               that
               I
               am
               not
               ,
               the
               King
               himself
               in
               some
               cases
               ,
               was
               such
               a
               sacred
               Butcher
               in
               some
               sort
               ,
               in
               that
               he
               killed
               his
               own
               sacrifices
               ;
               and
               it
               was
               an
               high
               ,
               and
               an
               eminent
               honour
               to
               him
               too
               ;
               and
               ever
               bad
               been
               accounted
               ,
               as
               the
               
                 priviledge
                 of
                 the
                 first-born
              
               ,
               where
               the
               excellency
               of
               dignity
               ,
               and
               of
               power
               was
               by
               divine
               institution
               ,
               before
               the
               Jewes
               policy
               was
               erected
               .
               A
               Preacher
               of
               this
               City
               ,
               that
               now
               bears
               his
               head
               high
               ,
               when
               a
               Gentleman
               showed
               him
               ,
               (
               as
               I
               have
               heard
               from
               the
               Party
               )
               a
               Tract
               by
               him
               done
               into
               Latine
               ,
               and
               subscribed
               in
               the
               Title-page
               ,
               
                 Per
                 A.
                 B.
                 Nobilem
              
               ,
               &c.
               he
               very
               smatterer-like
               ,
               and
               pedantickly
               bewryed
               his
               ignorance
               ,
               that
               nobilis
               in
               Roman
               and
               purest
               Latine
               phrase
               ,
               that
               we
               could
               have
               ,
               signified
               a
               Gentleman
               ;
               but
               he
               would
               not
               understand
               it
               otherwayes
               ,
               but
               according
               to
               the
               Anglism
               that
               he
               was
               acquainted
               with
               ,
               whereby
               Nobleman
               is
               appropriate
               to
               Barons
               ,
               Vicounts
               ,
               Earls
               ,
               &c.
               
               Another
               person
               of
               quality
               in
               this
               City
               (
               as
               I
               have
               
               heard
               the
               Story
               )
               rising
               from
               a
               mean
               degree
               to
               great
               fortunes
               ,
               had
               a
               distressed
               Gentleman
               (
               without
               the
               Gentleman
               's
               own
               knowledge
               )
               recommended
               to
               his
               company
               and
               Table
               :
               and
               thereupon
               the
               Citizen
               himself
               inviting
               him
               too
               ,
               he
               well
               accepted
               of
               it
               ,
               and
               was
               as
               well
               taken
               with
               ;
               and
               upon
               further
               converse
               ,
               so
               well
               ,
               that
               he
               justly
               apprehended
               some
               more
               than
               ordinary
               favours
               towards
               him
               ,
               if
               he
               would
               lay
               hold
               on
               them
               .
               To
               lay
               hold
               he
               was
               most
               willing
               ,
               and
               did
               ;
               but
               resolved
               to
               proceed
               cantiously
               and
               slowly
               ,
               for
               many
               Reasons
               ,
               which
               if
               they
               had
               known
               ,
               or
               had
               the
               patience
               ,
               till
               discreetly
               they
               might
               have
               been
               opened
               to
               them
               ,
               they
               would
               have
               allowed
               of
               .
               But
               they
               construing
               this
               slowness
               for
               neglect
               ,
               were
               offended
               ,
               and
               that
               so
               far
               ,
               that
               at
               length
               (
               the
               Gentleman
               not
               finding
               it
               best
               to
               alter
               his
               procedure
               )
               the
               Citizen
               discharged
               him
               his
               house
               ,
               though
               upon
               a
               contrary
               pretence
               .
               He
               took
               this
               as
               an
               high
               affront
               ,
               as
               indeed
               it
               was
               .
               And
               they
               coming
               to
               know
               their
               mistake
               ,
               invited
               him
               again
               ,
               but
               so
               unsufficiently
               ,
               the
               Master
               of
               the
               house
               being
               excepted
               from
               being
               the
               inviter
               ,
               though
               he
               had
               been
               the
               discharger
               ,
               that
               the
               Gentleman
               would
               not
               thereupon
               come
               so
               soon
               ,
               as
               it
               seems
               ,
               they
               expected
               him
               ;
               but
               he
               did
               cast
               himself
               to
               meet
               with
               them
               ,
               where
               he
               might
               either
               have
               a
               fuller
               invitation
               from
               them
               that
               had
               the
               right
               ,
               or
               opportunity
               to
               tell
               them
               ,
               what
               an
               one
               their
               Deputy
               had
               given
               him
               .
               But
               he
               found
               them
               in
               a
               new
               discontent
               and
               mistake
               upon
               refusall
               of
               that
               invitation
               ,
               which
               increased
               to
               such
               distance
               ,
               that
               it
               could
               not
               be
               removed
               ,
               through
               their
               too
               high
               carriage
               ;
               which
               he
               disdained
               
               the
               more
               ,
               the
               higher
               it
               was
               ;
               untill
               at
               length
               going
               about
               to
               beget
               a
               right
               understanding
               again
               ,
               be
               received
               such
               another
               signall
               affront
               ,
               as
               he
               vowed
               never
               to
               enter
               their
               house
               ,
               untill
               be
               knew
               he
               had
               a
               full
               and
               free
               invitation
               that
               came
               from
               him
               that
               discharged
               him
               .
               Matters
               standing
               thus
               now
               ,
               the
               Gentleman
               ,
               to
               whom
               I
               could
               not
               deny
               such
               a
               courtesie
               ,
               for
               many
               reasons
               ;
               requested
               me
               ,
               
                 That
                 thus
                 in
                 a
                 cloud
              
               to
               others
               ,
               I
               would
               find
               a
               way
               as
               soon
               as
               I
               could
               ,
               to
               uncloud
               his
               business
               briefly
               to
               the
               parties
               concerned
               ,
               that
               they
               might
               make
               such
               use
               thereof
               ,
               as
               they
               saw
               good
               .
               And
               I
               have
               chosen
               this
               way
               of
               examples
               subjoyned
               to
               the
               discourse
               of
               generosity
               ,
               by
               way
               of
               Apology
               for
               my self
               ,
               and
               first
               opening
               my
               condition
               from
               that
               obscurity
               it
               lay
               under
               ,
               to
               prevent
               ,
               or
               repulse
               the
               currish
               snarls
               of
               
                 clownish
                 Pedants
              
               ,
               and
               Schiolists
               .
               My
               intent
               in
               this
               Translation
               ,
               is
               (
               beside
               what
               I
               have
               exprest
               to
               his
               Majesty
               )
               the
               propagation
               of
               Religion
               ,
               and
               the
               good
               of
               England
               .
               But
               if
               Religion
               be
               not
               better
               intended
               ,
               and
               attended
               ,
               and
               prosecuted
               by
               undertakers
               ,
               than
               it
               hath
               been
               at
               home
               ,
               it
               may
               justly
               frustrate
               all
               ,
               and
               cast
               us
               in
               as
               great
               confusions
               abroad
               ,
               as
               it
               did
               at
               home
               .
               But
               because
               this
               would
               require
               more
               length
               ,
               than
               this
               Epistle
               is
               now
               fit
               to
               be
               drawn
               unto
               ,
               and
               I
               may
               have
               another
               occasion
               for
               it
               perhaps
               ,
               ere
               long
               ;
               I
               heartily
               recommend
               all
               to
               Gods
               blessing
               ,
               and
               thy
               good
               acceptance
               ,
               and
               bid
               thee
               farewell
               .
            
             
               
                 Blackefriers
                 
                   
                     this
                     22
                     of
                  
                   October
                   1660.
                   
                
              
               
                 W.
                 H.
                 
              
            
          
        
      
       
         
         
           Advertisement
           .
        
         
           
             These
             Books
             are
             newly
             Printed
             for
             ,
             and
             Sold
             by
          
           John
           Starkey
           
             at
             the
          
           Miter
           in
           Fleet-street
           
             near
             to
          
           Temple-Barre
           .
        
         
           THe
           World
           Surveyed
           ;
           or
           the
           famous
           Voyages
           and
           Travels
           of
           
             Vincent
             Le
             Blanc
          
           of
           Marseilles
           ,
           who
           from
           the
           age
           of
           fourteen
           years
           to
           threescore
           and
           eighteen
           ,
           travelled
           through
           most
           parts
           of
           the
           World
           ,
           viz.
           the
           East
           and
           West
           -
           
             Indies
             ,
             Persia
             ,
             Pegn
          
           ,
           the
           Kingdomes
           of
           Fez
           and
           
             Morocco
             ,
             Guinny
          
           ,
           and
           through
           all
           Africa
           ,
           from
           the
           Cape
           of
           
             good
             hope
          
           into
           Alexandria
           ,
           by
           the
           Territories
           of
           Monomotapa
           ,
           of
           
             Prester
             John
          
           ,
           and
           Egypt
           ,
           into
           the
           Mediterranean
           Isles
           ,
           and
           through
           the
           principall
           Provinces
           of
           Europe
           .
           Containing
           amore
           exact
           description
           of
           severall
           parts
           of
           the
           World
           ,
           than
           hath
           hitherto
           been
           done
           by
           any
           other
           Author
           ,
           the
           whole
           work
           enriched
           with
           many
           authentick
           Histories
           ,
           originally
           written
           in
           French
           ,
           and
           faithfully
           rendred
           into
           English
           by
           
             F.
             B.
          
           in
           folio
           .
        
         
           Aminta
           ,
           The
           famous
           Pastorall
           ,
           written
           in
           Italian
           by
           the
           admired
           Poet
           
             Signor
             '
             Torquato
             Tasso
          
           ,
           and
           translated
           into
           English
           Verse
           by
           
             John
             Dancer
          
           ,
           being
           the
           exact
           imitation
           of
           
             Pastor
             Fido
          
           ,
           with
           other
           ingenious
           Poems
           in
           80.
           
        
         
           The
           Shepheards
           Paradise
           ,
           A
           Comedy
           privately
           acted
           before
           King
           Charles
           the
           First
           ,
           by
           the
           Queens
           Majesty
           ,
           and
           her
           Ladies
           of
           honour
           ,
           written
           by
           the
           Honourable
           
             Walter
             Mountague
          
           Esquite
           in
           80.
           
        
      
       
         
         
           To
           my
           Lord
           ,
           the
           most
           Eminent
           Cardinall
           MAZARINE
           .
        
         
           
             My
             Lord
             ,
          
        
         
           WHat
           can
           be
           offered
           greater
           ,
           in
           a
           little
           work
           ,
           than
           the
           great
           River
           of
           the
           Amazones
           ?
           It
           now
           offers
           it self
           ,
           with
           all
           its
           grandures
           ,
           to
           your
           Eminency
           ,
           after
           that
           it
           hath
           hidden
           them
           so
           long
           time
           .
           It
           desires
           baptisme
           from
           you
           ,
           for
           all
           its
           peoples
           ;
           it
           desires
           laws
           from
           you
           ,
           for
           all
           its
           Nations
           ;
           and
           a
           
             valiant
             King
          
           ,
           for
           all
           its
           Provinces
           ,
           that
           he
           may
           unite
           them
           to
           his
           Crown
           .
           If
           the
           conquest
           thereof
           be
           easie
           ,
           neither
           will
           the
           expense
           thereof
           be
           excessive
           .
           For
           there
           will
           need
           no
           great
           Armies
           here
           ,
           to
           give
           battels
           ;
           nor
           no
           great
           provision
           of
           Artillery
           ,
           for
           carrying
           on
           of
           sieges
           .
           There
           is
           need
           only
           of
           
             preparations
             fitting
             for
             planting
             of
             five
             Colonies
          
           at
           the
           first
           aboard
           ;
           the
           first
           whereof
           is
           to
           be
           in
           the
           
             Isle
             of
             the
             Sun
          
           ,
           for
           guarding
           the
           best
           entry
           into
           this
           great
           Rivers
           mouth
           .
           The
           second
           on
           the
           famous
           Bosphore
           or
           Strait
           thereof
           ,
           to
           desend
           and
           keep
           this
           Rivers
           passage
           .
           The
           third
           on
           that
           renowned
           point
           of
           the
           Comanares
           ,
           for
           the
           best
           seat
           of
           that
           whole
           Empire
           .
           The
           fourth
           near
           to
           the
           Mountain
           of
           Swana
           ,
           whereby
           to
           be
           Master
           of
           the
           gold-mine
           
           there
           .
           And
           the
           fifth
           and
           last
           on
           the
           mouth
           of
           the
           River
           of
           Maragnon
           ,
           to
           watch
           over
           the
           Frontier
           of
           that
           side
           of
           the
           Andes
           .
           And
           in
           favours
           of
           this
           first
           establishment
           ,
           your
           Eminence
           might
           easily
           adde
           the
           alliances
           of
           the
           
             Illustrious
             and
             renowned
          
           Nations
           of
           the
           Homagues
           ,
           of
           the
           Generous
           and
           noble
           Yorimans
           ,
           of
           the
           valiant
           Topinambes
           :
           and
           give
           order
           for
           a
           Fleet-volant
           of
           about
           twelve
           men
           of
           Warre
           ,
           continually
           to
           be
           visiting
           ,
           and
           going
           between
           these
           Colonies
           ;
           because
           the
           distance
           by
           sailing
           ,
           of
           the
           farthest
           of
           these
           from
           the
           other
           ,
           will
           be
           at
           the
           least
           a
           thousand
           Spanish
           leagues
           ,
           and
           this
           alwayes
           upon
           the
           channell
           of
           the
           great
           River
           of
           the
           Amazones
           it self
           .
           But
           this
           is
           enough
           for
           an
           Epistle
           :
           and
           the
           Book
           it self
           will
           speak
           the
           matter
           more
           at
           length
           :
           and
           in
           so
           noble
           a
           design
           your
           Counsels
           will
           not
           be
           wanting
           to
           France
           :
           as
           I
           shall
           never
           be
           wanting
           ,
           my
           Lord
           ,
           to
           give
           you
           all
           sort
           of
           honour
           ,
           submissions
           ,
           and
           respects
           ;
           being
           as
           I
           am
           of
        
         
           
             Your
             Eminence
          
           
             the
             most
             humble
             ,
             most
             obedient
             ,
             and
             most
             obliged
             Servant
             
               Blaise
               Francis
               de
               Pagan
            
             .
          
           
             From
             Paris
             
               the
               12th
               of
               March
               1655.
               
            
          
        
         
      
       
         
         
           
             map of the Amazon
             
               MAGNI
               AMAZONI
               FLUVII
               IN
               AMERICA
               MERIDIONALI
               noua
               delineatio
            
          
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           AN
           HISTORICAL
           AND
           Geographical
           Description
           
             OF
             THE
          
           Great
           River
           of
           the
           
             Amazones
             IN
             AMERICA
          
           .
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             I.
             
               Of
               the
               greatness
               of
               the
               River
               of
               the
               Amazones
               .
            
          
           
             WHat
             the
             Danow
             is
             to
             
               Europe
               ,
               Ganges
            
             to
             Asia
             ,
             and
             Nilus
             to
             Afrique
             ;
             the
             same
             is
             the
             great
             Amazone
             to
             America
             .
             And
             as
             America
             is
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             so
             is
             the
             River
             of
             the
             
             Amazones
             the
             greatest
             River
             in
             the
             Universe
             .
             His
             length
             is
             of
             greater
             extent
             ,
             than
             that
             of
             the
             Nile
             ,
             and
             Negro
             in
             Afrique
             ;
             his
             breadth
             larger
             ,
             than
             that
             of
             Ganges
             and
             Kiam
             in
             Asia
             ;
             his
             navigation
             and
             portableness
             is
             better
             ,
             than
             that
             of
             the
             Danow
             and
             Rhine
             in
             Eurupe
             ;
             his
             mouth
             ,
             or
             entrance
             into
             the
             Sea
             ,
             is
             more
             open
             ,
             than
             that
             of
             Plata
             ,
             and
             Saint
             Lawrence
             in
             America
             ;
             and
             his
             depth
             is
             like
             unto
             that
             of
             the
             Oceane
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             mediterrane-Sea
             .
             His
             inundations
             or
             overflowings
             are
             yearly
             ,
             and
             fruitfull
             ;
             his
             aspect
             is
             every
             where
             and
             every
             way
             pleasant
             :
             all
             his
             branches
             and
             Rivers
             running
             out
             of
             him
             ,
             are
             inhabited
             ;
             his
             fields
             are
             all
             fertile
             ,
             and
             all
             his
             adjoyning
             plaines
             or
             valleys
             cultivated
             .
             Chase
             ,
             fishing
             ,
             and
             Venison
             are
             there
             every
             where
             great
             store
             ;
             woods
             ,
             fruits
             ,
             and
             Corn-fields
             for
             harvest
             ,
             cover
             the
             grounds
             and
             little
             hills
             there
             ;
             and
             the
             sweetness
             of
             his
             Air
             is
             through
             all
             alike
             equally
             temperate
             :
             and
             both
             gold
             and
             silver
             are
             found
             in
             the
             Rivers
             and
             mountains
             there
             .
             Its
             peoples
             are
             innumerable
             ;
             its
             Iles
             great
             and
             infinite
             in
             number
             ,
             yet
             inhabited
             ;
             all
             its
             peoples
             are
             spritely
             and
             nimble
             ,
             and
             the
             riches
             of
             the
             Climate
             furnisheth
             them
             abundantly
             with
             
             all
             things
             .
             This
             River's
             course
             is
             almost
             alwayes
             under
             the
             equinoctiall
             Line
             ;
             and
             every
             where
             his
             nights
             and
             days
             are
             of
             alike
             length
             ;
             and
             the
             other
             Rivers
             ,
             that
             pay
             their
             tribute
             to
             him
             ,
             are
             all
             under
             the
             torride
             Zone
             .
             Marvellous
             effects
             of
             the
             divine
             providence
             ,
             which
             having
             distanced
             so
             many
             Nations
             from
             the
             Sea-coasts
             and
             its
             commodities
             ,
             hath
             given
             them
             so
             great
             Rivers
             and
             waters
             in
             so
             great
             abundance
             ,
             that
             this
             famous
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             may
             reasonably
             enough
             be
             called
             an
             Ocean-Sea
             of
             sweet
             waters
             .
             But
             all
             its
             prerogatives
             ,
             which
             by
             an
             universall
             consent
             ,
             have
             made
             the
             title
             of
             the
             greatest
             River
             of
             the
             world
             be
             given
             unto
             it
             ,
             shall
             more
             amply
             be
             seen
             ,
             and
             with
             more
             particular
             deduction
             of
             Circumstances
             ,
             in
             the
             following
             Chapters
             of
             this
             Book
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             II.
             
               Of
               the
               great
               Realm
               of
               the
               Amazone
               .
            
          
           
             IN
             the
             Peninsule
             or
             almost-Ile
             of
             the
             Southerly
             America
             ,
             and
             almost
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             so
             great
             a
             Continent
             or
             main-Land
             ,
             
             there
             is
             a
             great
             extent
             of
             Land
             ,
             covered
             with
             so
             many
             Nations
             ,
             and
             watered
             with
             so
             many
             Rivers
             ,
             that
             of
             it
             might
             be
             formed
             a
             Kingdome
             ,
             or
             Empire
             of
             three
             thousand
             Leagues
             in
             compass
             ,
             for
             one
             that
             would
             make
             the
             conquest
             of
             it
             .
             It
             s
             rich
             and
             opulent
             Countries
             (
             which
             all
             of
             them
             together
             I
             call
             the
             great
             Kingdome
             or
             Realm
             of
             the
             Amazone
             ,
             seeing
             all
             their
             waters
             and
             Rivers
             render
             themselves
             into
             this
             great
             and
             renowned
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             )
             have
             for
             their
             boundaries
             ,
             Brasile
             towards
             the
             East
             ;
             the
             Kingdome
             of
             New-Granado
             ,
             and
             the
             coast
             of
             Guiana
             towards
             the
             North
             ;
             and
             towards
             the
             West
             ,
             Peru
             ,
             and
             the
             great
             Cordelier
             ;
             and
             Southward
             Tucuman
             ,
             and
             Paraguais
             :
             all
             Provinces
             under
             the
             Crown
             of
             Castile
             ,
             except
             Brasile
             ,
             subject
             to
             the
             Portugallians
             ,
             that
             inhabit
             it
             .
             I
             said
             ,
             of
             three
             thousand
             Leagues
             in
             compass
             ,
             not
             precisely
             ,
             but
             near
             to
             that
             dimension
             ;
             because
             the
             diversity
             of
             Mapps
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             opinions
             and
             reports
             ,
             that
             have
             compassed
             it
             ,
             not
             only
             cross
             one
             another
             ,
             but
             also
             thwart
             themselves
             in
             their
             relations
             ,
             that
             they
             give
             of
             it
             ;
             as
             by
             name
             Father
             
               Christopher
               D'Acogna
            
             a
             Spanish
             Jesuit
             ,
             and
             a
             principall
             author
             ,
             and
             eye-witness
             of
             these
             things
             .
             But
             of
             
             these
             doubtfull
             and
             diverse
             mensurations
             we
             shall
             speak
             elsewhere
             ;
             let
             us
             here
             draw
             towards
             an
             end
             of
             this
             Chapter
             ,
             in
             telling
             you
             ,
             That
             all
             this
             great
             Realm
             of
             Amazone
             is
             inhabited
             only
             as
             yet
             of
             Indians
             and
             Americans
             ,
             and
             not
             at
             all
             of
             Spaniards
             ,
             whether
             Castilians
             ,
             or
             Portuguais
             .
             These
             have
             indeed
             discovered
             it
             ,
             and
             run
             its
             length
             first
             of
             any
             ,
             with
             their
             armed
             Navies
             ;
             but
             only
             passed
             thorow
             ,
             and
             never
             stayed
             any
             where
             to
             build
             fortresses
             ,
             or
             plant
             colonies
             ,
             as
             they
             have
             done
             in
             so
             great
             number
             ,
             and
             with
             so
             great
             state
             and
             magnificence
             in
             other
             Countries
             of
             the
             same
             America
             .
             But
             if
             Spain
             happily
             situated
             for
             commanding
             over
             this
             new
             world
             ,
             had
             turned
             her
             thoughts
             towards
             the
             conquest
             of
             this
             Empire
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             instead
             of
             consuming
             unprofitably
             so
             many
             Armies
             ,
             and
             so
             great
             treasures
             in
             her
             Warres
             of
             Europe
             ,
             as
             she
             hath
             done
             now
             for
             an
             hundred
             years
             ;
             she
             might
             have
             enjoyed
             by
             this
             time
             the
             glory
             and
             advantages
             of
             so
             great
             an
             Empire
             :
             from
             the
             conquest
             of
             which
             now
             she
             is
             further
             off
             than
             ever
             ,
             as
             well
             for
             the
             reason
             of
             her
             present
             weakness
             ,
             as
             her
             intestine
             division
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             III.
             
               Of
               the
               Nations
               of
               this
               great
               Realm
               .
            
          
           
             THe
             innumerable
             Nations
             and
             Provinces
             of
             this
             great
             Empire
             of
             the
             Amazone
             are
             not
             all
             yet
             distinctly
             known
             by
             their
             severall
             names
             and
             languages
             ,
             because
             the
             Spaniards
             ,
             who
             last
             navigated
             this
             famous
             River
             ,
             have
             not
             marked
             them
             all
             ,
             but
             only
             one
             hundred
             and
             fifty
             of
             them
             .
             The
             Provinces
             are
             all
             so
             mightily
             ,
             peopled
             ,
             and
             their
             habitations
             so
             thick
             ,
             that
             from
             the
             last
             village
             of
             one
             Town
             ,
             one
             may
             hear
             the
             noise
             of
             such
             as
             travail
             from
             the
             first
             village
             of
             anopher
             .
             And
             yet
             so
             near
             a
             neighbour
             hood
             not
             being
             able
             to
             keep
             them
             in
             peace
             ,
             they
             are
             in
             continuall
             Warres
             one
             Nation
             against
             another
             .
             Yet
             neither
             ambition
             of
             command
             ,
             nor
             greediness
             of
             acquiring
             riches
             ,
             not
             a
             desire
             to
             eat
             men
             ,
             as
             Canibals
             of
             the
             same
             America
             have
             ,
             are
             any
             of
             the
             grounds
             of
             so
             many
             cruell
             and
             bloody
             Battels
             ;
             (
             without
             which
             were
             it
             not
             ,
             for
             all
             this
             ,
             so
             many
             people
             could
             never
             be
             contained
             in
             these
             Countries
             )
             but
             the
             cause
             of
             all
             these
             Fights
             ,
             wherein
             are
             often
             slain
             an
             infinitie
             
             of
             persons
             ,
             is
             only
             for
             glory
             and
             renown
             ,
             and
             to
             have
             slaves
             of
             a
             strange
             ,
             or
             other
             Nation
             than
             their
             own
             :
             and
             that
             because
             at
             home
             amongit
             themselves
             ,
             the
             innocence
             of
             their
             manners
             ,
             and
             riches
             of
             the
             Climate
             ,
             not
             being
             ,
             apt
             to
             bring
             men
             to
             a
             necessity
             of
             serving
             others
             of
             their
             own
             accord
             ,
             none
             is
             found
             there
             obliged
             to
             such
             a
             condition
             ,
             but
             by
             force
             of
             Arms.
             And
             yet
             this
             invincible
             courage
             ,
             that
             they
             exercise
             thus
             against
             one
             another
             ,
             hath
             not
             yet
             appeared
             against
             the
             Spaniards
             ,
             (
             who
             navigate
             and
             run
             the
             River
             of
             Amazones
             in
             Arms
             )
             foras
             much
             as
             hither
             to
             either
             a
             light
             fleeing
             ,
             if
             at
             any
             time
             they
             opposed
             them
             ;
             or
             a
             mutuall
             amity
             embraced
             and
             consented
             to
             by
             them
             ,
             have
             been
             the
             only
             Arms
             ,
             which
             to
             this
             present
             they
             have
             employed
             against
             these
             dominators
             of
             the
             new
             world
             ,
             the
             Spaniards
             .
             But
             all
             America
             being
             barren
             of
             Iron
             ,
             we
             must
             not
             think
             it
             strange
             ,
             if
             the
             inhabitants
             of
             this
             great
             Realm
             have
             been
             surprized
             with
             fear
             ,
             (
             as
             all
             other
             Indians
             were
             ,
             and
             are
             )
             of
             the
             Sword
             ,
             the
             Musquiet
             ,
             and
             of
             Artillery
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAR.
             IV.
             
               Of
               their
               Arms
               ,
               and
               Commerce
               .
            
          
           
             SEing
             neither
             Steel
             nor
             Iron
             are
             found
             at
             all
             in
             the
             West
             -
             Indies
             ,
             we
             must
             not
             marvell
             ,
             if
             the
             Americans
             of
             this
             great
             Kingdom
             have
             no
             other
             Arms
             ,
             but
             Arrows
             and
             Javelots
             ;
             about
             which
             notwithstanding
             they
             are
             marvellously
             expert
             ,
             not
             only
             for
             making
             them
             of
             hard
             wood
             ,
             and
             sharp
             pointed
             ,
             but
             also
             for
             shooting
             and
             casting
             them
             with
             so
             great
             force
             ,
             that
             therewith
             they
             pierce
             through
             and
             through
             the
             body
             of
             their
             enemies
             ,
             which
             they
             hit
             .
             The
             same
             necessity
             makes
             them
             also
             use
             stones
             well
             brought
             to
             an
             edge
             ,
             and
             Tortoise
             shells
             ,
             for
             Axes
             ,
             and
             Hatchets
             ,
             and
             their
             instruments
             of
             travelling
             :
             the
             one
             for
             great
             wood
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             for
             less
             ,
             and
             houshold
             Utensils
             .
             But
             they
             use
             the
             horn
             of
             certain
             little
             Beasts
             ,
             fastned
             to
             little
             hefts
             ,
             for
             their
             finer
             works
             ,
             which
             they
             make
             upon
             wood
             with
             marvellous
             skill
             .
             As
             for
             the
             Commerce
             of
             all
             these
             peoples
             on
             this
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             and
             on
             other
             Rivers
             that
             run
             into
             it
             ,
             they
             perform
             
             it
             in
             Boats
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Canoès
             ,
             that
             are
             made
             all
             of
             Cedar
             ,
             and
             all
             of
             one
             piece
             ,
             as
             in
             other
             places
             of
             the
             Indies
             ;
             but
             with
             more
             ease
             ,
             and
             better
             ,
             than
             elsewhere
             ;
             because
             this
             great
             River
             during
             its
             overflowings
             ,
             brings
             down
             so
             great
             a
             number
             of
             great
             Trees
             ,
             that
             these
             peoples
             have
             no
             more
             to
             do
             to
             come
             by
             them
             ,
             but
             every
             one
             to
             lay
             hold
             on
             ,
             and
             stay
             as
             many
             as
             he
             desires
             ,
             at
             his
             House
             ,
             there
             to
             cut
             and
             hollow
             them
             ,
             as
             he
             thinks
             meet
             .
             As
             for
             Cloathes
             ,
             such
             as
             use
             any
             ,
             have
             them
             all
             almost
             of
             Cotton
             :
             and
             for
             such
             as
             go
             naked
             (
             which
             are
             the
             greatest
             part
             )
             neither
             excessive
             heat
             ,
             nor
             rigour
             of
             cold
             forces
             them
             to
             cover
             themselves
             in
             that
             sort
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             V.
             
               Of
               their
               Customes
               and
               Religion
            
             .
          
           
             THere
             were
             never
             any
             written
             Laws
             amongst
             those
             peoples
             ;
             and
             all
             their
             customes
             are
             almost
             much
             alike
             .
             Some
             of
             them
             live
             at
             liberty
             ;
             and
             some
             of
             them
             under
             Cacyques
             ,
             or
             Lords
             ,
             as
             the
             rest
             of
             America
             .
             They
             have
             Idols
             of
             wood
             made
             
             by
             mans
             hand
             ,
             which
             they
             adore
             as
             their
             gods
             ,
             attributing
             to
             some
             of
             them
             the
             power
             over
             waters
             ,
             and
             giving
             them
             a
             Fish
             for
             their
             mark
             :
             to
             others
             the
             power
             over
             fruits
             ,
             and
             seeds
             of
             the
             earth
             .
             They
             have
             also
             such
             as
             they
             take
             for
             gods
             of
             Armies
             and
             Battels
             ;
             and
             they
             openly
             avouch
             that
             these
             deities
             came
             down
             from
             Heaven
             to
             live
             with
             them
             ,
             to
             do
             them
             good
             ,
             and
             procure
             their
             profit
             .
             They
             have
             neither
             Temples
             nor
             Ceremonies
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             adore
             them
             ,
             but
             leave
             them
             carelesly
             in
             some
             corner
             of
             their
             House
             ,
             untill
             they
             have
             occasion
             to
             use
             them
             .
             But
             when
             they
             take
             water
             to
             go
             to
             Warre
             ,
             they
             place
             on
             the
             Poup
             of
             their
             Vessels
             ,
             their
             god
             of
             Armies
             ;
             and
             so
             they
             use
             the
             others
             in
             like
             sort
             .
             They
             have
             also
             Wisemen
             ,
             or
             Wizards
             among
             them
             ,
             of
             great
             esteem
             ;
             who
             serve
             them
             for
             Counsellors
             as
             well
             for
             Religion
             and
             Physick
             ,
             as
             for
             Law
             and
             policy
             ;
             and
             in
             the
             year
             1639
             ,
             the
             Portuguais
             found
             an
             Indian
             in
             these
             Countries
             ,
             that
             called
             himself
             the
             son
             of
             the
             Sun
             ;
             who
             coming
             to
             a
             peaceable
             and
             loving
             conference
             with
             them
             ,
             was
             not
             satisfied
             with
             the
             grounds
             of
             our
             Belief
             ,
             but
             going
             away
             without
             renouncing
             his
             own
             imposture
             ,
             said
             ,
             that
             every
             night
             he
             went
             by
             the
             Spirit
             to
             
             consult
             the
             Sun
             for
             the
             government
             of
             the
             following
             day
             .
             Finally
             ,
             all
             these
             peoples
             are
             of
             a
             good
             nature
             ,
             nimble
             and
             quick
             of
             body
             ,
             and
             of
             colour
             not
             so
             tawny
             and
             Sun-burnt
             as
             those
             of
             Brasile
             .
             They
             are
             of
             quick
             apprehension
             and
             understanding
             ,
             and
             are
             very
             expert
             in
             their
             hands
             for
             all
             sort
             of
             works
             .
             They
             are
             naturally
             sweet
             and
             meek
             ,
             officious
             and
             tractable
             ;
             and
             they
             converse
             familiarly
             with
             strangers
             without
             any
             fear
             .
             They
             are
             every
             way
             so
             docile
             and
             teachable
             ,
             and
             so
             little
             possest
             with
             malice
             ,
             that
             from
             hence
             the
             easiness
             to
             subdue
             them
             ,
             as
             well
             to
             Laws
             and
             policy
             ,
             as
             to
             Christian
             Religion
             ,
             may
             be
             guessed
             at
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             VI.
             
               Of
               the
               great
               Cordeliere
            
             .
          
           
             IN
             the
             Southern
             America
             ,
             to
             the
             East
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Peru
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             were
             from
             the
             North
             to
             the
             South
             ,
             runs
             and
             rangeth
             along
             a
             garland
             of
             great
             Mountains
             more
             than
             six
             hundred
             Leagues
             in
             length
             ,
             under
             the
             name
             of
             the
             
               great
               Cordeliere
            
             ,
             And
             by
             a
             wonderfull
             work
             of
             nature
             ,
             all
             
             the
             waters
             ,
             which
             from
             thence
             arise
             in
             abundance
             ,
             on
             that
             side
             of
             the
             great
             Mountains
             ,
             that
             look
             towards
             the
             East
             ,
             do
             all
             render
             themselves
             into
             the
             North-Sea
             by
             one
             only
             mouth
             and
             confluent
             .
             But
             these
             well-heads
             ,
             and
             springs
             being
             so
             many
             ,
             cannot
             be
             yet
             all
             discovered
             :
             it
             sufficeth
             us
             in
             this
             Book
             to
             remark
             the
             chief
             ones
             ,
             and
             such
             of
             them
             as
             are
             famous
             ,
             by
             the
             origine
             and
             source
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amamazones
             ,
             and
             of
             others
             the
             most
             famous
             ,
             that
             he
             receiveth
             into
             his
             channell
             ,
             to
             convey
             them
             together
             with
             himself
             into
             the
             Ocean-Sea
             .
             And
             amongst
             the
             longest
             and
             greatest
             of
             all
             these
             Rivers
             ,
             the
             Great
             Caketa
             ,
             the
             Putumaye
             ,
             and
             the
             Aguarike
             ,
             are
             on
             the
             North-side
             ;
             and
             the
             Madera
             ,
             the
             Amarumaya
             ,
             the
             Maragnon
             ,
             and
             the
             Curaray
             ,
             are
             on
             the
             Southside
             of
             the
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             .
             Which
             being
             the
             only
             ,
             and
             the
             principall
             object
             of
             our
             Discourse
             ,
             we
             will
             here
             begin
             to
             describe
             its
             source
             ,
             in
             this
             Chapter
             ,
             telling
             you
             that
             it
             is
             the
             most
             Westward
             of
             all
             the
             sources
             ,
             that
             are
             to
             the
             East
             of
             the
             great
             Cordeliere
             ;
             that
             which
             is
             furthest
             off
             from
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             or
             Atlantique-Sea
             ,
             and
             the
             nearest
             of
             any
             to
             the
             Town
             of
             Kyto
             ,
             one
             of
             the
             greatest
             and
             fairest
             Cities
             ,
             
             not
             only
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Peru
             ,
             but
             also
             of
             any
             in
             all
             America
             ;
             the
             seat
             of
             a
             Soveraign
             Court
             ,
             and
             Capitall
             of
             a
             great
             Province
             ,
             of
             three
             hundred
             degrees
             ,
             and
             ten
             minutes
             of
             Longitude
             ,
             (
             counting
             from
             the
             first
             and
             fixt
             Meridian
             of
             the
             I
             le
             of
             Saint
             Michell
             ,
             of
             the
             Azores
             )
             and
             sixteen
             minutes
             only
             of
             Latitude
             meridionale
             .
             But
             for
             better
             clearing
             of
             this
             matter
             yet
             ,
             we
             must
             adde
             ,
             that
             between
             the
             Town
             of
             Kyto
             ,
             &
             the
             source
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazons
             ,
             these
             tops
             ,
             or
             risings
             of
             the
             great
             Cordeliere
             ,
             that
             are
             after
             mentioned
             ,
             are
             interjected
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             VII
             .
             
               Of
               the
               sources
               of
               the
               great
               River
               of
               the
               Amazones
               .
            
          
           
             Pulcan
             and
             Guanama
             are
             two
             Mountains
             of
             the
             great
             and
             high
             Cordeliere
             ,
             distant
             one
             from
             the
             other
             little
             less
             than
             two
             Spanish
             Leagues
             ,
             of
             three
             hundred
             degrees
             ,
             thirty
             six
             minutes
             of
             Longitude
             ,
             on
             the
             terrestriall
             Globe
             ;
             and
             twenty
             minutes
             only
             of
             meridionale
             or
             Southern
             Latitude
             .
             They
             are
             in
             the
             great
             Province
             of
             Kyto
             ,
             of
             
             the
             rich
             Empire
             of
             Peru
             ,
             about
             six
             Leagues
             to
             the
             Southside
             of
             the
             equinoctiall
             Line
             ;
             and
             eight
             Leagues
             to
             the
             East
             of
             the
             Town
             of
             Kyto
             ,
             the
             Capitall
             of
             that
             Province
             :
             and
             two
             Lakes
             ,
             that
             are
             at
             the
             two
             foots
             of
             these
             two
             Mountains
             ,
             are
             the
             renowned
             sources
             of
             the
             great
             and
             famous
             Amazone
             .
             That
             of
             Pulcan
             is
             the
             largest
             ,
             openest
             ,
             and
             best
             discovered
             ;
             and
             that
             of
             Guanama
             is
             the
             deepest
             and
             profoundest
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             were
             almost
             covered
             by
             a
             great
             rock
             overturned
             upon
             it
             by
             an
             Earthquake
             .
             But
             these
             two
             spring-heads
             ,
             the
             most
             wonderfull
             of
             all
             the
             world
             ,
             since
             they
             give
             the
             beginning
             to
             the
             most
             memorable
             River
             of
             the
             universall
             world
             ,
             run
             quickly
             into
             one
             ,
             and
             pass
             along
             together
             the
             terrible
             rocks
             of
             the
             Cordeliere
             ,
             rolling
             their
             roaring
             waters
             over
             its
             precipices
             and
             fals
             :
             from
             whence
             this
             great
             River
             coming
             forth
             and
             running
             alwayes
             strong
             ,
             swift
             ,
             and
             straight
             towards
             the
             East
             ,
             receives
             presently
             upon
             his
             leaving
             the
             Cordeliere
             ,
             a
             marvellous
             great
             increase
             from
             the
             Coca
             ,
             the
             Payamine
             ,
             and
             the
             Napo
             ,
             (
             three
             considerable
             Rivers
             ,
             whereof
             we
             shall
             speak
             else
             where
             )
             and
             in
             short
             while
             makes
             his
             navigableness
             like
             unto
             that
             of
             the
             great
             Ocean-Sea
             ,
             as
             well
             for
             
             the
             depth
             of
             his
             channell
             ,
             as
             for
             the
             less
             rapidness
             of
             his
             currant
             of
             water
             .
             But
             this
             remarkable
             place
             ,
             where
             the
             River
             of
             Napo
             enters
             into
             that
             of
             the
             Amazones
             (
             which
             the
             Spaniards
             call
             the
             Junto
             of
             the
             Rivers
             ,
             and
             we
             the
             
               conjunction
               or
               joyning
               of
               the
               Rivers
               ,
            
             to
             the
             same
             very
             sense
             verbatim
             )
             is
             about
             sixty
             Leagues
             from
             the
             Town
             of
             Kyto
             ,
             and
             under
             the
             equinoctiall
             Line
             .
             And
             it
             was
             in
             this
             place
             that
             the
             adventurous
             
               Francis
               D'Areillane
            
             that
             Spanish
             Knight
             ,
             made
             build
             a
             Vessell
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             he
             first
             navigated
             ,
             and
             happily
             discovered
             all
             this
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             VIII
             .
             
               Of
               the
               length
               and
               course
               of
               this
               River
               .
            
          
           
             AFter
             that
             the
             great
             Amazone
             hath
             made
             his
             channell
             like
             unto
             that
             of
             the
             greatest
             Rivers
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             by
             the
             conflux
             of
             the
             foresaid
             three
             Rivers
             ,
             he
             goes
             on
             his
             way
             through
             the
             vast
             and
             fertile
             fields
             of
             America
             ,
             alwayes
             towards
             the
             East
             ,
             and
             without
             longer
             straying
             from
             under
             the
             Line
             ,
             than
             five
             or
             six
             degrees
             at
             the
             most
             ,
             
             on
             the
             Southside
             ,
             or
             that
             of
             the
             antarctick
             Pole.
             Yet
             drawing
             his
             now-slow
             waters
             after
             him
             ,
             by
             infinite
             turnings
             and
             windings
             in
             plains
             and
             fields
             of
             so
             large
             and
             great
             extent
             ,
             he
             casts
             out
             his
             arms
             on
             every
             side
             to
             receive
             the
             more
             easily
             the
             Rivers
             which
             from
             all
             parts
             come
             unto
             him
             ,
             and
             that
             with
             such
             admirable
             agreement
             ,
             that
             the
             least
             of
             his
             armes
             receive
             alway
             the
             least
             Rivers
             and
             Rivulets
             ;
             and
             the
             greater
             the
             greater
             :
             and
             if
             Rivers
             come
             to
             him
             ,
             that
             are
             bigge
             and
             made
             great
             by
             a
             course
             of
             more
             hundreths
             of
             Leagues
             together
             ,
             he
             there
             shuts
             up
             all
             his
             waters
             into
             one
             channell
             ,
             to
             receive
             those
             greater
             worthily
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             were
             with
             a
             greater
             state
             and
             magnificence
             .
             As
             for
             his
             length
             from
             his
             source
             to
             his
             mouth
             at
             the
             Atlantique-Sea
             ,
             following
             the
             course
             of
             his
             wide
             channell
             ,
             it
             is
             diversly
             reported
             .
             The
             fore-mentioned
             Areillane
             makes
             it
             of
             eighteen
             hundred
             ,
             and
             Father
             
               D'
               Acogna
            
             of
             one
             thousand
             two
             hundred
             seventy
             six
             Spanish
             Leagues
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             justest
             measures
             that
             we
             could
             gather
             from
             the
             Relations
             of
             this
             Author
             ,
             who
             contradicts
             himself
             often
             through
             forgetfulness
             ,
             and
             not
             taking
             heed
             .
             Now
             the
             sparingest
             reckoning
             of
             Father
             
               D'
               Acogna
            
             ,
             being
             modester
             than
             that
             of
             
             Areillane
             ,
             seems
             to
             me
             to
             have
             more
             appearances
             of
             the
             truth
             in
             it
             ;
             because
             the
             distance
             of
             the
             mountains
             of
             Pulcan
             ,
             and
             Guanama
             (
             where
             the
             Sources
             of
             this
             great
             River
             are
             )
             in
             a
             streight
             line
             unto
             Zaparara
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             Easterliest
             Cape
             ,
             at
             which
             he
             ends
             his
             course
             ,
             is
             but
             of
             six
             hundred
             fourty
             leagues
             of
             the
             same
             sort
             ,
             according
             to
             my
             Geographick
             Tables
             or
             Mappes
             ,
             and
             the
             methods
             of
             the
             eighth
             Book
             of
             my
             Geometricall
             Theorems
             .
             But
             because
             this
             distance
             in
             a
             streight
             line
             ,
             appears
             to
             me
             to
             be
             yet
             too
             farre
             different
             from
             the
             foresaid
             length
             of
             one
             thousand
             two
             hundred
             seventy
             six
             leagues
             ;
             I
             could
             easily
             perswade
             my self
             ,
             that
             either
             the
             Southern
             longitude
             of
             America
             were
             greater
             ;
             or
             that
             the
             leagues
             of
             this
             Spanish
             Father
             Jesuit
             should
             be
             no
             other
             but
             Celtiberian-Spanish
             leagues
             ,
             or
             
               Biscay
               leagues
            
             ,
             like
             unto
             our
             French-sea-leagues
             ,
             the
             which
             amounting
             but
             to
             twenty
             ,
             for
             every
             degree
             of
             a
             great
             circle
             ,
             would
             give
             us
             seven
             hundred
             thirty
             two
             leagues
             in
             a
             right
             or
             streight
             line
             ,
             for
             the
             same
             distance
             between
             the
             Sources
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             and
             the
             extremity
             of
             his
             mouth
             ,
             or
             upshutting
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             IX
             .
             
               Of
               the
               Longitudes
               ,
               Latitudes
               ,
               and
               Measures
               observed
               in
               this
               great
               River
               .
            
          
           
             IN
             the
             design
             we
             have
             to
             set
             down
             in
             this
             place
             ,
             and
             all
             along
             ,
             the
             distances
             ,
             and
             their
             latitudes
             ,
             which
             the
             Spaniards
             have
             observed
             an
             .
             one
             thousand
             six
             hundred
             thirty
             nine
             ,
             alongst
             the
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             reported
             by
             
               D'
               Acogna
            
             aforesaid
             ,
             delegated
             by
             King
             Philip
             the
             fourth
             to
             this
             charge
             :
             we
             have
             also
             resolved
             to
             adde
             the
             longitudes
             ,
             which
             we
             have
             adjusted
             as
             much
             as
             is
             possible
             from
             confusion
             and
             uncertainty
             ;
             and
             this
             as
             well
             for
             the
             curiosity
             of
             such
             as
             love
             Geography
             ;
             as
             for
             the
             help
             of
             these
             Authours
             ,
             that
             would
             make
             new
             Cartes
             of
             these
             places
             .
             But
             going
             back
             to
             the
             end
             of
             the
             7th
             Chapter
             ,
             we
             shall
             continue
             the
             course
             of
             this
             great
             River
             in
             this
             manner
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             mouth
             of
             Napo
             ,
             which
             is
             on
             the
             South
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             to
             Anete
             ,
             are
             fourty
             seven
             leagues
             .
             This
             place
             of
             Anete
             is
             yet
             under
             the
             line
             ,
             and
             on
             the
             South-side
             of
             the
             great
             River
             .
          
           
             From
             Anete
             to
             the
             Agarico
             ,
             are
             eighteen
             
             leagues
             .
             The
             mouth
             of
             this
             River
             ,
             is
             on
             the
             North-side
             of
             the
             Amazone
             ,
             and
             under
             the
             line
             also
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Agarico
             to
             Chevela
             ,
             twenty
             leagues
             .
             The
             mouth
             of
             this
             River
             is
             also
             on
             the
             North
             of
             Amazone
             ,
             and
             begins
             to
             decline
             a
             little
             from
             the
             line
             towards
             the
             South
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Chevelu
             to
             the
             Curaray
             ,
             fourty
             leagues
             .
             The
             mouth
             of
             this
             River
             is
             on
             the
             South
             of
             the
             Amazone
             ,
             and
             under
             the
             second
             degree
             of
             Southern
             latitude
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Curaray
             to
             the
             Maragnon
             ,
             eighty
             leagues
             .
             The
             mouth
             of
             this
             River
             is
             on
             the
             South
             of
             the
             Amazone
             ,
             having
             four
             degrees
             of
             Southern
             latitude
             ,
             and
             three
             hundred
             seven
             degrees
             and
             fifty
             minutes
             of
             longitude
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Maragnon
             to
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Homague
             ,
             sixty
             leagues
             .
             All
             this
             Province
             consists
             in
             great
             Ilands
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             foresaid
             beginning
             of
             Homague
             ,
             to
             a
             certain
             great
             habitation
             of
             the
             same
             ,
             one
             hundred
             and
             nineteen
             leagues
             .
             This
             place
             is
             in
             an
             I
             le
             ,
             on
             the
             South-side
             of
             the
             body
             of
             Amazone
             ,
             having
             three
             degrees
             of
             Southern
             latitude
             ,
             and
             three
             hundred
             twelve
             degrees
             ,
             and
             fifty
             five
             minutes
             of
             longitude
             .
          
           
           
             From
             this
             Habitation
             to
             the
             Putumaya
             ,
             seventeen
             leagues
             .
             The
             mouth
             of
             this
             River
             is
             on
             the
             North-side
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Putumaya
             to
             Lyetau
             ,
             fifty
             leagues
             .
             The
             mouth
             of
             this
             River
             is
             on
             the
             South-side
             of
             Amazone
             ,
             and
             hath
             three
             degrees
             thirty
             minutes
             of
             Southern
             latitude
             .
          
           
             From
             Lyetau
             to
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Homague
             ,
             fourteen
             leagues
             .
             In
             this
             place
             there
             is
             a
             great
             and
             puissant
             Habitation
             in
             an
             I
             le
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             end
             of
             Homague
             to
             the
             Amarumaya
             ,
             twenty
             five
             leagues
             .
             The
             mouth
             of
             this
             River
             is
             on
             the
             South-side
             of
             Amazone
             having
             five
             degrees
             of
             Southern
             latitude
             ,
             and
             three
             hundred
             fifteen
             degrees
             ,
             and
             fifty
             minutes
             of
             longitude
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Amarumaya
             to
             the
             Village
             of
             the
             gold
             ,
             twenty
             eight
             leagues
             .
             This
             place
             is
             on
             the
             South-bank
             of
             the
             Channell
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Village
             of
             the
             gold
             to
             the
             Yopura
             ,
             fourteen
             leagues
             .
             The
             mouth
             of
             this
             River
             is
             on
             the
             North-side
             of
             Amazone
             ,
             and
             hath
             three
             degrees
             of
             Southern
             latitude
             .
          
           
           
             From
             the
             Yopura
             to
             Tapy
             ,
             four
             leagues
             .
             The
             mouth
             of
             this
             River
             is
             on
             the
             South-side
             of
             Amazone
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Tapy
             to
             the
             Catua
             ,
             twenty
             five
             leagues
             .
             The
             mouth
             of
             this
             River
             is
             on
             the
             South
             side
             of
             Amazone
             ,
             and
             towards
             the
             
               Green
               Lake
            
             ,
             formed
             into
             that
             condition
             by
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Catua
             and
             the
             
               Green
               Lake
            
             to
             the
             first
             mouth
             of
             the
             Araganatuba
             ,
             six
             leagues
             .
             This
             is
             on
             the
             North-side
             of
             the
             Amazone
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             fist
             mouth
             to
             the
             second
             of
             the
             Araganatuba
             ,
             sixteen
             leagues
             ;
             on
             the
             North-side
             of
             Amazone
             also
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             second
             mouth
             of
             the
             Araganatuba
             to
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Corosirare
             ,
             twenty
             two
             leagues
             .
             All
             this
             Province
             is
             on
             the
             South
             of
             the
             great
             River
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             end
             of
             Corosirare
             to
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Yoriman
             ,
             two
             leagues
             .
             On
             the
             South-side
             of
             Amazone
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             beginning
             of
             Yoriman
             to
             a
             great
             and
             very
             long
             Habitation
             ,
             twenty
             three
             leagues
             ,
             on
             the
             South
             of
             the
             River
             to
             four
             degrees
             of
             that
             latitude
             ,
             and
             three
             hundred
             nineteen
             degrees
             ,
             and
             thirty
             minutes
             of
             longitude
             .
          
           
           
             From
             this
             long
             Habitation
             to
             the
             I
             le
             Yoriman
             ,
             thirty
             two
             leagues
             ,
             on
             the
             South-bank
             side
             of
             the
             Amazone
             .
          
           
             From
             this
             I
             le
             to
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Yoriman
             ,
             ten
             leagues
             .
             On
             the
             South-side
             of
             the
             Amazone
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             end
             of
             Yoriman
             to
             the
             Cusiguare
             ,
             two
             leagues
             .
             The
             mouth
             of
             this
             River
             is
             also
             on
             the
             South
             of
             the
             Amazone
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Cusiguare
             to
             the
             Basurure
             ,
             thirty
             two
             leagues
             .
             The
             mouth
             of
             this
             River
             is
             on
             the
             North-side
             of
             the
             Amazone
             ,
             and
             hath
             four
             degrees
             ,
             thirty
             minutes
             ,
             of
             Southern
             latitude
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Basurure
             to
             the
             Rio-negro
             ,
             or
             Black
             River
             ,
             thirty
             leagues
             .
             The
             mouth
             of
             this
             River
             is
             also
             on
             the
             North-side
             of
             the
             Amazone
             ,
             having
             four
             degrees
             of
             Southern
             latitude
             ,
             and
             three
             hundred
             twenty
             two
             degrees
             ,
             and
             twenty
             minutes
             of
             longitude
             .
             And
             thus
             the
             course
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             into
             Rio-negro
             ,
             or
             the
             Black
             River
             ,
             is
             of
             seven
             hundred
             eighty
             eight
             leagues
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             preceding
             Measures
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             X.
             
               The
               rest
               of
               the
               Longitudes
               ,
               Latitudes
               ,
               and
               Measures
               observed
               unto
               the
               Atlantique
               Sea.
               
            
          
           
             FOllowing
             the
             same
             design
             of
             the
             Chapter
             preceding
             ,
             wherein
             we
             made
             stay
             ,
             till
             we
             came
             to
             the
             mouth
             of
             Rio-negro
             ,
             where
             he
             enters
             into
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             we
             shall
             in
             this
             Chapter
             make
             an
             end
             thereof
             ,
             pursuing
             the
             Amazones
             course
             into
             the
             great
             Ocean
             its
             self
             .
          
           
             From
             Rio-negro
             then
             unto
             the
             Madera
             are
             four
             leagues
             ;
             the
             mouth
             of
             this
             River
             being
             on
             the
             South
             of
             the
             Amazone
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Madera
             to
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             I
             le
             of
             Topinamba
             ,
             twenty
             eight
             leagues
             .
             This
             great
             I
             le
             is
             in
             the
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             towards
             the
             South-side
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             beginning
             to
             the
             end
             of
             this
             I
             le
             ,
             sixty
             two
             leagues
             .
             In
             this
             place
             is
             a
             great
             and
             puissant
             Habitation
             of
             the
             Topinambians
             ,
             having
             three
             degrees
             of
             Southern
             latitude
             ,
             and
             three
             hundred
             twenty
             seven
             degrees
             ,
             thirty
             minutes
             of
             longitude
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             end
             of
             Topinamba
             to
             the
             Coruris
             ,
             
             thirty
             leagues
             ;
             the
             mouth
             of
             which
             River
             is
             to
             the
             North
             of
             the
             Amazone
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Coruris
             to
             the
             Bosphore
             of
             the
             Amazone
             ,
             twenty
             four
             leagues
             .
             This
             strange
             narrownesse
             hath
             two
             degrees
             and
             fourty
             minutes
             of
             Southern
             latitude
             ;
             and
             three
             hundred
             twenty
             eight
             degrees
             ,
             and
             fifty
             minutes
             in
             longitude
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Bosphore
             to
             the
             Tapayse
             ,
             fourty
             leagues
             ;
             the
             mouth
             of
             which
             River
             is
             on
             the
             South
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Tapayse
             to
             the
             Coropatube
             ,
             fourty
             leagues
             ;
             the
             mouth
             of
             which
             River
             is
             on
             the
             North-side
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Coropatube
             to
             the
             Fort
             of
             the
             Destierro
             ,
             fifty
             four
             leagues
             ;
             which
             Forteresse
             is
             also
             on
             the
             North-side
             of
             the
             great
             River
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             foresaid
             Fort
             to
             the
             Ginipape
             ,
             six
             leagues
             ;
             the
             mouth
             of
             which
             River
             is
             on
             the
             North-side
             also
             ,
             having
             two
             degrees
             of
             Southern
             latitude
             ,
             and
             three
             hundred
             thirty
             one
             degrees
             and
             fifty
             minutes
             of
             longitude
             .
             And
             about
             two
             leagues
             under
             this
             Ginipape
             towards
             the
             Sea
             ,
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             begins
             to
             open
             himself
             by
             little
             and
             little
             towards
             his
             great
             Mouth
             ,
             or
             place
             of
             discharge
             into
             the
             Sea.
             
          
           
           
             From
             the
             Ginipape
             to
             the
             Paranaybe
             ,
             ten
             leagues
             ,
             the
             mouth
             of
             which
             River
             is
             on
             the
             South
             side
             of
             the
             Amazone
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Paranaybe
             to
             the
             Pacache
             ,
             fourty
             leagues
             ,
             the
             mouth
             of
             which
             is
             also
             on
             the
             South
             of
             the
             Amazone
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Pacache
             to
             Commuta
             ,
             fourty
             leagues
             .
             This
             place
             is
             also
             on
             the
             South-side
             of
             the
             Amazone
             .
          
           
             From
             Commuta
             to
             Para
             ,
             thirty
             leagues
             .
             This
             Town
             is
             also
             on
             the
             South-banke
             of
             the
             great
             mouth
             of
             the
             Amazone
             ,
             having
             one
             degree
             and
             thirty
             minutes
             of
             South
             latitude
             .
          
           
             From
             Para
             to
             the
             I
             le
             of
             the
             Sun
             ,
             fourteen
             leagues
             .
             This
             I
             le
             is
             also
             near
             to
             the
             same
             South-banke
             .
             And
             from
             Para
             to
             Zaparara
             ,
             fourty
             leagues
             ;
             which
             is
             a
             Cape
             on
             the
             extremity
             of
             the
             South-banke
             of
             the
             great
             River
             ,
             having
             thirty
             five
             minutes
             of
             South
             latitude
             ,
             and
             three
             hundred
             thirty
             seven
             degrees
             and
             ten
             minutes
             of
             longitude
             .
             And
             so
             the
             course
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             is
             from
             Rio-negro
             to
             Zaparara
             ,
             of
             four
             hundred
             eighty
             eight
             leagues
             ;
             and
             his
             whole
             length
             is
             one
             thousand
             two
             hundred
             seventy
             six
             leagues
             ,
             as
             have
             been
             set
             down
             in
             the
             preceeding
             Chapters
             .
             Yet
             to
             
             describe
             his
             North-banke
             of
             his
             great
             Mouth
             also
             somewhat
             more
             ,
             we
             shall
             thus
             set
             it
             down
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Ginipape
             to
             Corupa
             ,
             thirty
             leagues
             ;
             this
             place
             being
             on
             the
             North-side
             of
             the
             River
             .
          
           
             From
             Corupa
             to
             the
             Cape
             of
             the
             North
             ,
             the
             distance
             is
             not
             well
             known
             :
             and
             this
             Cape
             is
             on
             the
             extremity
             of
             the
             North-banke
             of
             the
             great
             River
             ,
             having
             fourty
             five
             minutes
             of
             North
             latitude
             ,
             and
             three
             hundred
             thirty
             three
             degrees
             and
             fifty
             minutes
             of
             longitude
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XI
             .
             
               Of
               the
               bredth
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               Iles
               of
               this
               great
               River
               .
            
          
           
             IF
             the
             great
             Amazone
             is
             wonderfull
             for
             its
             length
             ,
             it
             is
             no
             lesse
             admirable
             for
             its
             bredth
             ,
             and
             its
             Ilands
             .
             The
             one
             is
             alwaies
             of
             two
             ,
             three
             ,
             or
             four
             leagues
             broad
             ,
             but
             never
             so
             little
             as
             of
             one
             only
             :
             the
             others
             are
             innumerable
             ,
             and
             so
             great
             ,
             that
             their
             compasse
             is
             of
             five
             ,
             or
             of
             ten
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             of
             twenty
             ;
             yea
             ,
             and
             more
             than
             of
             an
             hundred
             
             leagues
             sometimes
             ,
             as
             is
             that
             of
             the
             Topinambes
             .
             There
             is
             a
             great
             number
             also
             of
             very
             little
             ones
             ,
             in
             which
             the
             Natives
             make
             their
             Burial-places
             ,
             having
             their
             Dwellings
             in
             the
             others
             ,
             that
             are
             greater
             .
             But
             the
             greater
             part
             of
             these
             Iles
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             the
             greatest
             of
             them
             ,
             are
             in
             part
             at
             least
             drowned
             and
             overflowed
             every
             year
             by
             the
             inundations
             of
             that
             River
             ,
             but
             so
             fatned
             thereafter
             with
             the
             mud
             ,
             that
             he
             scatters
             over
             them
             behind
             him
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             thereby
             exceeding
             fertile
             ,
             yielding
             every
             year
             without
             any
             intermissions
             of
             rest
             ,
             their
             ordinary
             crops
             ,
             which
             are
             of
             
               Maze
               ,
               Yoca
            
             ,
             and
             Mandioca
             ;
             which
             yeeld
             the
             common
             food
             for
             all
             America
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             in
             great
             abundance
             all
             along
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazone
             .
             But
             to
             help
             the
             inconveniences
             of
             overflowing
             ,
             they
             make
             under-ground
             Cellers
             ,
             Granaries
             ,
             or
             Caves
             well
             cover'd
             ,
             where
             they
             keep
             their
             Maze
             ,
             (
             which
             is
             their
             wheat
             )
             without
             impairement
             ;
             and
             the
             Yoca
             (
             which
             is
             a
             root
             )
             whereof
             they
             make
             their
             Casabe
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             ordinary
             ,
             and
             lesse
             finish
             bread
             of
             all
             Brasile
             ,
             and
             of
             all
             that
             New-world
             .
             Returning
             then
             to
             the
             wonders
             of
             the
             large
             Channell
             of
             this
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             we
             shall
             end
             this
             
             Chapter
             ,
             in
             telling
             you
             ,
             that
             he
             keeps
             alwaies
             about
             the
             same
             bredth
             ,
             that
             we
             have
             before
             set
             down
             ,
             untill
             by
             an
             enlarging
             him-self
             ,
             and
             opening
             into
             eighty
             four
             Spanish
             leagues
             of
             bredth
             ,
             he
             comes
             to
             lose
             his
             name
             and
             waters
             in
             the
             great
             Atlantique
             Ocean
             ,
             between
             the
             two
             Capes
             of
             the
             North
             ,
             and
             of
             Zaparara
             ;
             this
             being
             in
             Brasile
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             in
             Guiana
             ,
             Provinces
             of
             America
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XII
             .
             
               Of
               its
               Depth
               ,
               and
               Navigation
               .
            
          
           
             SEeing
             the
             great
             and
             wonderfull
             Channell
             of
             the
             renowned
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             as
             a
             certain
             long
             and
             vast
             Sea
             of
             sweet
             waters
             ,
             receives
             so
             many
             great
             ,
             broad
             ,
             and
             deep
             Rivers
             ,
             we
             must
             not
             think
             it
             strange
             ,
             if
             the
             depth
             of
             his
             bed
             equall
             oftentimes
             the
             Abysses
             of
             the
             Ocean
             its
             self
             .
             This
             is
             for
             the
             most
             part
             ,
             from
             his
             beginning
             unto
             Rio-negro
             ,
             of
             eight
             ,
             twelve
             ,
             and
             of
             twenty
             fathomes
             ;
             and
             from
             Rio-negro
             downwards
             to
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             of
             thirty
             ,
             fourty
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             without
             ground
             ,
             and
             unfathomable
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             relations
             of
             all
             that
             
             have
             observed
             it
             .
             But
             this
             marvellous
             advantage
             his
             depth
             hath
             beyond
             others
             singular
             ,
             that
             for
             the
             most
             part
             they
             are
             alike
             ,
             along
             the
             bankes
             and
             sides
             ,
             as
             they
             are
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             this
             large
             Channell
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             :
             whence
             it
             follows
             ,
             that
             his
             Navigablenesse
             ,
             and
             the
             fitnesse
             for
             commerce
             of
             this
             great
             River
             ,
             is
             open
             and
             sufficient
             enough
             for
             the
             greatest
             Navies
             ,
             of
             the
             greatest
             number
             ,
             of
             the
             greatest
             burthen
             ;
             which
             may
             not
             only
             sail
             up
             all
             along
             him
             to
             his
             first
             rise
             in
             order
             of
             Battell
             ,
             and
             ready
             for
             fight
             ;
             but
             also
             put
             to
             Land
             easily
             ,
             and
             apply
             to
             the
             shore
             ,
             without
             any
             fear
             of
             rocks
             ,
             or
             sands
             .
             And
             Providence
             having
             purposed
             every
             way
             to
             render
             all
             these
             wonders
             yet
             more
             considerable
             ,
             hath
             led
             the
             waters
             of
             this
             famous
             River
             alwaies
             from
             West
             to
             East
             ,
             and
             near
             unto
             the
             Aequator
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             ,
             that
             as
             Navale
             Armies
             might
             easily
             come
             down
             from
             his
             very
             source
             to
             his
             mouth
             ,
             carryed
             by
             the
             sweet
             force
             and
             strength
             of
             his
             current
             ,
             and
             streame
             ;
             so
             they
             might
             also
             as
             easily
             go
             up
             from
             his
             mouth
             and
             first
             entrance
             unto
             his
             very
             source
             ,
             against
             the
             stream
             of
             his
             deep
             waters
             ,
             by
             a
             favourable
             and
             continual
             winde
             ,
             which
             blows
             there
             in
             a
             good
             gale
             perpetually
             ,
             
             and
             without
             ceasing
             ,
             from
             East
             to
             West
             ,
             either
             all
             the
             day
             long
             ,
             or
             at
             lest
             three
             or
             four
             hours
             of
             it
             together
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             Diurnall
             motion
             either
             of
             the
             Earth
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             first
             moveable
             Heaven
             ,
             or
             Orbe
             :
             so
             that
             on
             the
             North-sea
             ,
             from
             the
             Canary
             Ilands
             ,
             to
             those
             of
             the
             Canibal's
             ;
             and
             on
             the
             South-sea
             ,
             from
             New-Spain
             ,
             unto
             the
             Philippine
             Iles
             ;
             as
             also
             all
             along
             the
             coast
             of
             Paria
             and
             Guiana
             ,
             as
             one
             goes
             from
             the
             North-cape
             ,
             to
             the
             Cape
             of
             Sailes
             ,
             the
             same
             East-wind
             is
             alwaies
             found
             to
             be
             on
             wing
             ,
             and
             in
             his
             reign
             ,
             without
             ceasing
             .
             But
             as
             in
             those
             other
             parts
             above-named
             ,
             it
             is
             impossible
             for
             Ships
             to
             take
             the
             same
             waies
             back
             again
             ,
             for
             returning
             to
             the
             places
             from
             whence
             they
             came
             ,
             that
             they
             held
             in
             coming
             from
             them
             ,
             so
             long
             as
             their
             Sailes
             must
             be
             fill'd
             with
             those
             East-windes
             ;
             so
             this
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             hath
             this
             particular
             advantage
             beyond
             them
             ,
             that
             whole
             Armadoes
             can
             go
             from
             East
             to
             West
             ,
             and
             from
             West
             to
             East
             ,
             alwaies
             under
             the
             line
             ,
             and
             the
             same
             way
             both
             of
             going
             and
             coming
             ,
             and
             as
             the
             same
             time
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XIII
             .
             
               Of
               the
            
             Bosphore
             
               of
               the
            
             Amazone
             .
          
           
             THe
             Thracian
             and
             
               Cimmerian
               Bosphores
            
             ,
             or
             Ox-swim-bredths
             were
             never
             so
             famous
             in
             ages
             past
             ,
             as
             the
             
               Amazonian
               Bosphore
            
             will
             be
             renowned
             in
             times
             to
             come
             ,
             in
             all
             apperance
             .
             This
             one
             strange
             Strait
             of
             this
             River
             (
             richer
             in
             one
             day
             ,
             than
             are
             at
             present
             both
             the
             Straits
             of
             Hellespont
             ,
             and
             of
             Elsenore
             )
             shuts
             up
             in
             one
             channell
             scarcely
             a
             thousand
             paces
             broad
             ,
             or
             an
             Italian
             mile
             ,
             the
             whole
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             proud
             of
             the
             spoiles
             of
             so
             many
             ,
             and
             great
             ,
             and
             long
             Rivers
             ;
             and
             highly
             puft
             up
             for
             his
             course
             of
             more
             than
             nine
             hundred
             sixty
             leagues
             ,
             through
             Plaines
             and
             Valleys
             the
             fertilest
             in
             the
             whole
             world
             ;
             and
             triumphing
             in
             all
             the
             waters
             ,
             that
             rise
             from
             the
             East
             of
             the
             great
             Cordeliere
             ,
             from
             the
             Town
             of
             Popayan
             to
             that
             of
             Plata
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             space
             of
             five
             hundred
             leagues
             .
             This
             wonderfull
             Bosphore
             ,
             or
             Ox-passe
             ,
             which
             Providence
             hath
             reserved
             to
             be
             one
             day
             the
             Key
             of
             the
             richest
             Trade
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             greatest
             Kingdom
             that
             is
             in
             one
             only
             Continent
             ,
             
             hath
             three
             hundred
             twenty
             eight
             degrees
             ,
             and
             fifty
             minutes
             of
             longitude
             ,
             and
             two
             degrees
             and
             fourty
             minutes
             of
             North-latitude
             ,
             and
             is
             three
             hundred
             leagues
             from
             the
             North
             sea
             ,
             following
             the
             course
             of
             turning
             and
             windings
             of
             this
             great
             River
             unto
             Zaparara
             ;
             however
             Father
             
               D'
               Acogna
            
             (
             often
             enough
             variable
             in
             his
             measures
             )
             carry
             sometimes
             this
             distance
             of
             the
             Bosphore
             from
             the
             Sea
             ,
             unto
             the
             length
             of
             three
             hundred
             sixty
             leagues
             .
             But
             untill
             the
             longitude
             of
             this
             great
             part
             of
             America
             be
             better
             observed
             ,
             I
             intend
             alwaies
             to
             follow
             the
             least
             measures
             of
             distances
             .
             Now
             this
             one
             only
             and
             famous
             Strait
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             is
             yet
             further
             considerable
             for
             this
             ,
             that
             the
             flowing
             of
             the
             great
             Seas
             is
             here
             easily
             perceived
             ,
             offering
             a
             marvellous
             advantage
             to
             the
             commerce
             of
             this
             Rivers
             Navigation
             ,
             by
             the
             ebbing
             ,
             and
             flowing
             of
             the
             Ocean
             .
             Whence
             it
             follows
             ,
             that
             the
             advantages
             of
             the
             first
             Nation
             ,
             that
             shall
             possesse
             its
             self
             by
             Colonies
             and
             Forts
             of
             both
             sides
             of
             this
             
               Amazonian
               Bosphore
            
             ,
             cannot
             be
             exprest
             in
             a
             few
             words
             .
             For
             can
             any
             doubt
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             riches
             of
             so
             many
             Mines
             discovered
             ,
             and
             not
             wrought
             ,
             by
             the
             miserable
             depopulations
             of
             the
             rich
             Western
             
             Regions
             of
             this
             
               Peninsulare
               America
            
             ,
             will
             be
             one
             day
             snatched
             up
             by
             the
             greed
             of
             those
             will
             follow
             us
             ,
             and
             the
             multitude
             of
             men
             that
             will
             be
             born
             hereafter
             in
             these
             happy
             Countries
             ;
             and
             will
             in
             end
             be
             carried
             on
             the
             currents
             of
             so
             many
             famous
             Rivers
             ,
             as
             render
             themselves
             unto
             the
             Bosphore
             of
             the
             Amazone
             ,
             to
             be
             afterwards
             brought
             into
             Europe
             ,
             by
             the
             easie
             Navigation
             of
             the
             Atlantique
             Sea
             ,
             in
             comparison
             of
             the
             troublesome
             mountains
             of
             Panama
             ,
             the
             Corsaires
             ;
             and
             the
             Shipwracks
             of
             the
             Gulph
             of
             Mexico
             ;
             and
             the
             notable
             dangers
             of
             the
             channell
             of
             Bahame
             ?
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XIV
             .
             
               Of
               the
               first
               three
               Rivers
               ,
               that
               enter
               into
               that
               of
               the
            
             Amazones
             .
          
           
             AFter
             that
             we
             have
             thus
             summarily
             described
             the
             course
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             we
             will
             return
             to
             his
             beginning
             ,
             to
             handle
             anew
             the
             things
             that
             are
             without
             ,
             and
             adjacent
             to
             it
             .
             But
             I
             could
             wish
             that
             Father
             Acogna
             ,
             the
             Authour
             and
             eye-witnesse
             of
             a
             part
             of
             these
             relations
             ,
             
             were
             more
             cleanly
             and
             understandable
             in
             them
             .
             For
             not
             having
             been
             able
             to
             find
             either
             cartes
             ,
             or
             books
             to
             help
             my
             cares
             that
             I
             have
             to
             unfold
             these
             ambiguities
             ,
             I
             my self
             therefore
             rest
             not
             satisfied
             in
             this
             behalf
             with
             mine
             own
             work
             .
             Without
             staying
             therefore
             to
             censure
             a
             Person
             of
             his
             Noblenesse
             and
             merit
             ,
             by
             reasons
             which
             I
             might
             ,
             and
             the
             curious
             may
             themselves
             perceive
             in
             his
             writings
             ,
             I
             shall
             take
             me
             to
             my
             Subject
             ,
             and
             tell
             you
             ,
             that
             from
             the
             Town
             of
             Cofana
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             Kixo
             ,
             to
             the
             East
             of
             the
             Andes
             of
             Peru
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             North
             of
             the
             line
             ,
             comes
             forth
             the
             Coca
             ,
             a
             navigable
             River
             ,
             which
             quickly
             renders
             himself
             on
             the
             North-side
             into
             the
             beginnings
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ;
             which
             as
             yet
             in
             these
             parts
             having
             his
             stream
             too
             rapid
             and
             violent
             ,
             hath
             not
             therefore
             at
             this
             place
             so
             convenient
             a
             navigation
             himself
             ,
             as
             other
             Rivers
             ,
             that
             enter
             into
             his
             large
             bed
             on
             the
             side
             of
             the
             Antarctique
             or
             South
             Pole.
             The
             first
             whereof
             passing
             on
             as
             it
             were
             about
             three
             daies
             journeys
             from
             the
             City
             of
             Avila
             of
             the
             same
             Province
             of
             the
             Kixos
             ,
             renders
             himself
             in
             short
             while
             ,
             and
             under
             the
             name
             of
             Payamino
             ,
             into
             the
             great
             River
             ,
             on
             the
             South-side
             thereof
             ,
             and
             below
             the
             
             entrance
             of
             the
             Coca
             ,
             though
             the
             distance
             is
             not
             known
             ,
             nor
             set
             down
             .
             But
             about
             eighteen
             leagues
             from
             the
             Town
             of
             Kito
             ,
             beyond
             the
             Andes
             of
             the
             great
             Cordelier
             ,
             is
             the
             mount
             Antezame
             on
             the
             South-side
             of
             the
             line
             ;
             from
             the
             foot
             of
             which
             the
             River
             of
             Napo
             coming
             forth
             ,
             and
             running
             amongst
             the
             Rocks
             without
             being
             navigable
             untill
             he
             come
             to
             a
             Port
             ,
             or
             Haven
             of
             the
             same
             name
             well
             nigh
             unto
             Archidona
             ,
             he
             becomes
             yet
             more
             easie
             to
             be
             navigated
             four
             leagues
             beneath
             that
             ,
             as
             well
             for
             the
             greatnesse
             of
             his
             Channell
             ,
             as
             for
             the
             lesse
             rapidnesse
             and
             violence
             of
             his
             stream
             :
             and
             pursuing
             in
             this
             condition
             his
             way
             to
             great
             River
             ,
             he
             enters
             thereinto
             about
             thirty
             leagues
             only
             from
             Archidona
             .
             But
             concerning
             the
             mouth
             of
             this
             River
             ,
             you
             may
             look
             the
             seventh
             Chapter
             of
             this
             Book
             ;
             unto
             which
             I
             will
             here
             adde
             ,
             that
             the
             foresaid
             Port
             of
             Napo
             ,
             where
             the
             Indians
             have
             an
             habitation
             ,
             is
             the
             best
             embarquing
             place
             ,
             for
             all
             those
             that
             from
             the
             Province
             of
             Kito
             ,
             would
             sail
             or
             go
             into
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
             And
             as
             to
             this
             pleasant
             fair
             ,
             and
             great
             enough
             River
             of
             Napo
             ,
             it
             hath
             this
             prerogative
             beyond
             others
             ,
             to
             rolle
             alongst
             with
             him
             a-amongst
             the
             sands
             of
             his
             current
             ,
             good
             
             store
             of
             Gold
             ,
             which
             the
             Natives
             of
             this
             Countrey
             gathering
             ,
             do
             therewith
             without
             much
             pains
             or
             trouble
             pay
             their
             tribute
             ,
             which
             yearly
             they
             owe
             to
             the
             Spaniards
             of
             that
             same
             Province
             ;
             a
             Province
             also
             that
             abounds
             every
             where
             else
             in
             all
             sorts
             of
             Fruites
             ,
             necessary
             for
             intertaining
             of
             the
             life
             ;
             the
             like
             whereunto
             may
             be
             said
             of
             it
             both
             for
             Fishing
             ,
             and
             Hunting
             ,
             or
             Chace
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XV.
             
               Of
               the
            
             Agarique
             
               and
               the
            
             Putomaya
             .
          
           
             HAving
             begun
             to
             shew
             you
             before
             ,
             the
             divers
             Havens
             or
             embarquing
             places
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             great
             and
             rich
             Province
             of
             Kyto
             may
             enter
             into
             the
             commerce
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             Amazone
             ;
             we
             will
             now
             follow
             the
             like
             way
             ,
             be
             the
             other
             Rivers
             that
             come
             from
             the
             North-side
             ,
             and
             give
             the
             like
             advantages
             to
             the
             rich
             Regions
             of
             the
             Popayan
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             new
             Granado
             :
             whereof
             the
             first
             are
             the
             Aguarique
             ,
             and
             the
             Putomaya
             ,
             taking
             their
             beginnings
             in
             the
             Putomaya
             ,
             taking
             their
             beginnings
             in
             the
             great
             mountaines
             of
             the
             Cordelier
             ,
             both
             of
             them
             well
             nigh
             to
             the
             Town
             
             of
             Pasto
             of
             the
             Government
             of
             Popayan
             ,
             having
             three
             hundred
             and
             one
             degrees
             ,
             and
             thirty
             minutes
             of
             longitude
             ,
             and
             one
             degree
             only
             of
             North
             latitude
             .
             But
             though
             both
             these
             Rivers
             have
             their
             course
             from
             West
             to
             East
             ;
             yet
             that
             of
             the
             Aguarique
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             Southerliest
             ,
             comes
             first
             to
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             the
             Chevelues
             ,
             or
             long-hair'd
             people
             ;
             and
             that
             after
             a
             course
             of
             more
             than
             an
             hundred
             leagues
             (
             all
             along
             Navigable
             )
             through
             happy
             ,
             fertile
             ,
             and
             well-inhabited
             Regions
             ,
             as
             all
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Realm
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             is
             .
             Now
             the
             mouth
             of
             this
             considerable
             River
             ,
             (
             the
             Name
             whereof
             is
             ,
             
               The
               River
               of
               Gold
            
             ,
             because
             he
             draws
             much
             of
             it
             along
             his
             bank-sides
             )
             is
             on
             the
             North-side
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             and
             about
             an
             hundred
             seventeen
             leagues
             from
             his
             own
             Sources
             and
             Spring-heads
             ,
             and
             likewise
             under
             the
             line
             .
             But
             the
             River
             of
             Putomaya
             taking
             a
             course
             much
             more
             stragling
             and
             wandring
             ,
             and
             watering
             a
             good
             many
             more
             Nations
             than
             the
             other
             ,
             makes
             also
             hereby
             his
             Navigation
             more
             considerable
             ,
             and
             of
             greater
             Portation
             by
             a
             course
             of
             farre
             greater
             extent
             ,
             and
             a
             greater
             number
             of
             Rivers
             ,
             that
             on
             all
             sides
             
             arrive
             unto
             him
             also
             .
             And
             after
             he
             hath
             fertilized
             so
             many
             great
             champain
             Countries
             by
             the
             fresh
             vapours
             of
             his
             waters
             ,
             and
             by
             his
             ordinary
             overflowings
             ,
             as
             all
             Rivers
             of
             America
             do
             ;
             he
             opens
             and
             enlarges
             himself
             near
             unto
             a
             leagues
             bredth
             at
             his
             entry
             into
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             and
             about
             four
             hundred
             fifty
             three
             leagues
             from
             his
             own
             Sources
             ,
             or
             Well-heads
             .
             Now
             the
             mouth
             of
             this
             River
             of
             Putomaya
             ,
             which
             carryes
             along
             with
             him
             gold
             also
             ,
             as
             most
             others
             do
             ;
             is
             on
             the
             North-side
             of
             the
             great
             River
             ,
             and
             hath
             two
             degrees
             and
             thirty
             minutes
             of
             Southern
             latitude
             ,
             having
             runne
             under
             the
             line
             a
             great
             deal
             more
             than
             the
             half
             of
             his
             course
             ,
             and
             under
             the
             same
             measured
             (
             in
             his
             bankes
             and
             windings
             at
             least
             )
             the
             space
             and
             length
             of
             more
             than
             three
             hundred
             fifty
             leagues
             .
             Thus
             the
             commerce
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             will
             in
             time
             coming
             receive
             no
             lesse
             enlargement
             by
             the
             happy
             Navigations
             of
             the
             Aguarique
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Putomaya
             ,
             than
             by
             other
             great
             and
             famous
             Rivers
             (
             which
             promise
             him
             the
             same
             encrease
             )
             as
             well
             for
             the
             richesse
             and
             fertile
             Countries
             of
             the
             Town
             of
             Pasto
             ,
             as
             for
             the
             situation
             of
             the
             same
             ,
             which
             is
             
             too
             farre
             distant
             from
             the
             conveniencies
             of
             the
             Port
             of
             Carthagena
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XVI
             .
             
               Of
               the
               great
            
             Caketa
             ,
             
               a
               considerable
               River
            
             .
          
           
             THe
             third
             and
             last
             River
             ,
             which
             from
             the
             North
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             mountains
             of
             the
             Cordelier
             ,
             comes
             into
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             goes
             under
             the
             name
             of
             
               The
               great
               Caketa
            
             ;
             and
             is
             acknowledged
             and
             celebrated
             for
             the
             greatest
             of
             all
             the
             Rivers
             in
             America
             ,
             next
             to
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
             The
             Kingdom
             of
             new
             Granado
             glories
             in
             its
             birth
             ,
             and
             the
             Valley
             of
             Nicao
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Popayan
             ,
             is
             the
             famous
             place
             of
             his
             Source
             ,
             which
             hath
             two
             degrees
             and
             thirty
             minutes
             of
             North-latitude
             ,
             and
             three
             hundred
             and
             three
             degrees
             ,
             and
             fourty
             minutes
             of
             longitude
             ,
             on
             the
             terrestrial
             Globe
             .
             This
             great
             River
             so
             much
             renown'd
             ,
             and
             yet
             so
             little
             known
             to
             this
             day
             by
             Geographers
             ,
             receives
             presently
             a
             marvellous
             increase
             of
             waters
             ,
             which
             descend
             in
             great
             abundance
             from
             the
             great
             
             mountains
             of
             St
             Faith
             of
             Bogota
             ;
             and
             taking
             his
             way
             from
             West
             to
             East
             ,
             almost
             every
             where
             parallell
             to
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             he
             insensibly
             draws
             near
             to
             runne
             under
             the
             line
             ,
             continuing
             thus
             his
             course
             untill
             about
             at
             one
             degree
             of
             North-latitude
             ,
             and
             three
             hundred
             eighteen
             degrees
             of
             longitude
             ,
             he
             divides
             his
             large
             and
             magnificent
             Channell
             into
             Rio-negro
             ,
             and
             Rio-grand
             ;
             i.
             e.
             into
             the
             Black
             River
             and
             the
             great
             River
             .
             But
             the
             great
             Caketa
             is
             so
             wonderfull
             at
             this
             place
             ,
             that
             this
             division
             hinders
             him
             not
             to
             render
             himself
             on
             the
             one
             side
             into
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             by
             the
             first
             of
             his
             branches
             ,
             and
             by
             an
             entry
             of
             more
             than
             one
             league
             and
             an
             half
             broad
             ;
             nor
             to
             keep
             for
             a
             long
             time
             the
             colour
             of
             his
             own
             pleasant
             and
             deep
             waters
             ,
             untill
             that
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             all
             gathered
             up
             into
             one
             great
             bed
             ,
             for
             receiving
             of
             him
             ,
             deface
             this
             appearance
             of
             the
             Caketaes
             waters
             ,
             but
             not
             untill
             after
             a
             combate
             between
             them
             ,
             for
             the
             space
             of
             twelve
             leagues
             length
             .
             As
             for
             his
             other
             branch
             (
             which
             I
             take
             to
             be
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Orenoc
             ,
             contrary
             to
             the
             opinions
             of
             Father
             
               D'
               Acogna
            
             ,
             because
             I
             see
             no
             other
             River
             from
             the
             
               Cape
               of
               the
               Sailes
            
             to
             the
             Cape
             of
             the
             North
             ,
             that
             can
             be
             attributed
             
             to
             him
             )
             it
             turns
             its
             course
             towards
             the
             North
             ,
             and
             renders
             himself
             into
             the
             North-Sea
             by
             a
             mouth
             worthy
             of
             his
             greatness
             and
             magnificence
             .
             But
             because
             the
             Orenos
             (
             as
             other
             Rivers
             of
             Guyana
             have
             )
             hath
             leaps
             and
             fals
             that
             are
             high
             and
             steep
             ,
             amongst
             the
             rocks
             ,
             that
             he
             passeth
             through
             ;
             (
             following
             here
             the
             relations
             of
             
               Diego
               d'
               Ordas
            
             ,
             of
             
               Alphonso
               de
               Herrera
            
             ,
             and
             of
             
               Anthony
               de
               Berreo
            
             ,
             who
             were
             amongst
             the
             first
             of
             such
             as
             navigated
             it
             )
             neither
             the
             commerce
             of
             the
             great
             Caketa
             ,
             nor
             that
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             can
             ever
             be
             hindred
             on
             this
             behalf
             ,
             as
             Father
             D'Acogna
             apprehends
             ,
             grounding
             himself
             on
             the
             passage
             of
             
               Lopez
               D'Aguirre
            
             ,
             which
             he
             held
             from
             the
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             to
             the
             North
             Sea
             by
             this
             track
             or
             way
             :
             but
             not
             knowing
             ,
             that
             Lopez
             had
             not
             light
             Boats
             ,
             that
             can
             pass
             over
             all
             ,
             and
             shoot
             such
             fals
             ,
             (
             as
             Oares
             do
             London-Bridge
             at
             a
             low
             water
             )
             or
             that
             he
             made
             draw
             them
             alongst
             with
             him
             by
             land
             (
             as
             other
             Spaniards
             also
             did
             before
             him
             )
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             leap
             or
             fall
             of
             the
             River
             Orenoc
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             of
             it
             ,
             which
             is
             at
             least
             an
             hundred
             Leagues
             distant
             from
             his
             mouth
             ,
             whereby
             he
             enters
             into
             the
             great
             Ocean
             .
             Returning
             therefore
             to
             the
             great
             Caketa
             ,
             we
             
             shall
             have
             done
             with
             him
             ,
             and
             this
             Chapter
             ,
             if
             we
             tell
             you
             ,
             that
             he
             receives
             an
             infinitie
             of
             other
             Rivers
             ;
             that
             he
             waters
             sundry
             rich
             Provinces
             ,
             and
             many
             very
             warlike
             Nations
             ;
             that
             his
             overflowings
             makes
             on
             all
             sides
             many
             great
             Lakes
             ,
             as
             is
             usuall
             in
             all
             other
             Rivers
             of
             America
             ;
             that
             now
             and
             then
             he
             sends
             some
             arms
             or
             branches
             into
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             which
             are
             equall
             to
             some
             good
             Rivers
             in
             other
             places
             :
             that
             his
             mouth
             of
             the
             Orenoc
             hath
             nine
             degrees
             of
             North-latitude
             ,
             and
             three
             hundred
             twenty
             one
             degrees
             and
             twenty
             minutes
             of
             Longitude
             :
             and
             that
             his
             mouth
             of
             Rio-negro
             (
             so
             called
             from
             the
             depth
             of
             his
             pure-clear
             waters
             ,
             whereby
             they
             seem
             black
             )
             hath
             four
             degrees
             of
             South-latitude
             ,
             and
             three
             hundred
             twenty
             two
             degrees
             ,
             and
             twenty
             minutes
             of
             longitude
             ,
             on
             the
             North-side
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             about
             some
             seven
             hundred
             eighty
             eight
             Leagues
             from
             his
             first
             sources
             ,
             the
             same
             distance
             ,
             that
             the
             Amazone
             hath
             from
             this
             place
             to
             his
             head
             ;
             as
             is
             before
             said
             towards
             the
             end
             of
             Chapter
             the
             ninth
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XVII
             .
             
               Of
               the
               River
               of
            
             Maragnon
             .
          
           
             ONe
             of
             the
             principall
             and
             most
             famous
             Rivers
             ,
             that
             the
             Andes
             of
             the
             Cordeliere
             send
             forth
             towards
             the
             South
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             is
             without
             all
             doubt
             the
             Maragnon
             ,
             as
             well
             for
             the
             rich
             and
             noble
             Province
             ,
             whence
             he
             takes
             his
             beginning
             ,
             as
             for
             the
             renown
             of
             his
             name
             ,
             whereby
             he
             is
             so
             celebrious
             in
             the
             Histories
             of
             this
             New-world
             :
             forasmuch
             as
             
               Joseph
               Acosta
            
             ,
             and
             Antony
             of
             Herrera
             ,
             give
             this
             name
             often
             both
             to
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             it self
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             River
             of
             the
             Orenoc
             ;
             and
             the
             Portuguaise
             of
             Brasile
             give
             the
             same
             name
             also
             to
             another
             considerable
             enough
             River
             ,
             which
             looseth
             himself
             in
             a
             great
             Bay
             ,
             or
             gulph
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             the
             Bay
             of
             Maragnon
             ,
             in
             the
             North-most
             Government
             of
             the
             Kingdome
             of
             Maragnon
             ,
             called
             for
             this
             same
             cause
             by
             that
             title
             also
             .
             But
             to
             the
             end
             that
             the
             diversity
             of
             so
             many
             Rivers
             ,
             and
             places
             called
             by
             this
             name
             ,
             may
             not
             beget
             confusion
             in
             my
             Geography
             ;
             I
             shall
             for
             ever
             leave
             it
             to
             this
             one
             alone
             ,
             and
             famous
             River
             ,
             that
             
             I
             now
             speak
             of
             ,
             the
             name
             of
             Maragnon
             ;
             a
             River
             well
             known
             from
             all
             Antiquity
             in
             the
             great
             Empire
             of
             Peru
             ,
             by
             this
             name
             .
             He
             hath
             this
             singular
             in
             the
             way
             of
             his
             course
             ,
             that
             whereas
             he
             takes
             his
             beginnings
             to
             the
             West
             of
             the
             great
             Mountains
             of
             the
             Cordeliere
             ,
             and
             not
             from
             its
             self
             ,
             yet
             he
             ceases
             not
             to
             pass
             through
             them
             ,
             and
             to
             draw
             all
             his
             deep
             waters
             towards
             the
             East
             of
             America
             .
             His
             famous
             sources
             honour
             the
             Lake
             of
             Boubon
             with
             the
             prerogative
             of
             his
             rise
             .
             This
             Lake
             is
             in
             the
             Countries
             of
             Guanuco
             ,
             a
             Colony
             of
             the
             Spaniards
             ;
             and
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             Lima
             ,
             the
             richest
             and
             first
             of
             all
             the
             Empire
             of
             Peru
             ,
             the
             most
             rich
             place
             of
             all
             the
             world
             .
             It
             s
             longitude
             is
             of
             three-hundred
             and
             two
             degrees
             ,
             and
             thirty
             minutes
             ,
             on
             the
             terrestriall
             Globe
             ;
             and
             his
             latitude
             of
             ten
             degrees
             ,
             and
             four
             minutes
             ,
             antarctick
             or
             meridionall
             ;
             and
             his
             distance
             from
             the
             royall
             Town
             of
             Lima
             ,
             forty
             Leagues
             .
             So
             this
             famous
             River
             of
             Maragnon
             coming
             forth
             of
             this
             foresaid
             Lake
             ,
             waters
             the
             long
             and
             fertile
             Valley
             of
             Saussa
             ,
             and
             cutting
             or
             crossing
             the
             Kings
             high
             way
             beween
             the
             Towns
             of
             Guanuco
             ,
             and
             Guamangue
             ,
             under
             Bridges
             made
             of
             cords
             and
             wood
             with
             a
             marvellous
             artifice
             ,
             he
             passes
             
             through
             the
             whole
             Andes
             of
             the
             Cordeliere
             ;
             from
             whence
             coming
             out
             again
             at
             last
             much
             more
             mighty
             than
             he
             was
             ,
             by
             the
             continuall
             confluence
             of
             Rivers
             ,
             that
             on
             all
             sides
             arrive
             unto
             him
             ,
             he
             passes
             along
             the
             Province
             of
             Mayn
             to
             the
             East
             of
             the
             Cordeliere
             ;
             and
             after
             his
             having
             saluted
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             the
             Town
             of
             St.
             
               James
               of
               the
               Mountains
            
             ,
             still
             made
             broader
             ,
             deeper
             ,
             and
             very
             swift
             and
             rapid
             in
             currant
             ,
             he
             afterwards
             spreads
             himself
             abroad
             at
             pleasure
             and
             with
             more
             liberty
             in
             diverse
             fair
             Provinces
             ,
             and
             amongst
             Nations
             puissant
             and
             warlike
             .
             In
             end
             following
             his
             course
             ,
             still
             growing
             bigger
             ,
             and
             more
             impetuous
             and
             rapide
             ,
             than
             one
             would
             think
             that
             he
             could
             be
             navigable
             ,
             he
             powres
             out
             all
             his
             waters
             into
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             at
             the
             Southside
             thereof
             ,
             having
             four
             degrees
             of
             Southern
             latitude
             at
             that
             place
             ;
             and
             three
             hundred
             and
             seven
             degrees
             ,
             and
             fifty
             minutes
             of
             Longitude
             ;
             and
             about
             two
             hundred
             fifty
             seven
             Leagues
             from
             the
             sources
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             .
             His
             own
             length
             is
             about
             three
             hundred
             Leagues
             ,
             reckoning
             by
             his
             banks
             ;
             and
             as
             for
             his
             navigation
             which
             I
             take
             ,
             ought
             not
             to
             be
             reckoned
             further
             ,
             than
             after
             that
             he
             hath
             passed
             the
             Andes
             ,
             it
             will
             not
             fail
             one
             
             day
             to
             bring
             the
             greatest
             riches
             of
             all
             Peru
             ,
             to
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             for
             the
             same
             reasons
             ,
             that
             we
             have
             heretofore
             mentioned
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Chapter
             of
             the
             Bosphore
             ,
             by
             name
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XVIII
             .
             
               Of
               the
            
             Amarumaya
             ,
             
               and
               of
               the
            
             Madera
             .
          
           
             IN
             the
             same
             Province
             of
             Lima
             of
             the
             great
             and
             rich
             Kingdome
             of
             Peru
             ,
             to
             the
             East
             of
             the
             great
             Mountains
             of
             the
             Cordeliere
             ,
             about
             twenty
             Spanish
             Leagues
             from
             the
             royall
             Town
             of
             Cusco
             ;
             about
             thirteen
             degrees
             and
             thirty
             minutes
             of
             South-latitude
             ;
             and
             three
             hundred
             eight
             degrees
             ,
             twenty
             six
             minutes
             of
             longitude
             ;
             are
             the
             sundry
             and
             abundant
             sources
             ,
             which
             presently
             cast
             themselves
             into
             one
             Channell
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             Amarumaya
             ,
             which
             in
             the
             Language
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             signifieth
             Serpents
             .
             The
             River
             (
             according
             to
             the
             testimonies
             of
             Infant
             Garcilassa
             ,
             come
             of
             the
             Kings
             of
             Peru
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             turned
             Ctaholick
             )
             saith
             he
             ,
             
               takes
               his
               course
               towards
               the
               East
               ;
               he
               wades
               great
               Provinces
               ,
               and
               renders
               himself
            
             
             
               at
               last
               ,
               into
               the
               North-Sea
            
             ;
             without
             saying
             any
             more
             .
             But
             this
             long
             and
             deep
             River
             ,
             being
             the
             same
             that
             Father
             D'Acogna
             acknowledges
             under
             the
             name
             of
             Cusco
             ,
             but
             knows
             it
             not
             by
             the
             name
             of
             Amarumaya
             ;
             after
             having
             received
             an
             infinitie
             of
             other
             Rivers
             into
             his
             bed
             ,
             and
             after
             that
             he
             hath
             run
             according
             to
             the
             measure
             of
             his
             crooked
             banks
             ,
             the
             length
             of
             four
             hundred
             Leagues
             ,
             he
             looseth
             his
             name
             with
             his
             waters
             in
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             to
             the
             South-side
             of
             it
             ,
             having
             five
             degrees
             of
             Southern
             latitude
             ,
             and
             five
             hundred
             forty
             two
             Leagues
             from
             the
             sources
             of
             the
             great
             River
             ,
             and
             three
             hundred
             fifteen
             degrees
             ,
             and
             fifty
             minutes
             of
             Longitude
             .
             But
             the
             Madera
             without
             contradiction
             ,
             is
             the
             last
             River
             ,
             that
             comes
             from
             the
             Southside
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             Andes
             of
             the
             great
             Cordeliere
             ,
             to
             pay
             his
             tribute
             to
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
             And
             as
             he
             is
             remotest
             in
             his
             sources
             ,
             so
             he
             is
             the
             longest
             ,
             having
             a
             course
             of
             about
             seven
             hundred
             Leagues
             .
             He
             wades
             inestimable
             fields
             ,
             and
             infinite
             Nations
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             were
             jealous
             of
             the
             glory
             of
             his
             ending
             ,
             he
             seems
             as
             it
             were
             upon
             design
             to
             shun
             rencountring
             with
             the
             Lake
             of
             Xaraya
             ,
             the
             originall
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             Plata
             ,
             leaving
             it
             upon
             his
             Eastside
             
             only
             fifty
             Leagues
             distant
             from
             him
             ;
             that
             he
             might
             with
             more
             honour
             loose
             his
             name
             and
             waters
             in
             the
             great
             ,
             and
             more
             renowned
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             and
             that
             by
             an
             entry
             ,
             that
             is
             worthy
             of
             his
             own
             greatness
             ,
             at
             three
             degrees
             and
             forty
             minutes
             of
             South-latitude
             ;
             and
             three
             hundred
             twenty
             four
             degrees
             of
             longitude
             ;
             and
             eight
             hundred
             thirty
             two
             Leagues
             from
             the
             sources
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
             As
             to
             the
             birth
             of
             the
             Madera
             ,
             whereof
             we
             shall
             speak
             ,
             (
             and
             to
             which
             the
             Spaniards
             gave
             this
             name
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             trees
             ,
             that
             he
             brought
             down
             into
             his
             mouth
             at
             that
             time
             when
             they
             discovered
             him
             )
             according
             to
             the
             best
             opinion
             ,
             it
             is
             in
             the
             most
             rich
             and
             opulent
             Province
             of
             Plata
             in
             the
             Kingdome
             of
             Peru
             ,
             to
             the
             East
             of
             the
             Mountains
             of
             the
             Andes
             ,
             under
             the
             twenty
             first
             degree
             of
             South-latitude
             ,
             and
             three
             hundred
             and
             thirteenth
             of
             Longitude
             .
             The
             Topinambians
             vaunt
             ,
             that
             they
             have
             come
             down
             all
             the
             length
             of
             it
             ,
             as
             we
             shall
             declare
             hereafter
             ;
             and
             they
             tell
             wonders
             of
             its
             greatness
             ,
             as
             also
             of
             other
             Rivers
             ,
             that
             on
             every
             side
             augment
             it
             .
             And
             finally
             his
             navigation
             being
             once
             fully
             discovered
             ,
             the
             Ages
             to
             come
             will
             doubtless
             proclaim
             the
             great
             riches
             ,
             that
             he
             will
             bring
             to
             the
             
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             drawn
             out
             of
             the
             Mountain
             of
             Potosie
             ,
             thirty
             Leagues
             distant
             only
             from
             his
             source
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XIX
             .
             
               Of
               the
               other
               Rivers
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               Province
               of
               the
               Kixes
               .
            
          
           
             THe
             other
             great
             and
             long
             Rivers
             ,
             not
             less
             considerable
             than
             the
             preceding
             ,
             which
             come
             forth
             also
             from
             the
             Mountains
             of
             the
             Andes
             ,
             to
             render
             themselves
             into
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             at
             his
             South-side
             ,
             (
             to
             follow
             the
             order
             of
             the
             ninth
             Chapter
             of
             this
             Book
             )
             are
             first
             :
             the
             Curaray
             ,
             between
             the
             Rivers
             of
             Napo
             ,
             and
             of
             Maragnon
             .
             His
             origine
             is
             in
             the
             Country
             of
             Macas
             ,
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Kixo
             .
             The
             second
             is
             the
             Yetau
             ,
             (
             called
             Lyetau
             in
             the
             ninth
             Chapter
             )
             as
             much
             renowned
             for
             his
             greatness
             ,
             as
             for
             the
             riches
             of
             his
             peoples
             (
             who
             wear
             Ear-pendants
             and
             Bracelets
             of
             fine
             gold
             )
             which
             hath
             his
             course
             between
             the
             Maragnon
             and
             the
             Amarumaya
             .
             And
             finally
             ,
             the
             Tapy
             ,
             the
             Catua
             ,
             the
             Cusiguare
             ,
             between
             the
             Amarumaya
             and
             the
             
             Madera
             ,
             to
             be
             thought
             the
             greater
             and
             the
             longer
             ,
             by
             how
             much
             their
             entries
             into
             the
             Amazone
             are
             wider
             and
             broader
             ;
             by
             means
             of
             all
             which
             ,
             and
             others
             ,
             that
             will
             be
             hereafter
             discovered
             (
             whether
             they
             enter
             into
             the
             great
             River
             themselves
             immediately
             ,
             or
             mediately
             only
             into
             others
             ,
             that
             come
             at
             last
             to
             him
             ,
             and
             pay
             their
             tribute
             )
             the
             commerce
             will
             alwayes
             be
             greater
             ,
             and
             the
             navigation
             happy
             through
             the
             whole
             Kingdom
             of
             the
             Amazones
             .
             But
             to
             give
             a
             beginning
             to
             the
             Relation
             ,
             not
             only
             of
             the
             Provinces
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Nations
             ,
             that
             dwell
             on
             the
             length
             and
             breadth
             of
             this
             admirable
             River
             of
             the
             
               Amazones
               ,
            
             ;
             but
             also
             of
             other
             curiosities
             ,
             the
             knowledge
             whereof
             will
             beget
             him
             no
             less
             advantages
             ;
             we
             will
             come
             back
             to
             the
             Province
             of
             Kixo
             ,
             the
             first
             of
             them
             all
             ,
             and
             the
             most
             renowned
             ,
             by
             the
             glory
             of
             the
             Amazones
             rise
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             place
             wherein
             his
             navigation
             becomes
             like
             unto
             that
             of
             the
             Ocean-Sea
             ,
             as
             also
             hath
             been
             declared
             in
             the
             seventh
             Chapter
             .
             It
             is
             fertie
             in
             gold
             and
             all
             other
             things
             ,
             being
             of
             the
             Kingdome
             of
             Peru
             ,
             and
             a
             Government
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Kyto
             .
             It
             was
             discovered
             by
             the
             Spaniards
             ,
             that
             passed
             over
             the
             Andes
             on
             the
             Westside
             ,
             Anno
             1640
             ,
             which
             
             was
             seven
             years
             after
             the
             Pizarres
             and
             the
             Almagres
             from
             the
             Panama
             first
             approached
             to
             the
             side
             of
             Peru
             ,
             and
             
               in
               fine
            
             conquered
             so
             great
             a
             Kingdom
             .
             In
             this
             Government
             of
             Kixo
             are
             the
             Towns
             of
             Baessa
             the
             Capitall
             of
             Avila
             ,
             and
             of
             Archidona
             ,
             little
             Colonies
             of
             the
             Spaniards
             ;
             and
             sundry
             other
             places
             ,
             
               Coffane
               ,
               Payamino
            
             ,
             and
             Anete
             ,
             sometimes
             the
             abode
             of
             Captain
             
               Joh●e
               de
               Falaci●s
            
             ;
             who
             pushing
             further
             in
             than
             others
             ,
             out
             of
             an
             ambition
             to
             make
             further
             conquest
             ,
             and
             from
             his
             zeal
             for
             Religion
             ,
             seated
             himself
             and
             his
             Souldiers
             in
             this
             remore
             habitation
             ,
             on
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ;
             but
             in
             the
             end
             was
             killed
             by
             the
             Savages
             his
             enemies
             .
             And
             so
             this
             place
             of
             A●●●e
             was
             left
             by
             the
             Spaniards
             ,
             as
             too
             far
             off
             from
             their
             Colonies
             ,
             and
             too
             much
             exposed
             to
             the
             dangers
             of
             so
             many
             warlike
             Nations
             ,
             that
             neighbour
             it
             .
             And
             this
             is
             enough
             of
             this
             Province
             ,
             having
             also
             discoursed
             of
             it
             Chapter
             the
             seventh
             ,
             and
             the
             fourteenth
             ,
             and
             of
             Ane●e
             in
             the
             ninth
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XX.
             
               Of
               the
               Province
               of
               the
               long-haired
               ,
               and
               of
               that
               of
               the
               Homagues
               .
            
          
           
             AMongst
             the
             principall
             Provinces
             ,
             which
             in
             going
             down
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             present
             themselves
             ;
             that
             of
             the
             long-haired
             people
             is
             not
             the
             least
             considerable
             ,
             as
             well
             for
             its
             greatness
             ,
             as
             for
             the
             valour
             of
             its
             peoples
             .
             It
             is
             on
             the
             North-side
             ,
             and
             begins
             from
             the
             River
             of
             the
             Aguarick
             ,
             and
             being
             of
             a
             good
             breadth
             ,
             extends
             it self
             in
             length
             more
             than
             one
             hundred
             eighty
             Leagues
             alway
             upon
             the
             side
             of
             the
             Amazone
             .
             It
             s
             Rivers
             roll
             gold
             ,
             its
             fields
             are
             all
             fertile
             ,
             and
             the
             yearly
             inundations
             make
             Lakes
             in
             it
             in
             great
             abundance
             .
             This
             Nation
             is
             one
             of
             the
             valiantest
             in
             all
             America
             ;
             it
             hath
             alwayes
             resisted
             all
             sallyes
             of
             the
             Spaniards
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             death
             of
             
               Johne
               de
               Palacios
            
             ,
             it
             put
             a
             sudden
             stop
             to
             their
             boldness
             .
             As
             well
             the
             men
             as
             the
             women
             wear
             their
             hair
             long
             even
             unto
             their
             girdingplace
             ;
             whence
             they
             were
             presently
             called
             the
             Chevelues
             ,
             or
             long-haired
             people
             ,
             great
             and
             fair
             ;
             as
             also
             a
             River
             was
             called
             ,
             that
             
             runs
             through
             the
             midst
             of
             this
             Province
             ,
             and
             loseth
             himself
             in
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ;
             on
             the
             mouth
             of
             which
             forty
             Portuguais
             and
             three
             hundred
             Brasilians
             encamped
             for
             eleven
             moneths
             the
             year
             1638
             ,
             as
             we
             shall
             declare
             afterwards
             .
             But
             the
             greatest
             and
             the
             best
             of
             all
             the
             Provinces
             ,
             that
             lie
             costing
             on
             the
             River
             Amazone
             ,
             is
             that
             of
             the
             Homagues
             :
             whose
             length
             is
             two
             hundred
             Leagues
             ,
             and
             his
             habitations
             so
             frequent
             ,
             that
             scarcely
             one
             is
             out
             of
             sight
             ,
             when
             another
             appears
             .
             But
             its
             breadth
             appears
             not
             to
             be
             great
             ,
             because
             it
             exceeds
             not
             the
             extent
             of
             such
             arms
             as
             the
             Amazone
             casts
             out
             that
             way
             .
             All
             the
             Towns
             and
             Villages
             are
             in
             great
             Ilands
             ,
             and
             in
             great
             number
             :
             and
             the
             beginning
             of
             this
             long
             Province
             on
             the
             West
             side
             is
             about
             three
             hundred
             seventeen
             Leagues
             from
             the
             sources
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
             Almost
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             it
             is
             the
             greatest
             and
             best
             habitation
             of
             the
             Homagues
             ,
             whereof
             we
             have
             spoken
             in
             the
             ninth
             Chapter
             ;
             as
             also
             of
             another
             mighty
             habitation
             ,
             consisting
             of
             an
             infinitie
             of
             houses
             after
             their
             fashion
             ,
             seated
             in
             an
             advantageous
             place
             ;
             filled
             with
             the
             valiantest
             men
             and
             best
             Warriors
             ,
             and
             furnished
             with
             all
             sorts
             of
             Arms
             and
             Munition
             of
             Warre
             ;
             and
             that
             because
             ,
             this
             ,
             place
             ,
             
             being
             the
             last
             of
             all
             the
             Province
             on
             the
             East
             side
             ,
             it
             is
             Frontier
             to
             many
             warlike
             peoples
             ,
             against
             whom
             the
             Homagues
             fight
             often
             ,
             and
             almost
             without
             ceasing
             .
             This
             Nation
             is
             the
             most
             reasonable
             ,
             and
             the
             best
             governed
             of
             all
             others
             of
             this
             discovery
             ;
             and
             that
             by
             the
             benefit
             of
             such
             amongst
             them
             ,
             as
             have
             frequented
             the
             Kixes
             of
             Peru
             ,
             from
             whence
             they
             were
             chased
             through
             sear
             of
             the
             Spaniards
             ,
             that
             used
             them
             as
             slaves
             .
             They
             are
             all
             honestly
             clothed
             as
             well
             men
             as
             women
             ;
             who
             make
             not
             only
             clothing
             for
             themselves
             of
             Cotton
             ,
             which
             they
             have
             there
             in
             abundance
             ;
             but
             also
             to
             traffique
             with
             in
             other
             Countries
             ,
             where
             their
             workmanships
             are
             sought
             after
             for
             their
             fineness
             and
             delicacy
             .
             These
             Stuffs
             are
             very
             pleasant
             ,
             woven
             of
             diverse
             colours
             ,
             or
             else
             painted
             with
             great
             skill
             .
             They
             are
             so
             subject
             and
             obedient
             to
             their
             Caciques
             ,
             or
             Lords
             ,
             that
             they
             presently
             do
             any
             thing
             upon
             a
             word
             speaking
             .
             They
             have
             all
             their
             heads
             flat
             out
             of
             a
             contrivance
             and
             are
             they
             use
             for
             it
             when
             they
             are
             born
             .
             They
             have
             continuall
             Warres
             on
             both
             sides
             of
             the
             River
             with
             the
             Savages
             ,
             who
             on
             the
             South
             side
             are
             the
             Curines
             ,
             so
             numerous
             ,
             that
             they
             not
             only
             defend
             themselves
             from
             the
             Homagues
             ,
             
             but
             also
             from
             other
             Nations
             ,
             that
             are
             further
             from
             them
             ,
             yet
             fight
             with
             them
             daily
             .
             And
             on
             the
             North
             side
             are
             the
             Tecunes
             ,
             no
             less
             valiant
             and
             numerous
             than
             the
             Curines
             ,
             seeing
             as
             they
             ,
             they
             make
             also
             Warres
             upon
             other
             Nations
             ,
             that
             are
             further
             off
             from
             them
             ,
             than
             the
             Homagues
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXI
             .
             
               Of
               the
               condition
               of
               slaves
               ;
               and
               of
               neighbouring
               Nations
               .
            
          
           
             ALl
             the
             Indians
             of
             the
             great
             Realm
             of
             the
             Amazone
             (
             as
             we
             have
             said
             elsewhere
             )
             are
             served
             only
             with
             slaves
             :
             and
             the
             only
             penalty
             of
             the
             vanquished
             prisoner
             ,
             is
             all
             brought
             to
             this
             sad
             debt
             towards
             the
             victorious
             enemy
             ,
             that
             took
             him
             in
             Warre
             .
             But
             the
             Homagues
             are
             so
             generous
             towards
             such
             as
             have
             been
             overcome
             ,
             more
             by
             an
             evil
             fortune
             ,
             or
             over-ruling
             power
             from
             heaven
             ,
             than
             by
             any
             feebleness
             that
             was
             in
             themselves
             ,
             that
             they
             use
             them
             very
             gently
             ,
             make
             them
             sometimes
             eat
             with
             themselves
             ,
             and
             never
             suffer
             them
             to
             be
             sold
             to
             who
             will
             give
             most
             .
             This
             were
             highly
             to
             
             offend
             them
             ,
             but
             to
             demand
             such
             things
             of
             them
             ;
             as
             the
             Portuguais
             often
             had
             experience
             ,
             who
             coming
             down
             the
             great
             River
             Anno
             1639
             ,
             arrived
             one
             day
             amongst
             others
             at
             an
             habitation
             of
             these
             Homagues
             :
             who
             received
             them
             in
             peace
             ,
             and
             with
             great
             joy
             ,
             and
             very
             liberally
             presented
             them
             with
             any
             thing
             they
             stood
             in
             need
             of
             .
             They
             sold
             them
             Stuffes
             ,
             also
             Canoes
             or
             Boats
             ,
             that
             were
             very
             light
             :
             but
             never
             any
             slaves
             ,
             not
             enduring
             so
             much
             as
             to
             hear
             of
             it
             .
             Whence
             it
             follows
             ,
             that
             these
             people
             's
             replenished
             with
             so
             much
             sweetness
             and
             modesty
             ,
             would
             easily
             enough
             receive
             the
             rule
             of
             a
             moderate
             Prince
             ,
             and
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             true
             Religion
             .
             But
             that
             we
             may
             lightly
             pass
             over
             the
             Nations
             that
             are
             on
             the
             one
             side
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Homague
             ;
             we
             shall
             only
             say
             ,
             that
             to
             the
             North
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             the
             Yorunes
             ,
             and
             the
             Paryanes
             ,
             and
             then
             the
             Atoyes
             ,
             and
             the
             Cunes
             ;
             and
             finally
             the
             Homaguazietes
             (
             that
             is
             ,
             the
             true
             Homagues
             ,
             the
             valiantest
             of
             these
             Nations
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             were
             the
             superiours
             to
             the
             others
             )
             dwell
             alongst
             the
             vast
             fields
             of
             both
             the
             banks
             of
             Putumaya
             ,
             all
             along
             up
             towards
             its
             source
             ,
             So
             for
             the
             South
             side
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Homague
             ,
             the
             Tipunes
             ,
             
             and
             the
             Guanares
             ,
             and
             then
             the
             Ozoanes
             ,
             and
             the
             Nahones
             ;
             and
             after
             them
             the
             Canomanes
             and
             the
             Marianes
             ,
             possesse
             the
             large
             Regions
             between
             the
             Maragnon
             and
             the
             Amarumaya
             ,
             from
             the
             mouth
             of
             the
             
               Yet
               as
            
             to
             the
             Source
             of
             the
             same
             .
             But
             all
             these
             Nations
             are
             so
             valourous
             ,
             especially
             those
             that
             are
             furthest
             off
             ,
             and
             that
             are
             at
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             River
             Putumaya
             ,
             that
             oftentimes
             the
             Spaniards
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Kyto
             ,
             and
             of
             Popayan
             ,
             have
             been
             repulsed
             by
             them
             through
             force
             of
             Armes
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Province
             of
             Corosirare
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Neighbouring
             Nations
             .
          
           
             BEtween
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Homague
             ,
             and
             the
             beginning
             of
             that
             of
             Corosirare
             ,
             the
             two
             bankes
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             are
             possessed
             for
             fifty
             three
             leagues
             space
             by
             the
             Cacygares
             and
             Tucuries
             on
             the
             South-side
             ,
             and
             in
             part
             on
             the
             Amarumaya
             ;
             and
             on
             the
             North-side
             ,
             by
             the
             Curis
             ,
             and
             the
             Guayrabes
             .
             The
             Habitations
             of
             all
             which
             Peoples
             are
             
             remote
             from
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             River
             ,
             for
             fear
             of
             the
             Homagues
             .
             But
             the
             Nation
             Corosirare
             ,
             that
             dwell
             to
             the
             South
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             begins
             at
             
               The
               Village
               of
               Gold
            
             ,
             and
             ends
             not
             till
             after
             eighty
             leagues
             in
             length
             down
             the
             great
             River
             .
             Its
             Grounds
             and
             Fields
             are
             higher
             than
             ordinary
             ;
             and
             the
             Habitations
             of
             this
             Province
             are
             so
             frequent
             ,
             that
             oftentimes
             for
             four
             leagues
             together
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             for
             six
             ,
             one
             can
             see
             nothing
             else
             .
             This
             people
             ,
             though
             Savage
             ,
             yet
             wants
             neither
             policy
             ,
             not
             good
             conduct
             of
             their
             affairs
             ;
             all
             their
             Houses
             are
             well
             ordered
             ,
             and
             replenished
             with
             all
             sorts
             of
             Vivers
             ,
             and
             Commodities
             .
             They
             have
             many
             Kills
             or
             Furnaces
             ,
             and
             make
             all
             fort
             of
             Earthen
             Vessels
             ,
             which
             they
             sell
             and
             traffique
             by
             with
             other
             Nations
             ;
             but
             all
             by
             way
             of
             Exchange
             ,
             as
             all
             other
             Indians
             do
             .
             As
             to
             that
             Habitation
             of
             this
             Countrey
             ,
             which
             the
             Portuguau
             ,
             while
             they
             went
             up
             the
             great
             River
             ,
             an
             .
             One
             thousand
             six
             hundred
             thirty
             eight
             ,
             called
             
               The
               Village
               of
               Gold
            
             ,
             (
             whereof
             we
             spake
             also
             in
             the
             ninth
             Chapter
             )
             it
             was
             by
             occasion
             of
             a
             pair
             of
             Ear-pendants
             of
             fine
             gold
             ,
             which
             they
             took
             there
             from
             a
             woman
             :
             which
             were
             so
             fine
             ,
             that
             the
             gold
             was
             found
             of
             
             one
             and
             twenty
             caracts
             in
             the
             Town
             of
             Kyto
             ,
             after
             their
             arrivall
             there
             .
             But
             so
             soon
             as
             these
             Natives
             of
             this
             Village
             perceived
             the
             greedinesse
             of
             the
             Souldiers
             after
             ornaments
             of
             gold
             ,
             they
             presently
             thereafter
             hid
             all
             that
             they
             had
             ,
             and
             no
             more
             was
             seen
             after
             that
             ;
             no
             not
             at
             the
             return
             of
             the
             same
             Portuguais
             in
             an
             One
             thousand
             six
             hundred
             thirty
             nine
             ,
             who
             could
             never
             obtaine
             but
             one
             pair
             of
             these
             Ear-pendants
             by
             exchange
             with
             the
             Indians
             ,
             which
             Father
             D'Acogna
             himself
             bought
             ,
             to
             let
             them
             be
             seen
             in
             Spain
             .
             But
             the
             great
             Nation
             of
             the
             Suanes
             ,
             which
             extends
             it self
             to
             the
             great
             Caketa
             ,
             fills
             all
             the
             Fields
             that
             are
             on
             the
             other
             banke
             of
             the
             North
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             :
             but
             with
             this
             remarke
             ,
             that
             their
             Plaines
             are
             a
             great
             deal
             lower
             ,
             than
             the
             opposite
             Grounds
             and
             Fields
             of
             the
             Corosirares
             ;
             in
             whose
             Province
             are
             the
             Mouthes
             of
             the
             great
             and
             fair
             Rivers
             of
             Tapy
             and
             Catua
             ,
             this
             last
             forming
             and
             fashioning
             Lago-verde
             ,
             with
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
             And
             alongst
             these
             two
             Rivers
             ,
             as
             one
             goes
             up
             them
             ,
             dwels
             the
             great
             Nation
             of
             the
             Pacuanes
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XXIII
             .
             
               Of
               the
               Gold-Mine
               of
               the
            
             Suanes
             ,
             
               and
               of
               the
               Neighbouring
               Nations
            
             .
          
           
             THe
             great
             Province
             of
             Suane
             heretofore
             mentioned
             ,
             hath
             this
             singular
             glory
             amongst
             all
             the
             others
             ,
             that
             are
             honoured
             by
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             to
             carry
             Gold
             within
             her
             bowels
             .
             The
             famous
             Mountain
             that
             nourisheth
             in
             his
             bosome
             so
             great
             a
             treasure
             ,
             hath
             about
             two
             degrees
             of
             South
             latitude
             ,
             and
             three
             hundred
             seventeen
             degrees
             of
             longitude
             .
             It
             is
             two
             hundred
             leagues
             only
             distant
             from
             the
             Town
             of
             St
             Thomas
             ,
             a
             Colony
             of
             the
             Spaniards
             in
             Orenoc
             ,
             and
             fourty
             leagues
             from
             the
             Atlantique
             Sea.
             And
             the
             precious
             River
             of
             Gold
             (
             for
             so
             the
             Natives
             of
             the
             Countrey
             call
             it
             )
             which
             waters
             its
             foot
             ,
             draws
             abundance
             of
             this
             rich
             Mettall
             with
             him
             ,
             in
             form
             of
             graines
             of
             Corn
             ,
             and
             little
             bigger
             billetts
             .
             It
             presently
             disburdens
             its
             self
             into
             the
             Yopura
             ,
             another
             considerable
             River
             ,
             which
             likewise
             looseth
             himself
             into
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             on
             the
             North-side
             ,
             at
             three
             degrees
             of
             South
             
             latitude
             ,
             and
             five
             hundred
             eighty
             four
             leagues
             ,
             from
             the
             Sources
             of
             the
             great
             River
             .
             Whence
             it
             follows
             that
             the
             commerce
             so
             advantageous
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             with
             this
             famous
             Mountain
             of
             Suane
             ,
             is
             made
             the
             more
             commodious
             by
             the
             Navigation
             of
             this
             River
             of
             Yopura
             ,
             by
             going
             up
             him
             into
             the
             River
             of
             Gold
             ;
             and
             that
             the
             ages
             to
             come
             will
             one
             day
             make
             famous
             these
             places
             with
             rich
             Towns
             and
             magnifique
             Inhabitants
             .
             For
             the
             present
             ,
             among
             all
             the
             Peoples
             of
             these
             Countries
             ,
             the
             Managues
             are
             those
             ,
             that
             traffique
             with
             this
             Gold
             ,
             the
             weight
             whereof
             ,
             and
             its
             finenesse
             makes
             it
             so
             perfect
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             the
             most
             excellent
             of
             all
             America
             .
             The
             Indians
             that
             buy
             of
             it
             ,
             by
             exchange
             of
             other
             things
             for
             it
             ,
             make
             of
             it
             little
             long
             Plates
             ,
             which
             they
             hang
             at
             their
             Noses
             ,
             and
             Ears
             :
             and
             this
             rich
             Ornament
             is
             ordinary
             and
             frequent
             in
             all
             these
             Provinces
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             report
             of
             the
             Savages
             .
             But
             the
             Nations
             (
             besides
             the
             Suanes
             )
             that
             are
             nearest
             to
             the
             treasures
             of
             this
             rich
             Mountain
             ,
             are
             the
             Aguaynes
             ,
             the
             Mocunes
             ,
             the
             chief
             of
             all
             such
             as
             dwell
             to
             the
             East
             of
             the
             Suanes
             ,
             and
             cultivate
             the
             fertile
             Fields
             ,
             that
             are
             watered
             by
             both
             the
             Channells
             of
             the
             Araganatube
             .
             
             Now
             all
             the
             Plaines
             of
             these
             fertile
             Regions
             ,
             as
             well
             on
             the
             North
             as
             on
             the
             South-side
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazone
             ,
             where
             the
             Province
             of
             Corosirare
             is
             ;
             are
             the
             best
             and
             manyest
             ,
             and
             best
             disposed
             to
             receive
             all
             sort
             of
             culture
             ,
             of
             all
             America
             .
             But
             returning
             to
             the
             Gold-Mine
             of
             the
             Mount
             of
             Suane
             ,
             I
             wonder
             that
             neither
             the
             Spaniards
             of
             Hordas
             ,
             and
             of
             Berreo
             ,
             nor
             the
             English
             of
             Kemnits
             ,
             and
             of
             Ralech
             have
             never
             met
             with
             it
             ,
             that
             have
             searched
             with
             so
             much
             ruine
             and
             calamity
             to
             the
             Natives
             ,
             alongst
             the
             great
             River
             of
             Orenoc
             ,
             the
             imaginary
             Treasures
             of
             the
             fabulous
             rather
             than
             famous
             
               Lagad
               rado
            
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXIV
             .
             
               Of
               the
               Province
               of
            
             Yoriman
             .
          
           
             NEXT
             after
             the
             Province
             of
             Corosirare
             ,
             as
             you
             go
             down
             the
             great
             Amazone
             on
             the
             South-side
             ,
             is
             the
             Province
             of
             Yoriman
             ,
             being
             but
             of
             sixty
             leagues
             long
             ,
             but
             of
             such
             repute
             amongst
             the
             Indians
             of
             all
             these
             Countries
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             strength
             and
             valour
             of
             its
             Inhabitants
             ,
             than
             the
             Navy
             
             of
             the
             Portuguais
             themselves
             passing
             along
             did
             perceive
             it
             .
             They
             are
             of
             a
             good
             stature
             ,
             of
             a
             fair
             body
             ,
             and
             well
             formed
             .
             They
             are
             expert
             in
             all
             things
             they
             take
             themselves
             to
             ,
             especially
             in
             Armes
             ;
             and
             go
             all
             naked
             ,
             as
             well
             men
             ,
             as
             women
             .
             They
             are
             also
             so
             numerous
             for
             multitude
             ,
             that
             never
             any
             saw
             at
             one
             time
             so
             many
             Barbarians
             together
             .
             It
             was
             an
             infallible
             token
             of
             their
             great
             courage
             ,
             that
             they
             went
             and
             came
             (
             as
             they
             did
             )
             amidst
             the
             Armed
             Vessels
             and
             Ships
             of
             Warre
             of
             the
             Portuguais
             ,
             to
             traffique
             with
             them
             ,
             with
             extreme
             assurance
             of
             minde
             .
             For
             whilest
             the
             Portuguais
             going
             up
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             sail'd
             along
             by
             this
             Province
             ,
             every
             day
             there
             came
             to
             them
             above
             two
             hundred
             Canoes
             ,
             full
             of
             Women
             and
             Children
             ,
             with
             Fruits
             ,
             Fishes
             ,
             Meales
             ,
             and
             other
             such
             like
             Provision
             ,
             which
             they
             changed
             with
             the
             Portuguais
             for
             axes
             and
             knives
             ,
             whereof
             they
             have
             great
             esteem
             ,
             as
             all
             others
             Indians
             of
             the
             new
             world
             .
             The
             Yorimans
             inhabite
             not
             only
             the
             main
             Land
             of
             this
             Province
             ,
             but
             fill
             also
             the
             great
             Iles
             that
             the
             great
             Amazone
             makes
             by
             sundry
             of
             his
             Armes
             stretched
             forth
             .
             The
             first
             Village
             of
             this
             Warlike
             Nation
             ,
             is
             on
             the
             mouth
             of
             a
             
             Christalline
             River
             ,
             which
             must
             be
             strong
             ,
             and
             come
             very
             farre
             considering
             the
             force
             ,
             wherewith
             he
             pusheth
             the
             deep
             waters
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
             But
             the
             notablest
             of
             their
             Habitations
             ,
             is
             the
             greatest
             of
             any
             that
             lie
             on
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             containing
             more
             a
             good
             deal
             on
             the
             banke
             of
             that
             River
             ,
             than
             a
             good
             league
             :
             and
             in
             every
             of
             its
             Houses
             ,
             four
             or
             five
             Familes
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             more
             ;
             whereby
             easily
             may
             be
             gathered
             the
             great
             number
             of
             the
             Inhabitants
             of
             this
             long
             Town
             ,
             whereof
             we
             spake
             also
             in
             the
             ninth
             Chapter
             of
             this
             Book
             .
             It
             was
             in
             this
             place
             ,
             so
             abounding
             with
             all
             things
             ,
             that
             the
             Fleet
             of
             the
             Portuguais
             stay'd
             five
             or
             six
             daies
             at
             its
             return
             ,
             after
             it
             had
             gone
             up
             the
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             before
             with
             good
             successe
             ,
             as
             shall
             be
             afterwards
             related
             .
             Not
             one
             of
             so
             numerous
             a
             people
             fled
             from
             his
             House
             for
             fear
             of
             their
             arrivall
             ;
             but
             the
             whole
             Fleet
             got
             freely
             from
             them
             ,
             all
             that
             they
             stood
             in
             need
             of
             ;
             and
             because
             the
             Navy
             was
             near
             an
             end
             of
             all
             its
             Provisions
             ,
             it
             got
             from
             their
             bounty
             five
             hundred
             Sacks
             of
             the
             Meale
             of
             Mandioqua
             ,
             which
             sufficed
             it
             for
             the
             whole
             rest
             of
             its
             Voyage
             .
             The
             other
             Habitations
             also
             of
             this
             happy
             Province
             of
             Yoriman
             ,
             are
             not
             much
             inferiour
             
             to
             the
             former
             ,
             they
             are
             all
             along
             very
             frequent
             on
             the
             firm
             land
             ;
             but
             yet
             both
             mightier
             and
             more
             numerous
             in
             a
             great
             Iland
             about
             thirty
             leagues
             lower
             ;
             where
             it
             seemes
             the
             principall
             Forces
             are
             of
             this
             generous
             Nation
             ;
             generous
             I
             say
             ,
             both
             for
             its
             valour
             ,
             liberality
             ,
             and
             numerousnesse
             of
             men
             ,
             that
             inhabite
             it
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXV
             .
             
               Of
               the
               Province
               of
            
             Surina
             ,
             
               and
               the
               Neighbouring
               Nations
            
             .
          
           
             BUt
             to
             go
             from
             the
             Province
             of
             Yoriman
             ,
             to
             that
             of
             Surina
             ,
             we
             must
             in
             our
             passage
             visit
             the
             Nation
             of
             the
             Cusiguares
             ,
             that
             labour
             the
             fertile
             Plaines
             situated
             on
             the
             South-banke
             of
             the
             Amazone
             ;
             which
             in
             this
             place
             receives
             the
             plentifull
             waters
             of
             that
             great
             River
             ,
             that
             gives
             its
             own
             name
             to
             this
             pleasant
             Province
             .
             This
             renowned
             River
             of
             Cusiguare
             ,
             both
             for
             the
             easinesse
             of
             its
             Navigation
             (
             though
             somewhat
             hindered
             now
             and
             then
             by
             Rocks
             appearing
             in
             it
             here
             and
             there
             )
             and
             for
             the
             happinesse
             of
             its
             Fishing
             ,
             no
             lesse
             abounding
             
             here
             ,
             than
             elsewhere
             ,
             will
             be
             no
             lesse
             considerable
             for
             the
             high
             stature
             and
             the
             great
             courage
             of
             his
             Nation
             of
             the
             Motuanes
             ,
             that
             cover
             the
             first
             Plaine
             ,
             that
             he
             waters
             ,
             who
             by
             testimony
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             that
             report
             it
             ,
             use
             also
             long
             Plates
             of
             fine
             Gold
             ,
             for
             Eare
             and
             Nose-Pendants
             ;
             whence
             it
             would
             seem
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             not
             farre
             from
             the
             rich
             Province
             of
             the
             Plata
             ,
             and
             of
             Potosy
             ,
             because
             even
             to
             travell
             up
             to
             their
             Countrey
             ,
             it
             takes
             full
             two
             moneths
             time
             .
             But
             upon
             the
             same
             River
             ,
             and
             between
             the
             aforesaid
             two
             Nations
             ,
             the
             Curians
             ,
             and
             the
             Catoses
             ,
             enjoy
             likewise
             the
             happy
             fruitfulnesse
             of
             so
             many
             good
             Grounds
             ,
             and
             so
             many
             pleasant
             Rivers
             ,
             that
             on
             all
             sides
             enter
             into
             their
             principall
             River
             .
             Now
             ,
             as
             the
             Province
             of
             Homague
             is
             celebrated
             amongst
             all
             those
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             for
             its
             fine
             works
             of
             Stufles
             and
             Cloathes
             of
             Cotton
             of
             so
             great
             variety
             ;
             and
             the
             Province
             of
             Corosirare
             for
             their
             excellent
             Pottery
             of
             Vessels
             of
             Earth
             so
             artificially
             Painted
             ,
             and
             fashioned
             :
             so
             the
             Province
             of
             Surina
             is
             no
             lesse
             commendable
             for
             a
             delicate
             houshold-stuffe
             ,
             or
             Utensiles
             of
             a
             marvellous
             fine
             artifice
             .
             It
             is
             on
             the
             South
             of
             the
             great
             River
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             East
             
             of
             the
             Cusiguares
             :
             its
             Peoples
             being
             the
             Surines
             ,
             and
             the
             Coripunes
             ,
             Nations
             that
             are
             the
             most
             curious
             and
             expert
             of
             working
             in
             Wood
             ,
             of
             any
             in
             all
             America
             .
             They
             make
             Seates
             and
             Formes
             in
             the
             fashion
             of
             Animals
             ,
             yet
             so
             fine
             and
             commodious
             for
             the
             ease
             of
             the
             body
             ,
             that
             nothing
             can
             be
             added
             to
             their
             industry
             .
             They
             make
             also
             Javelots
             and
             Arrows
             ,
             with
             so
             much
             gentilenesse
             and
             elegancy
             ,
             that
             all
             other
             Nations
             seek
             after
             them
             .
             And
             the
             like
             Images
             ,
             that
             they
             make
             to
             the
             life
             are
             so
             perfectly
             done
             in
             all
             points
             ,
             that
             our
             best
             Ingravers
             and
             Carvers
             ,
             could
             find
             no
             other
             occasion
             but
             to
             learn
             from
             them
             :
             so
             that
             by
             exchange
             of
             so
             many
             singular
             workmanships
             of
             so
             sundry
             sorts
             ,
             they
             daily
             make
             their
             lives
             more
             happy
             by
             all
             necessary
             Commodities
             ,
             which
             on
             all
             sides
             come
             unto
             them
             from
             this
             rich
             traffique
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XXVI
             .
             
               Of
               the
               Province
               of
            
             Caribane
             .
          
           
             FOr
             as
             much
             as
             the
             distances
             of
             all
             these
             Rivers
             and
             Provinces
             ,
             are
             just
             enough
             set
             down
             in
             the
             ninth
             Chapter
             of
             this
             Book
             ;
             we
             shall
             say
             only
             of
             this
             Province
             of
             Caribane
             ,
             that
             it
             lies
             between
             the
             Rio-negro
             and
             the
             great
             Amazone
             in
             extent
             of
             more
             than
             an
             hundred
             leagues
             on
             the
             banks
             of
             either
             of
             them
             .
             Its
             Fields
             and
             Plaines
             are
             higher
             than
             that
             they
             are
             subject
             to
             the
             overflowings
             of
             these
             Rivers
             ,
             or
             of
             an
             equall
             height
             unto
             them
             ;
             yet
             fertile
             and
             abundant
             in
             all
             things
             .
             The
             River
             of
             Bazurura
             ,
             which
             enters
             into
             that
             of
             the
             Amazones
             on
             the
             North-side
             ,
             makes
             here
             Lakes
             and
             Ilands
             very
             pleasant
             :
             and
             the
             divers
             Nations
             of
             this
             great
             Province
             ,
             are
             no
             lesse
             considerable
             for
             the
             plenteousnesse
             and
             fertility
             of
             their
             Countrey
             ,
             than
             for
             the
             happy
             condition
             of
             their
             life
             .
             Of
             these
             ,
             the
             Araguananes
             ,
             and
             the
             Mariguanes
             ,
             are
             the
             most
             Westerly
             ,
             and
             lye
             against
             the
             bankes
             of
             the
             Yoriman
             ,
             already
             mentioned
             .
             The
             Pogoanes
             ,
             and
             the
             Caraganes
             are
             on
             the
             
             Basurura
             .
             The
             Comanares
             possesse
             that
             point
             which
             the
             two
             Rivers
             for
             me
             at
             their
             meeting
             .
             The
             Tuynamanes
             ,
             and
             the
             Comarurianes
             are
             on
             the
             side
             of
             Rio-negro
             ;
             and
             the
             others
             lesse
             renown'd
             possesse
             the
             Lands
             that
             are
             furthest
             off
             from
             the
             Amazone
             .
             All
             these
             Peoples
             are
             valiant
             ,
             and
             use-skilfully
             the
             Bow
             and
             Arrow
             .
             They
             had
             from
             the
             year
             One
             thousand
             six
             hundred
             thirty
             eight
             ,
             Knives
             ,
             and
             Axes
             ,
             and
             other
             Instruments
             of
             Iron
             ,
             after
             the
             fashion
             of
             Europe
             ;
             which
             they
             gave
             out
             to
             have
             bought
             from
             Indians
             their
             Neighbours
             ,
             that
             were
             nearer
             than
             they
             to
             the
             Sea
             ;
             and
             these
             again
             from
             certain
             persons
             ,
             that
             were
             white
             of
             countenance
             ,
             and
             cloathed
             like
             the
             Portuguais
             ,
             and
             armed
             with
             Sword
             and
             Musket
             ,
             that
             dwelt
             upon
             the
             Atlantique
             Sea
             :
             which
             have
             been
             without
             doubt
             ,
             either
             Hollanders
             ,
             or
             English
             ,
             who
             have
             both
             sailed
             into
             the
             Orenoc
             ,
             and
             dwelt
             for
             some
             time
             in
             the
             Coasts
             of
             Guyana
             ;
             but
             were
             at
             length
             hostilely
             chased
             from
             thence
             ,
             by
             the
             Savages
             ;
             as
             also
             all
             the
             French
             were
             an
             .
             One
             thousand
             six
             hundred
             fifty
             four
             ,
             from
             the
             I
             le
             of
             Cayene
             in
             the
             main
             Land
             ,
             and
             on
             the
             same
             side
             of
             the
             Sea
             of
             the
             North
             ;
             which
             is
             not
             above
             two
             hundred
             
             leagues
             at
             the
             most
             from
             Rio-negro
             ,
             but
             reckoning
             in
             a
             streight
             line
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             shortest
             distance
             .
             But
             because
             nature
             hath
             not
             offered
             in
             all
             the
             Realm
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             a
             more
             favourable
             situation
             ,
             than
             on
             the
             point
             of
             the
             Comanares
             ,
             for
             setling
             of
             a
             Colony
             of
             the
             most
             considerable
             ones
             of
             any
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             and
             which
             cannot
             fail
             one
             day
             to
             be
             the
             Seat
             of
             an
             Empire
             most
             flourishing
             ,
             and
             of
             great
             richesse
             in
             Trade
             ;
             we
             shall
             therewith
             finish
             this
             Chapter
             ,
             in
             telling
             you
             ,
             That
             the
             Land
             of
             it
             is
             right
             upon
             the
             bankes
             of
             these
             two
             great
             Rivers
             ;
             that
             it
             is
             also
             mounted
             above
             the
             height
             of
             ordinary
             inundations
             ;
             that
             the
             surface
             of
             it
             is
             plain
             ,
             sweet
             ,
             and
             not
             shrubby
             :
             that
             the
             Neighbouring
             Fields
             abound
             in
             graines
             for
             necessary
             Provisions
             ,
             and
             in
             good
             pasturage
             for
             nourishing
             of
             Cattle
             :
             that
             Quarries
             of
             an
             excellent
             Stone
             for
             Building
             ,
             and
             easie
             to
             be
             cut
             and
             hewn
             ,
             are
             as
             near
             it
             as
             Woods
             ,
             and
             Trees
             of
             a
             marvellous
             greatnesse
             and
             height
             ,
             for
             the
             conveniency
             of
             Buildings
             and
             Houses
             :
             that
             the
             distance
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             from
             the
             Rio-negro
             ,
             is
             not
             so
             great
             ,
             but
             the
             fortifications
             may
             conveniently
             and
             regularly
             be
             drawn
             along
             on
             the
             Land-side
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Foussies
             of
             these
             fortifications
             ,
             
             and
             this
             wall
             being
             well
             ordered
             ,
             may
             easily
             be
             made
             deep
             enough
             ,
             and
             themselves
             fill'd
             by
             the
             debordments
             of
             the
             one
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             other
             River
             ,
             at
             pleasure
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXVII
             .
             Of
             Rio-negro
             ,
             
               and
               of
               the
               Province
               of
            
             Camsuara
             .
          
           
             FOllowing
             the
             North-side
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             
               Amazones
               ,
               Rio-negro
            
             incontinent
             presents
             its
             self
             next
             after
             the
             Province
             of
             Caribane
             .
             His
             bredth
             and
             depth
             give
             him
             the
             prerogative
             to
             be
             thought
             the
             fairest
             and
             mightiest
             River
             of
             all
             that
             enter
             into
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ;
             whose
             mouth
             being
             wide
             a
             great
             league
             and
             an
             half
             ,
             hath
             four
             degrees
             of
             South
             latitude
             ,
             and
             three
             hundred
             twenty
             two
             degrees
             ,
             and
             twenty
             minutes
             of
             longitude
             ,
             and
             seven
             hundred
             eighty
             eight
             leagues
             of
             distance
             from
             the
             Sources
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
             The
             Amazones
             course
             is
             here
             towards
             the
             North-east
             ;
             and
             that
             of
             Rio-negro
             right
             East
             ,
             where
             he
             enters
             into
             the
             other
             with
             such
             grandure
             and
             majesty
             ,
             that
             he
             keeps
             
             his
             waters
             distinct
             and
             separate
             from
             the
             others
             ,
             and
             keeps
             half
             of
             the
             whole
             channell
             to
             himself
             for
             the
             space
             of
             twelve
             leagues
             ,
             before
             the
             great
             River
             (
             though
             here
             all
             united
             into
             one
             great
             bed
             ,
             to
             receive
             him
             )
             can
             overcome
             the
             distinctnesse
             of
             his
             waters
             ,
             with
             all
             the
             force
             that
             he
             hath
             .
             The
             Spaniards
             first
             ,
             and
             after
             them
             the
             Portugall's
             ,
             call'd
             it
             Rio-negro
             ,
             because
             at
             his
             mouth
             ,
             as
             often
             also
             in
             his
             channell
             ,
             his
             waters
             appear
             very
             black
             ,
             because
             indeed
             they
             are
             very
             clear
             ,
             and
             without
             any
             colour
             ,
             but
             very
             deep
             .
             The
             Natives
             also
             name
             it
             for
             the
             same
             reason
             Coriguacure
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             the
             
               Black
               River
            
             .
             But
             as
             Rio-negro
             is
             the
             great
             Caketa
             of
             the
             sixteenth
             Chaper
             of
             our
             Book
             ;
             we
             shall
             say
             no
             more
             of
             it
             here
             ,
             nor
             stay
             again
             upon
             the
             obscurities
             of
             Father
             
               D'
               Acogna
            
             ,
             which
             we
             have
             there
             briefly
             unfolded
             ;
             but
             passe
             on
             to
             the
             recitall
             of
             the
             Nations
             that
             inhabite
             its
             bankes
             ,
             and
             tell
             you
             ,
             That
             the
             Province
             of
             Camsuare
             is
             the
             first
             that
             presents
             its
             self
             ,
             having
             on
             its
             South
             Rio-negro
             ,
             on
             its
             East
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ;
             and
             on
             its
             North
             ,
             the
             great
             Province
             of
             Guyane
             .
             All
             the
             Plaines
             of
             these
             Countries
             are
             mounted
             like
             those
             of
             Caribana
             ,
             and
             not
             subject
             to
             the
             ordinary
             overflowings
             ,
             
             covered
             with
             infinite
             Peoples
             ,
             and
             aboundant
             in
             all
             things
             ,
             especially
             of
             Trees
             of
             a
             prodigious
             height
             and
             thicknesse
             .
             But
             amongst
             the
             rich
             Nations
             of
             this
             fertile
             Province
             of
             Camsuare
             ,
             those
             of
             the
             Aguares
             ,
             of
             the
             Agaypes
             ,
             of
             the
             Jamnes
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Carupatabes
             ,
             are
             not
             the
             least
             considerable
             ,
             without
             relating
             the
             Guaranacasanes
             ,
             which
             make
             a
             Province
             on
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             River
             of
             Orenoc
             ,
             as
             he
             comes
             out
             of
             the
             great
             Caketa
             .
             See
             the
             sixteenth
             Chapter
             to
             make
             the
             knowledge
             of
             these
             things
             lesse
             confused
             and
             imperfect
             ,
             than
             they
             are
             in
             Historians
             and
             Geographers
             ,
             who
             treat
             of
             them
             either
             too
             diffusedly
             in
             great
             Books
             ,
             or
             too
             lightly
             in
             little
             Tractates
             ,
             seeing
             also
             it
             becomes
             daily
             more
             certain
             by
             new
             and
             reiterated
             experiences
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXVIII
             .
             
               Of
               the
               Province
               of
            
             Cayane
             ,
             
               and
               of
               the
               Nations
               Neighbouring
            
             .
          
           
             BUt
             going
             now
             to
             the
             South-side
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             again
             ,
             we
             shall
             find
             to
             the
             East
             ,
             and
             following
             that
             
             of
             Surina
             ,
             the
             Province
             of
             Cayane
             ,
             through
             which
             the
             great
             and
             long
             River
             of
             the
             Madera
             passeth
             ,
             and
             renders
             it self
             into
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
             And
             because
             this
             River
             of
             the
             Madera
             (
             which
             was
             so
             called
             by
             the
             Spaniards
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             great
             number
             of
             Trees
             ,
             which
             it
             drew
             alongst
             with
             it
             into
             its
             mouth
             )
             is
             one
             of
             the
             principall
             Rivers
             of
             America
             ,
             you
             shall
             find
             the
             distances
             and
             measures
             ,
             and
             other
             circumstances
             that
             concern
             it
             ,
             in
             the
             tenth
             and
             eighteenth
             Chapters
             of
             this
             Book
             .
             Now
             ,
             the
             Nations
             ,
             that
             Province
             great
             enough
             ,
             contains
             within
             its
             extent
             ,
             whether
             lying
             alongst
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             or
             in
             going
             up
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Madera
             ,
             which
             the
             Natives
             call
             also
             Cayane
             ;
             are
             no
             lesse
             happy
             for
             the
             fertility
             of
             their
             fair
             Fields
             ,
             and
             pleasant
             Rivulets
             ,
             than
             other
             Peoples
             of
             all
             these
             fertile
             Countries
             are
             .
             They
             are
             of
             no
             lesse
             courage
             for
             Warre
             ,
             not
             lesse
             expert
             in
             Fights
             and
             handling
             of
             Armes
             ;
             they
             have
             also
             the
             like
             industry
             in
             their
             handy-works
             ,
             that
             serve
             to
             make
             their
             happinesse
             of
             life
             the
             more
             accomplished
             ,
             by
             the
             exchange
             of
             them
             with
             such
             commodities
             as
             they
             stand
             in
             need
             of
             ,
             and
             they
             keep
             likewise
             in
             their
             conduct
             and
             Government
             of
             affairs
             ,
             Laws
             
             and
             Customes
             like
             unto
             those
             ,
             that
             all
             other
             Provinces
             of
             the
             Realm
             of
             the
             Amazone
             do
             .
             But
             of
             all
             these
             infinite
             Peoples
             ,
             that
             cover
             so
             many
             considerable
             Plaines
             and
             Fields
             ,
             the
             Cayanes
             ,
             and
             the
             Anamares
             are
             the
             most
             renown'd
             ;
             and
             next
             to
             these
             ,
             the
             Curares
             ,
             and
             the
             Goarinumes
             ;
             and
             after
             them
             ,
             the
             Abacares
             ,
             and
             the
             Oragunagues
             ;
             and
             lastly
             the
             Sabucares
             ,
             and
             the
             Urubingues
             in
             going
             down
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             which
             yet
             are
             the
             most
             esteem'd
             for
             their
             curious
             finenesse
             of
             working
             and
             making
             house
             Utensiles
             .
             But
             the
             remotest
             of
             all
             in
             going
             down
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             and
             amongst
             these
             the
             best
             known
             are
             the
             Maraques
             ,
             and
             the
             Oregates
             ,
             and
             towards
             the
             South
             ,
             the
             Guaranaques
             ,
             and
             others
             without
             number
             ,
             which
             undoubtedly
             border
             upon
             the
             great
             Lake
             of
             Xaraya
             ,
             out
             of
             which
             all
             Geographers
             ,
             that
             give
             us
             the
             Cartes
             of
             America
             ,
             make
             a
             considerable
             River
             to
             come
             forth
             ,
             which
             they
             bring
             to
             that
             of
             the
             great
             Amazones
             ,
             whereof
             they
             ought
             to
             abstain
             to
             speak
             too
             hardily
             ,
             untill
             by
             certain
             experience
             the
             truth
             of
             their
             first
             thoughts
             be
             better
             assured
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XXIX
             .
             
               Of
               the
               I
               le
               of
               the
            
             Topinambes
             .
          
           
             SEeing
             the
             I
             le
             of
             Topinambes
             is
             in
             this
             place
             of
             the
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ;
             and
             that
             it
             is
             the
             greatest
             of
             all
             its
             Iles
             ,
             the
             most
             renowned
             Province
             of
             any
             that
             it
             waters
             ;
             we
             shall
             say
             first
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             of
             more
             than
             sixty
             leagues
             of
             length
             ;
             and
             that
             it
             is
             so
             situated
             in
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             that
             it
             comes
             nearer
             to
             his
             South-side
             ,
             than
             to
             his
             North
             ,
             and
             that
             all
             the
             distances
             and
             measures
             ,
             that
             concern
             it
             ,
             are
             in
             the
             tenth
             Chapter
             of
             this
             Book
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             we
             shall
             say
             that
             it
             is
             admirable
             in
             fertility
             of
             its
             Grounds
             ,
             in
             the
             beauty
             of
             its
             bankes
             ,
             in
             the
             multitude
             of
             its
             Habitations
             ,
             whereof
             the
             most
             mighty
             is
             in
             the
             Eastmost
             point
             of
             it
             ,
             and
             hath
             three
             degrees
             of
             South
             latitude
             .
             Finally
             ,
             we
             shall
             say
             ,
             that
             once
             it
             was
             inhabited
             by
             its
             Natives
             ,
             and
             originall
             Indians
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             Topinambes
             coming
             upon
             them
             ,
             chased
             them
             from
             it
             after
             sundry
             Battells
             ,
             and
             possest
             themselves
             of
             it
             with
             so
             much
             glory
             and
             reputation
             for
             themselves
             ,
             that
             the
             terrour
             of
             their
             names
             
             did
             reach
             to
             the
             neighbouring
             Nations
             .
             Now
             these
             Topinambes
             before
             had
             inhabited
             the
             South
             coasts
             of
             Brasile
             ,
             where
             not
             being
             able
             to
             endure
             the
             hard
             entreaty
             of
             the
             Portugalls
             towards
             them
             ,
             after
             that
             they
             had
             come
             upon
             them
             ;
             they
             renounced
             their
             dear
             Countrey
             ,
             and
             voluntarily
             abandoned
             with
             great
             resolution
             more
             than
             eighty
             of
             their
             great
             Bourgades
             .
             So
             they
             marched
             in
             infinite
             multitudes
             of
             men
             ,
             women
             ,
             and
             children
             ,
             streight
             towards
             the
             West
             ,
             and
             under
             the
             same
             parallell
             .
             They
             crossed
             by
             swimming
             the
             great
             Rivers
             of
             Parane
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Plata
             ,
             and
             leaving
             on
             their
             left
             hand
             the
             Province
             of
             Tucuman
             ,
             they
             in
             end
             took
             up
             their
             lodgings
             on
             the
             beginnings
             of
             the
             great
             River
             Madera
             .
             But
             it
             befalling
             one
             of
             these
             Topinambes
             some
             while
             after
             to
             kill
             a
             Cow
             of
             a
             Spaniard
             on
             the
             frontier
             of
             Peru
             ,
             for
             which
             he
             was
             rudely
             chastised
             ;
             the
             same
             fear
             that
             carried
             them
             too
             lightly
             to
             leave
             their
             ancient
             abode
             ,
             made
             them
             all
             to
             dislodge
             presently
             from
             this
             new
             one
             .
             And
             to
             the
             end
             to
             put
             themselves
             farre
             enough
             from
             all
             the
             Provinces
             of
             any
             neighbourhood
             with
             Peru
             possest
             by
             the
             Spaniards
             ;
             and
             and
             to
             make
             their
             Voyage
             or
             removall
             
             with
             lesse
             inconvenience
             ,
             and
             the
             more
             diligence
             and
             circumspection
             ,
             they
             embarqued
             themselves
             in
             Canoes
             ,
             which
             they
             had
             ready
             in
             great
             number
             ,
             and
             so
             suffered
             themselves
             to
             go
             at
             adventure
             down
             the
             stream
             of
             Madera
             ;
             and
             after
             sundry
             Moneths
             navigation
             ,
             found
             themselves
             arrived
             in
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             and
             so
             lastly
             on
             the
             bankes
             of
             this
             I
             le
             of
             Topinambe
             ,
             which
             they
             possest
             by
             Armes
             ,
             as
             hath
             been
             said
             .
             Now
             this
             Warlike
             and
             valiant
             Nation
             entertain'd
             very
             courteously
             the
             Portugalls
             at
             their
             passing
             them
             ,
             and
             received
             very
             pleasantly
             their
             proposalls
             that
             they
             made
             ,
             of
             a
             mutuall
             Covenant
             and
             Alliance
             .
             Which
             alone
             might
             suffice
             for
             the
             conquest
             of
             the
             whole
             Realm
             of
             the
             Amazone
             ,
             seeing
             all
             ply
             to
             the
             only
             name
             of
             the
             Topinambes
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XXX
             .
             
               Of
               the
            
             Bosphore
             
               of
               the
            
             Amazone
             ,
             
               and
               of
               the
               Neighbouring
               Nations
               to
               it
               .
            
          
           
             FOllowing
             the
             course
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             you
             shall
             find
             about
             fifty
             four
             leagues
             from
             the
             Topinambes
             ,
             the
             Bosphore
             of
             the
             Amazone
             ,
             whereby
             a
             marvellous
             effect
             of
             the
             naturall
             disposition
             of
             the
             ground
             of
             these
             Countries
             ,
             all
             the
             waters
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             and
             of
             all
             the
             others
             ,
             that
             we
             have
             described
             ,
             reduce
             themselves
             by
             a
             sweet
             violence
             to
             the
             necessity
             of
             passing
             in
             one
             only
             channell
             so
             strait
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             no
             more
             than
             one
             good
             quarter
             of
             a
             league
             .
             But
             of
             this
             famous
             Bosphore
             ,
             and
             all
             that
             concerns
             it
             ,
             see
             the
             tenth
             and
             thirteenth
             Chapters
             of
             this
             Book
             ;
             that
             we
             may
             passe
             without
             hinderance
             ,
             to
             the
             Province
             of
             Mataya
             ,
             which
             lies
             on
             the
             South-side
             of
             the
             great
             River
             ,
             from
             the
             Province
             of
             Cayane
             before-mentioned
             ,
             unto
             the
             Bosphore
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
             The
             Inhabitants
             whereof
             being
             often
             beaten
             by
             the
             Topinambes
             ,
             have
             at
             last
             submitted
             to
             their
             yoake
             ,
             and
             are
             now
             their
             Tributaries
             ;
             
             being
             bound
             yearly
             to
             furnish
             them
             with
             Stone-axes
             ,
             to
             fell
             their
             Woods
             ,
             and
             great
             Trees
             ;
             and
             with
             other
             usefull
             Instruments
             of
             the
             same
             matter
             for
             labouring
             and
             manuring
             of
             the
             Ground
             ;
             wherein
             the
             Topinambes
             are
             marvellous
             expert
             and
             diligent
             ,
             as
             appears
             in
             all
             their
             plaines
             and
             champain
             Grounds
             .
             But
             on
             the
             other
             North-banke
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             the
             Province
             of
             Apanta
             presents
             it self
             ,
             happy
             enough
             in
             all
             things
             .
             It
             hath
             for
             its
             confines
             on
             the
             West
             the
             Province
             of
             Camsuare
             ;
             on
             the
             East
             it
             passeth
             the
             Bosphore
             ;
             and
             on
             the
             North
             its
             frontiers
             on
             the
             famous
             Region
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ;
             which
             I
             pass
             over
             as
             well
             as
             other
             doubtfull
             reports
             ,
             which
             the
             Spaniards
             and
             Portugalls
             have
             heard
             of
             it
             ,
             as
             they
             passed
             along
             the
             great
             River
             .
             The
             Inhabitants
             of
             this
             Province
             ,
             next
             Neighbours
             to
             the
             Topinambes
             ,
             trade
             in
             Salt
             with
             them
             ,
             and
             other
             Nations
             ,
             that
             are
             farther
             from
             them
             ;
             and
             Salt
             is
             not
             found
             but
             in
             this
             place
             ,
             all
             alongst
             the
             whole
             course
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
             As
             to
             the
             Apantes
             ,
             and
             Conures
             ,
             they
             labour
             their
             fair
             Fields
             ,
             that
             are
             watered
             by
             the
             Coruris
             ,
             which
             enters
             presently
             into
             the
             great
             River
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             tenth
             Chapter
             of
             this
             Book
             ;
             as
             also
             the
             
             Orixamine
             ,
             a
             River
             no
             lesse
             considerable
             ,
             of
             the
             same
             North-side
             and
             near
             to
             the
             Bosphore
             .
             They
             have
             this
             singular
             amongst
             all
             the
             Peoples
             of
             that
             Countrey
             ,
             that
             their
             language
             is
             the
             common
             language
             of
             all
             Brasile
             ,
             though
             they
             be
             distant
             from
             it
             three
             hundred
             leagues
             .
             But
             it
             may
             be
             that
             the
             Topinambes
             ,
             in
             keeping
             their
             own
             ,
             (
             which
             was
             this
             )
             have
             also
             communicated
             it
             to
             this
             neighbourhood
             .
             Finally
             ,
             the
             best
             counsell
             that
             one
             can
             give
             on
             this
             behalf
             to
             a
             Prince
             ,
             or
             Republique
             in
             the
             progresse
             of
             this
             conquest
             ,
             is
             to
             keep
             the
             Bosphore
             in
             his
             possession
             ,
             and
             the
             Topinambes
             in
             amity
             and
             confederacy
             with
             him
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXXI
             .
             
               Of
               the
               Province
               and
               River
               of
            
             Tapayse
             .
          
           
             PResently
             after
             that
             the
             Amazone
             is
             come
             forth
             of
             the
             famous
             Bosphore
             ,
             he
             betakes
             himself
             to
             his
             accustomed
             broadnesse
             again
             ,
             and
             begins
             to
             mingle
             the
             boilings
             of
             his
             waters
             ,
             with
             the
             floods
             of
             the
             high-sea
             .
             The
             first
             Province
             that
             he
             visits
             on
             his
             South-side
             ,
             takes
             its
             name
             from
             the
             
             great
             and
             broad
             River
             of
             the
             Tapayfe●
             ,
             and
             is
             no
             lesse
             considerable
             for
             the
             abundance
             of
             his
             Fruites
             and
             Crops
             ,
             than
             for
             the
             couragious
             Nation
             ,
             that
             inhabits
             it
             :
             the
             which
             is
             so
             much
             the
             more
             redoubted
             to
             its
             Neighbours
             ,
             as
             that
             it
             addes
             to
             its
             valour
             an
             art
             of
             empoysoning
             their
             Arrows
             .
             But
             the
             Source
             of
             this
             fair
             and
             fertile
             River
             is
             unknown
             to
             us
             as
             yet
             ;
             and
             yet
             its
             greatnesse
             makes
             it
             appear
             ,
             and
             perswades
             us
             ,
             that
             is
             it
             very
             remote
             on
             the
             South-side
             ,
             between
             the
             coast
             of
             Brasile
             ,
             and
             the
             great
             Lake
             of
             Xaraya
             .
             About
             the
             year
             One
             thousand
             six
             hundred
             thirty
             ,
             the
             English
             went
             up
             his
             broad
             channell
             with
             one
             Ship
             ,
             and
             coming
             down
             his
             bankes
             again
             ,
             stayed
             there
             some
             time
             to
             sow
             ,
             and
             gather
             Tobacco
             ;
             but
             being
             chased
             from
             thence
             with
             some
             losse
             by
             the
             Indians
             ,
             they
             went
             away
             without
             returning
             .
             Amongst
             the
             Habitations
             of
             this
             Province
             ,
             the
             Portugalls
             found
             one
             in
             it
             ,
             at
             their
             return
             down
             the
             great
             River
             ,
             of
             more
             than
             one
             thousand
             five
             hundred
             Families
             ;
             wherein
             they
             were
             so
             favourably
             received
             by
             this
             Nation
             ,
             however
             otherwise
             both
             hardy
             and
             barbarous
             ,
             as
             hath
             already
             been
             said
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             day
             long
             they
             ceased
             not
             to
             go
             and
             sell
             them
             
             Meale
             ,
             Poullets
             ,
             Fish
             ,
             Fruites
             ,
             and
             other
             necessaries
             :
             and
             all
             with
             such
             confidence
             ,
             that
             the
             very
             women
             and
             children
             never
             scar'd
             at
             their
             Navy
             .
             And
             yet
             not
             content
             with
             these
             good
             Offices
             (
             as
             it
             is
             the
             nature
             of
             valiant
             people
             ,
             to
             be
             alivaies
             generous
             too
             )
             they
             offered
             moreover
             to
             all
             the
             Portugalls
             there
             ,
             if
             they
             would
             but
             leave
             their
             own
             Countrey
             ,
             and
             come
             and
             live
             with
             them
             ,
             to
             serve
             them
             in
             peace
             ,
             and
             with
             a
             good
             will
             ,
             and
             nourish
             them
             all
             their
             life
             time
             .
             As
             to
             the
             measures
             and
             distances
             of
             the
             deep
             and
             broad
             mouth
             of
             the
             River
             of
             Tapayse
             ,
             you
             may
             find
             them
             in
             the
             tenth
             Chapter
             of
             this
             Book
             :
             and
             its
             length
             cannot
             well
             be
             thought
             lesse
             ,
             than
             from
             three
             towards
             four
             hundred
             leagues
             ;
             whence
             will
             follow
             ,
             that
             he
             must
             receive
             many
             others
             into
             his
             bed
             ,
             to
             become
             so
             great
             and
             broad
             as
             he
             is
             :
             and
             that
             the
             Provinces
             and
             Nations
             neighbouring
             upon
             him
             ,
             must
             be
             very
             many
             ,
             abundant
             ,
             and
             fertile
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XXXII
             .
             
               Of
               the
               rich
               and
               great
               Province
               of
            
             Coropa
             .
          
           
             BUt
             following
             of
             the
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             and
             on
             the
             North-side
             ,
             you
             finde
             after
             the
             Province
             of
             Apanta
             ,
             that
             of
             Coropa
             ,
             which
             extends
             its
             limits
             to
             the
             River
             of
             Genipapa
             ,
             the
             mouth
             of
             which
             is
             an
             hundred
             fourty
             leagues
             from
             the
             Bosphore
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             tenth
             Chapter
             of
             this
             Book
             ,
             which
             sets
             down
             all
             the
             rest
             of
             its
             measure
             also
             .
             This
             Province
             hath
             the
             name
             from
             the
             River
             of
             Coropatube
             ;
             because
             the
             name
             of
             Tube
             in
             America
             language
             ,
             signifies
             nothing
             else
             but
             
               a
               River
            
             .
             The
             Province
             is
             almost
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             Rivers
             length
             ;
             and
             a
             Village
             of
             the
             same
             name
             is
             upon
             its
             entry
             into
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ;
             which
             is
             in
             peace
             ,
             and
             under
             the
             obeisance
             of
             the
             Portugalls
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Brasile
             .
             But
             this
             River
             is
             not
             so
             abundant
             in
             its
             waters
             ,
             as
             in
             its
             richesse
             ,
             if
             the
             Natives
             abuse
             not
             themselves
             in
             assuring
             us
             of
             four
             marvellous
             Mountaines
             ,
             that
             make
             it
             considerable
             ,
             by
             the
             nearnesse
             of
             the
             precious
             Mines
             ,
             that
             they
             contain
             in
             themselves
             .
             
             The
             first
             is
             Yaguare
             ,
             that
             containeth
             Gold
             ;
             the
             second
             ,
             Picore
             ,
             that
             offereth
             Silver
             ,
             the
             third
             presents
             Sulphure
             ;
             the
             fourth
             is
             Paragache
             ,
             which
             so
             shines
             by
             Sunne
             and
             Moon-light
             ,
             that
             it
             seemes
             to
             be
             wrought
             as
             with
             enammell
             ,
             with
             sundry
             sorts
             of
             precious
             Stones
             .
             All
             these
             rich
             Mountains
             are
             under
             the
             line
             ,
             and
             about
             an
             hundred
             leagues
             only
             from
             Cayene
             ,
             where
             the
             French
             have
             had
             Colonies
             .
             But
             the
             commerce
             of
             them
             will
             be
             more
             opened
             ,
             and
             more
             commodious
             ,
             by
             the
             navigation
             of
             the
             River
             of
             Coropa
             ,
             because
             about
             six
             daies
             journeys
             from
             the
             same
             Village
             ,
             that
             carryes
             its
             name
             ,
             Coropa
             receives
             another
             little
             River
             coming
             from
             the
             Mount
             Yaguare
             ,
             that
             brings
             with
             it
             abundance
             of
             Gold
             ,
             in
             forme
             of
             graines
             and
             billetts
             .
             And
             as
             for
             assurances
             of
             the
             Mine
             of
             Silver
             of
             the
             Mountain
             of
             Picora
             ,
             they
             may
             be
             found
             from
             the
             consequence
             of
             the
             relations
             of
             the
             same
             Savages
             ;
             who
             give
             out
             with
             one
             voice
             ,
             That
             they
             have
             often
             drawn
             out
             white
             Mettall
             of
             that
             Mountain
             ,
             whereof
             they
             once
             made
             Axes
             ,
             and
             Knives
             ;
             but
             that
             because
             of
             its
             softnesse
             ,
             they
             left
             it
             off
             ,
             as
             unprofitable
             ,
             and
             of
             no
             use
             .
             But
             in
             the
             same
             Province
             of
             Coropa
             ,
             on
             the
             North-bank
             
             of
             the
             great
             River
             ,
             and
             six
             leagues
             before
             you
             come
             to
             that
             of
             Genipape
             ,
             is
             the
             Fort
             of
             the
             Destierro
             ,
             where
             thirty
             Portugalls
             are
             ordinarily
             in
             Garrison
             ,
             under
             a
             Captain
             ,
             that
             commands
             and
             governs
             all
             those
             Neighbouring
             Countries
             ,
             without
             any
             s
             ;
             et
             bounds
             to
             their
             extent
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXXIII
             .
             
               Of
               the
               great
               Mouth
               of
               the
               great
               River
               of
               the
            
             Amazones
             .
          
           
             The
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             the
             relations
             whereof
             cannot
             equall
             the
             marvells
             of
             its
             magnificence
             ,
             is
             no
             lesse
             admirable
             in
             the
             greatnesse
             of
             his
             Mouth
             ,
             than
             in
             all
             other
             things
             ,
             that
             lift
             it
             up
             to
             so
             much
             glory
             .
             He
             begins
             to
             open
             himself
             below
             the
             River
             of
             Genipape
             ,
             and
             becoming
             alwaies
             broader
             ,
             he
             incompasseth
             Ilands
             without
             number
             ,
             infinite
             Nations
             ,
             and
             Peoples
             that
             speak
             sundry
             languages
             ;
             though
             the
             common
             language
             of
             Brasile
             extend
             it self
             also
             to
             all
             these
             .
             But
             the
             most
             remarkeable
             amongst
             others
             are
             the
             Tapuya
             ,
             the
             Aanxaiase
             ,
             the
             Mayanase
             ,
             the
             Angaybe
             ,
             and
             that
             
             of
             the
             valiant
             Pacaches
             ,
             which
             inhabite
             also
             the
             bankes
             of
             River
             of
             the
             same
             name
             ,
             which
             comes
             from
             the
             South-side
             into
             that
             of
             the
             Amazones
             .
             All
             these
             Iles
             ,
             are
             wonderfull
             in
             the
             festility
             of
             their
             Fields
             ,
             in
             the
             fruitfull
             plenty
             of
             their
             Fishes
             ;
             in
             the
             beauty
             of
             their
             bankes
             ,
             which
             are
             crowned
             with
             a
             continuall
             greenesse
             .
             But
             the
             River
             of
             Pacach
             ,
             considerable
             enough
             for
             its
             broadnesse
             ,
             but
             yet
             of
             an
             originall
             or
             Source
             unknown
             ,
             to
             us
             ,
             bounds
             to
             the
             East
             the
             Province
             of
             Paranayba
             ,
             which
             comes
             after
             that
             of
             Tapayse
             hereafter
             mentioned
             .
             The
             great
             and
             fair
             River
             of
             Paranayba
             gives
             it
             its
             name
             ;
             whose
             Sources
             are
             farre
             removed
             towards
             the
             South
             ,
             and
             the
             Nations
             that
             it
             waters
             in
             passing
             so
             many
             Fields
             ,
             are
             not
             as
             yet
             well
             known
             .
             His
             Mouth
             is
             two
             leagues
             wide
             ,
             and
             the
             Habitations
             of
             this
             Neighbourhood
             obey
             the
             Portugalls
             ,
             who
             govern
             them
             .
             And
             as
             to
             the
             distance
             and
             measures
             of
             all
             those
             remarkeable
             places
             ,
             you
             shall
             finde
             them
             in
             the
             tenth
             Chapter
             of
             this
             Book
             ;
             as
             also
             the
             greatest
             bredth
             of
             this
             wondrous
             Mouth
             of
             the
             Amazone
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             eighty
             four
             leagues
             lying
             from
             the
             Cape
             of
             the
             North
             ,
             to
             the
             Province
             of
             Zaparara
             ;
             
             which
             notwithstanding
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             in
             an
             oblique
             line
             ,
             is
             not
             the
             just
             measure
             of
             the
             true
             entry
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
             But
             to
             get
             a
             truer
             knowledge
             of
             it
             ,
             follow
             the
             streight
             line
             from
             the
             foresaid
             Cape
             of
             the
             North
             ,
             to
             the
             Town
             of
             Para
             on
             the
             coast
             of
             Brasile
             ,
             you
             will
             yet
             finde
             it
             so
             of
             more
             than
             sixty
             leagues
             of
             breadth
             ,
             not
             to
             stay
             on
             the
             mis-reckoning
             of
             the
             seventeenth
             Book
             of
             
               John
               Laet
            
             ,
             a
             late
             flenmish
             Authour
             ,
             who
             teacheth
             how
             to
             finde
             this
             distance
             ,
             from
             the
             East
             point
             of
             the
             Mouth
             of
             this
             great
             River
             ,
             to
             the
             West-side
             of
             the
             same
             ;
             drawing
             yet
             a
             more
             oblique
             line
             ,
             than
             that
             of
             the
             Cape
             of
             the
             North
             ,
             to
             the
             point
             of
             the
             Zaparara
             ,
             was
             .
             But
             seeing
             we
             cite
             here
             the
             tenth
             Chapter
             of
             this
             Book
             ,
             you
             must
             not
             fail
             to
             put
             there
             the
             distance
             of
             the
             Genipapa
             from
             Corupa
             ,
             of
             thirty
             leagues
             ,
             to
             mend
             the
             fault
             of
             the
             Printers
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             importance
             of
             all
             these
             measures
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XXXIV
             .
             
               Of
               the
               great
               Prevince
               of
            
             Guyana
             .
          
           
             SEeing
             the
             Province
             of
             Guyana
             ends
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazomes
             on
             his
             North-side
             ;
             and
             Geographers
             have
             gained
             no
             great
             knowledge
             of
             it
             as
             yet
             ;
             we
             shall
             speak
             of
             it
             in
             manner
             following
             .
             On
             the
             East
             it
             hath
             for
             its
             limit
             the
             great
             mouth
             of
             the
             Amazone
             ,
             from
             the
             River
             of
             Genipapa
             to
             Cap-north
             ;
             on
             the
             North
             ,
             it
             is
             washed
             with
             the
             great
             Atlantique-Sea
             ,
             for
             the
             space
             of
             three
             hundred
             Leagues
             ,
             from
             Cap-north
             ,
             to
             the
             I
             le
             of
             the
             Trinity
             :
             and
             on
             the
             West
             ,
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Orenu
             serves
             for
             its
             coufines
             :
             but
             on
             the
             South
             it
             is
             kept
             in
             by
             a
             ridge
             of
             Mountains
             parallel
             to
             the
             Sea-coast
             ,
             which
             separate
             it
             from
             the
             Provinces
             of
             Camsnare
             ,
             of
             Apanta
             ,
             and
             of
             Corepa
             ,
             already
             mentioned
             .
             Now
             ,
             these
             Mountains
             (
             though
             not
             yet
             known
             )
             are
             not
             imaginary
             ,
             but
             reall
             and
             effective
             according
             to
             the
             naturall
             disposition
             of
             all
             these
             Countries
             ,
             seeing
             the
             Rivers
             of
             Viapoco
             ,
             of
             Cayene
             ,
             of
             Maruyne
             ,
             of
             Sequebe
             ,
             and
             other
             considerable
             ones
             of
             Guyana
             ,
             which
             run
             all
             from
             the
             South
             to
             
             the
             North
             ,
             and
             enter
             into
             the
             Ocean-Sea
             ;
             and
             those
             other
             of
             Genipapa
             ,
             of
             Coropatube
             ,
             of
             Orixamine
             ,
             and
             of
             Coruris
             ,
             which
             run
             all
             from
             North
             to
             South
             by
             a
             contrary
             course
             to
             the
             others
             ,
             and
             enter
             into
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ;
             have
             necessarily
             their
             sources
             in
             those
             Mountains
             deep
             and
             fertile
             Valleys
             .
             But
             returning
             to
             that
             East
             part
             of
             Guyana
             ,
             which
             buts
             on
             the
             mouth
             of
             our
             famous
             River
             ;
             we
             will
             first
             tell
             you
             ,
             that
             it
             begins
             from
             that
             of
             Genipapa
             ,
             considerable
             enough
             both
             for
             the
             greatness
             of
             his
             bed
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             fine
             gold
             ,
             that
             he
             draws
             along
             with
             him
             in
             his
             waters
             :
             whence
             it
             follows
             by
             infallible
             conjecture
             ,
             that
             the
             mountains
             of
             his
             fource
             ,
             and
             the
             plains
             of
             his
             neighbourhood
             ,
             are
             no
             less
             rich
             ,
             happy
             ,
             and
             fertile
             ,
             than
             in
             all
             the
             rest
             of
             America
             .
             Now
             the
             coast
             or
             this
             Province
             from
             Genipapa
             to
             the
             Cap-nord
             (
             which
             forms
             the
             great
             mouth
             of
             the
             Amazon
             )
             is
             very
             uneven
             in
             its
             bank
             ,
             and
             very
             dangerous
             in
             its
             navigation
             ,
             because
             of
             heights
             and
             lowes
             ,
             that
             are
             here
             sometimes
             found
             .
             But
             these
             difficulties
             are
             not
             in
             coming
             down
             the
             great
             River
             ,
             untill
             after
             you
             have
             passed
             ,
             and
             necessarily
             taken
             notice
             of
             the
             place
             of
             Corupa
             ,
             one
             of
             the
             Governments
             of
             the
             Portugalls
             on
             these
             banks
             ,
             
             about
             twenty
             eight
             Leagues
             from
             the
             place
             ,
             where
             the
             great
             River
             begins
             to
             open
             his
             mouth
             .
             But
             because
             Cap-nord
             ends
             the
             North
             side
             of
             this
             great
             River
             ,
             we
             shall
             tell
             you
             again
             ,
             that
             it
             hath
             one
             degree
             and
             forty
             five
             minutes
             of
             North
             latitude
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             tenth
             Chapter
             of
             this
             book
             ;
             likewise
             that
             the
             grounds
             about
             are
             very
             low
             ,
             and
             covered
             with
             woods
             ;
             the
             Sea
             very
             rageing
             ,
             and
             not
             very
             deep
             ;
             the
             Sands
             moveable
             ,
             and
             often
             covered
             with
             Sea-ware
             ,
             or
             weeds
             .
             And
             as
             to
             the
             rest
             of
             this
             coast
             ,
             as
             you
             go
             from
             Cap-nord
             to
             Corupa
             ,
             see
             the
             Relations
             of
             the
             Hollanders
             ,
             reported
             by
             
               Johne
               Laet
            
             in
             his
             America
             ,
             where
             you
             may
             finde
             the
             knowledge
             of
             it
             little
             either
             necessary
             ,
             or
             delectable
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXXV
             .
             
               Of
               the
               Province
               of
            
             Maragnon
             ,
             
               and
               of
               the
               Town
               of
            
             Para.
             
          
           
             AS
             the
             Province
             of
             Guyana
             ends
             the
             North-bank
             and
             brink
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ;
             so
             the
             Kingdome
             of
             Brasile
             (
             under
             the
             Crown
             of
             Portugall
             )
             ends
             it
             on
             
             the
             South
             side
             ,
             by
             the
             Province
             of
             Maragnon
             ,
             the
             Northerliest
             of
             all
             its
             Countries
             .
             It
             took
             its
             name
             from
             a
             River
             and
             a
             Bay
             of
             the
             same
             name
             on
             the
             coast
             of
             the
             Atlantique-Sea
             ,
             where
             the
             Town
             of
             St.
             Lewis
             ,
             the
             residence
             of
             the
             Governour
             ,
             and
             of
             justice
             ,
             is
             in
             a
             very
             pleasant
             I
             le
             .
             But
             that
             side
             of
             this
             Government
             of
             Maragnon
             is
             far
             longer
             on
             the
             great
             mouth
             of
             the
             great
             River
             ,
             than
             on
             that
             side
             ,
             that
             accosts
             the
             great
             Ocean
             ;
             seeing
             at
             contains
             all
             the
             bank
             of
             the
             Amazone
             for
             the
             space
             of
             an
             hundred
             Leagues
             from
             the
             River
             of
             Pacashe
             ,
             to
             the
             point
             of
             Zaparara
             .
             Yet
             in
             all
             this
             length
             of
             Lands
             so
             fertile
             ,
             and
             abundant
             in
             all
             things
             ,
             there
             is
             but
             the
             one
             only
             Town
             of
             Para
             ,
             that
             is
             considerable
             .
             From
             the
             year
             1615
             ,
             the
             Portugalls
             established
             the
             Colonie
             there
             ,
             and
             built
             the
             fortress
             of
             it
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             square
             of
             Mason-work
             on
             the
             Land-side
             ;
             and
             of
             earth
             or
             turfe
             on
             the
             Sea-side
             .
             It
             is
             commanded
             by
             a
             Captain-major
             ,
             who
             answers
             to
             the
             Governour-Generall
             of
             the
             Province
             and
             under
             this
             Captain-major
             of
             the
             Town
             of
             Para
             ,
             are
             other
             three
             Captains
             of
             Infantry
             ,
             dispersed
             in
             diverse
             places
             of
             that
             Countrey
             .
             It
             is
             forty
             Leagues
             from
             the
             North-Sea
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             point
             of
             Zaparara
             ,
             
             and
             thirty
             Leagues
             from
             the
             great
             Village
             of
             Commuta
             ,
             once
             very
             flourishing
             ,
             but
             now
             ruinous
             ,
             on
             the
             mouth
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Tocantines
             ,
             a
             Nation
             very
             fertile
             ,
             and
             rich
             .
             It
             hath
             also
             one
             degree
             and
             thirty
             minutes
             of
             South
             latitude
             ,
             and
             is
             about
             sixty
             five
             Leagues
             from
             Cap-nord
             ,
             in
             a
             right
             Line
             ,
             and
             Geometricall
             measure
             ,
             making
             twenty
             Leagues
             for
             every
             degree
             of
             a
             great
             Circle
             ,
             as
             we
             have
             done
             in
             the
             rest
             of
             this
             work
             .
             And
             as
             to
             other
             distances
             on
             this
             South
             side
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             you
             shall
             find
             them
             at
             the
             end
             of
             the
             tenth
             Chapter
             of
             this
             Book
             ;
             as
             also
             those
             of
             the
             I
             le
             of
             the
             Sun
             ,
             which
             is
             by
             the
             waterbank
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Maragnon
             ,
             having
             more
             than
             ten
             Leagues
             in
             Circuit
             ,
             one
             very
             safe
             Haven
             ,
             fish
             abundance
             ,
             Crabs
             without
             number
             ,
             very
             good
             fresh
             or
             sweet
             waters
             ,
             of
             
               lesser
               prey
            
             or
             game
             as
             much
             as
             they
             will
             ,
             and
             a
             very
             pleasant
             air
             .
             Finally
             a
             place
             much
             more
             convenient
             than
             that
             of
             Para
             ,
             to
             set
             up
             a
             Colonie
             and
             Forts
             in
             ,
             whereby
             to
             command
             the
             best
             and
             safest
             entry
             of
             all
             those
             ,
             which
             lead
             from
             the
             Sea
             into
             the
             true
             Channell
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XXXVI
             .
             
               Of
               the
               Entrice
               into
               the
               River
               of
               the
            
             Amazones
             .
          
           
             Such
             as
             are
             exercised
             in
             the
             navigations
             of
             the
             great
             Ocean
             ,
             know
             nothing
             more
             dangerous
             ,
             nor
             more
             difficult
             ,
             than
             the
             entries
             of
             Ports
             ,
             of
             Bayes
             ,
             and
             of
             Rivers
             .
             But
             in
             this
             ,
             as
             in
             other
             points
             ,
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             is
             no
             less
             admirable
             ,
             than
             singular
             .
             For
             being
             framed
             as
             it
             were
             to
             receive
             in
             times
             coming
             the
             greatest
             and
             richest
             commerce
             of
             all
             the
             world
             ,
             how
             could
             it
             hinder
             ,
             that
             its
             great
             mouth
             should
             not
             be
             defamed
             by
             Robbers
             or
             Pirates
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             the
             Gulph
             of
             Mexico
             ?
             Now
             the
             same
             providence
             that
             hath
             heaped
             upon
             it
             more
             than
             upon
             all
             the
             Rivers
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             so
             many
             marvellous
             advantages
             and
             prerogatives
             ;
             would
             not
             in
             this
             either
             make
             it
             less
             perfect
             ;
             having
             by
             a
             certain
             and
             naturall
             disposall
             and
             ordering
             of
             its
             Iles
             ,
             sides
             ,
             and
             lowes
             ,
             or
             flats
             ,
             reduced
             its
             navigation
             into
             one
             only
             Channell
             ,
             and
             rendred
             the
             other
             passages
             as
             it
             were
             unprofitable
             ;
             and
             by
             his
             impetuous
             currants
             (
             which
             carry
             his
             
             waters
             thirty
             Leagues
             into
             the
             Sea
             )
             forbidden
             all
             strange
             Ships
             ,
             and
             hostile
             enemies
             to
             rest
             in
             these
             places
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             there
             surprize
             any
             Navy
             at
             their
             going
             in
             ,
             or
             coming
             out
             .
             But
             the
             difficulties
             hitherto
             have
             been
             great
             to
             find
             out
             the
             true
             tract
             ,
             that
             Vessels
             ought
             to
             hold
             in
             going
             into
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
             And
             after
             having
             considered
             the
             diverse
             observations
             reported
             by
             their
             Authors
             ,
             
               Spaniards
               ,
               English
            
             ,
             and
             Flemish
             ,
             some
             of
             them
             too
             short
             ,
             and
             others
             too
             confused
             and
             obscure
             ;
             and
             most
             or
             all
             of
             them
             ,
             uncertain
             ,
             we
             shall
             tell
             you
             in
             few
             words
             ,
             that
             first
             of
             all
             ,
             one
             must
             shun
             the
             currants
             in
             coming
             down
             ,
             going
             aside
             of
             them
             unto
             two
             degrees
             of
             South
             latitude
             ;
             then
             go
             up
             again
             ,
             by
             the
             coast
             of
             Brasile
             ,
             at
             half
             a
             degree
             latitude
             of
             the
             same
             side
             of
             the
             Line
             ,
             then
             double
             the
             point
             of
             Zaparara
             ,
             and
             make
             Sail
             ,
             or
             launch
             to
             the
             Southwest
             ,
             after
             that
             ,
             follow
             the
             coast
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Maragnon
             ,
             and
             pass
             the
             Channell
             of
             the
             I
             le
             of
             the
             Sun
             at
             one
             degree
             and
             a
             quarter
             of
             South-latitude
             ,
             and
             twenty
             six
             Leagnes
             from
             the
             full
             Sea
             :
             finally
             make
             Sail
             to
             the
             West
             ,
             leave
             the
             side
             of
             Para
             ,
             and
             keep
             the
             same
             latitude
             ,
             to
             gain
             the
             bankside
             of
             Corupa
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             Guyana
             :
             and
             for
             conclusion
             ,
             
             follow
             still
             the
             same
             side
             ,
             and
             enter
             at
             last
             into
             the
             true
             Channell
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             at
             two
             degrees
             of
             South-latitude
             ,
             and
             thirty
             Leagues
             beyond
             Corupa
             ,
             which
             is
             but
             one
             degree
             and
             a
             half
             of
             the
             same
             side
             of
             the
             Line
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXXVII
             .
             
               Of
               the
               first
               discovery
               of
               this
               River
               .
            
          
           
             FOrasmuch
             as
             historicall
             Relations
             are
             easilier
             understood
             ,
             if
             they
             follow
             Geographicall
             ones
             ,
             we
             have
             changed
             the
             order
             of
             Authors
             ,
             that
             went
             before
             us
             ,
             &
             begun
             at
             the
             latter
             .
             After
             that
             
               Gonsales
               Pizarro
            
             Governour
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Kito
             ,
             had
             first
             of
             all
             the
             Spaniards
             (
             pushed
             on
             by
             the
             same
             ambition
             to
             find
             gold
             and
             silver
             in
             the
             vast
             Countries
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             )
             passed
             the
             high
             and
             dangerous
             Mountains
             of
             the
             Cordeliere
             ,
             and
             discovered
             the
             Province
             of
             Kixo
             ,
             his
             Lieutenant
             Generall
             Francis
             of
             Areillana
             finding
             himself
             well
             far
             engaged
             (
             and
             that
             in
             Challops
             only
             )
             on
             so
             many
             unknown
             and
             great
             Rivers
             ;
             and
             not
             knowing
             any
             sure
             way
             of
             going
             up
             again
             ,
             and
             returning
             
             to
             his
             Generall
             ,
             who
             with
             them
             that
             were
             with
             him
             ,
             suffered
             an
             extream
             great
             want
             of
             Victuals
             ;
             he
             would
             stay
             at
             the
             famous
             place
             ,
             where
             the
             River
             of
             Napo
             loseth
             himself
             in
             that
             great
             one
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ;
             where
             causing
             his
             men
             to
             build
             another
             Bark
             ,
             greater
             ,
             and
             more
             convenient
             than
             his
             others
             ,
             for
             a
             long
             navigation
             ,
             he
             resolved
             by
             an
             ambitious
             desire
             to
             purchase
             glory
             ,
             to
             commit
             his
             life
             and
             fortune
             to
             the
             uncertain
             currants
             and
             waters
             of
             that
             great
             River
             .
             This
             admirable
             voyage
             and
             singular
             for
             so
             many
             circumstances
             ,
             was
             begun
             on
             the
             eighth
             of
             the
             Moneth
             of
             January
             in
             the
             year
             1541
             ,
             and
             continued
             with
             so
             much
             good
             luck
             and
             happiness
             ,
             that
             this
             great
             and
             marvellous
             River
             was
             wholly
             navigated
             ,
             and
             first
             discovered
             by
             this
             ventorious
             Knight
             ,
             from
             whom
             also
             the
             River
             had
             the
             name
             of
             Areillane
             .
             In
             passing
             over
             the
             Provinces
             of
             the
             Cassique
             or
             Lord
             Aparia
             ,
             this
             Prince
             received
             him
             very
             courteously
             ,
             and
             advertised
             him
             to
             take
             heed
             in
             his
             way
             of
             travell
             ,
             of
             certain
             Amazones
             and
             warlike
             women
             ,
             the
             renown
             of
             whom
             ,
             though
             they
             were
             very
             far
             from
             him
             ,
             yet
             ceased
             not
             to
             give
             him
             knowledge
             of
             them
             .
             Finally
             in
             his
             course
             he
             had
             diverse
             successes
             ,
             sometimes
             good
             ,
             sometimes
             
             bad
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             fear
             or
             fearless
             confidence
             of
             the
             Nations
             ,
             that
             saw
             him
             with
             astonishment
             pass
             along
             upon
             the
             great
             River
             .
             And
             after
             having
             known
             not
             without
             admiration
             ,
             the
             Rio-negro
             ,
             he
             saw
             in
             the
             Moneth
             of
             
               June
               ,
               Indians
            
             in
             great
             number
             upon
             the
             banks
             thereof
             ;
             and
             at
             the
             head
             of
             them
             armed
             women
             ,
             which
             seemed
             to
             command
             and
             lead
             them
             to
             warre
             :
             whereupon
             the
             Spaniards
             of
             Francis
             of
             Areillana
             ,
             and
             himself
             ,
             were
             so
             perswaded
             of
             the
             truth
             of
             these
             Amazones
             ,
             that
             they
             published
             the
             report
             of
             it
             with
             such
             confidence
             ,
             that
             from
             thence
             the
             name
             did
             remain
             to
             this
             great
             and
             memorable
             River
             .
             Lastly
             ,
             after
             sundry
             fortunes
             ,
             and
             much
             wearinesse
             ,
             on
             the
             26.
             of
             the
             moneth
             of
             August
             of
             the
             same
             year
             1541.
             he
             went
             out
             at
             the
             great
             mouth
             of
             this
             great
             River
             ,
             and
             making
             sail
             towards
             the
             West
             along
             the
             coasts
             of
             Guyana
             and
             Paria
             ,
             Provinces
             of
             the
             same
             America
             ,
             on
             the
             eleventh
             of
             the
             moneth
             of
             September
             he
             happily
             attain'd
             the
             Isle
             of
             Cubagua
             ,
             near
             to
             that
             of
             Marguarite
             ,
             both
             of
             them
             inhabited
             by
             Spaniards
             ,
             and
             then
             rich
             in
             the
             fishing
             of
             Pearls
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XXXVIII
             .
             
               Of
               the
               second
               Expedition
               of
            
             Areillana
             
               in
               the
               same
               River
            
             .
          
           
             AFter
             that
             Areillana
             was
             return'd
             to
             Europe
             ,
             had
             fill'd
             all
             Spain
             with
             the
             admiration
             of
             his
             adventures
             ,
             and
             the
             Court
             of
             the
             Emperour
             Charles
             the
             V.
             with
             the
             hopes
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ;
             had
             got
             also
             from
             this
             Prince
             ,
             (
             whose
             arms
             and
             ambition
             troubled
             no
             lesse
             the
             old
             ,
             than
             the
             new-found
             world
             )
             the
             charge
             of
             making
             conquest
             of
             it
             in
             the
             name
             of
             the
             Crown
             of
             Castile
             ;
             and
             that
             he
             had
             at
             his
             own
             leisure
             made
             ready
             three
             Ships
             ,
             and
             man'd
             them
             with
             Horsemen
             ,
             and
             provisions
             necessary
             ,
             he
             made
             sail
             the
             xi
             .
             day
             of
             the
             moneth
             of
             May
             in
             the
             year
             1549.
             from
             the
             Haven
             of
             St
             Luke
             of
             Barrameda
             in
             Andalusia
             ,
             for
             the
             Tenariff
             in
             the
             Canaries
             ,
             where
             the
             ships
             stayed
             three
             moneths
             ,
             as
             also
             two
             moneths
             more
             under
             Cape-verd
             on
             the
             Continent
             of
             Africk
             ,
             loosing
             by
             those
             stayes
             an
             150.
             souldiers
             by
             sicknesse
             .
             Passing
             from
             thence
             to
             the
             coast
             of
             America
             ,
             the
             tempest
             drown'd
             one
             ship
             to
             him
             ,
             which
             had
             xi
             .
             
             horse
             ,
             and
             70.
             men
             aboard
             :
             and
             coming
             to
             half
             a
             degree
             of
             South-latitude
             ,
             he
             drew
             up
             sweet
             water
             in
             the
             full
             Sea
             ,
             and
             by
             that
             conjectur'd
             ,
             that
             infallibly
             he
             was
             in
             the
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             being
             not
             then
             above
             twelve
             Leagues
             from
             the
             point
             of
             Zaparara
             .
             But
             having
             gone
             in
             an
             hundred
             Leagues
             ,
             into
             the
             great
             mouth
             of
             this
             great
             River
             ,
             an
             107.
             of
             his
             folks
             being
             yet
             wanting
             to
             him
             ,
             and
             he
             perceiving
             that
             the
             rest
             would
             not
             be
             sufficient
             to
             furnish
             out
             these
             two
             ships
             ;
             he
             caused
             of
             the
             one
             of
             them
             a
             Barke
             to
             be
             made
             ,
             which
             was
             not
             compleated
             in
             three
             moneths
             ;
             and
             making
             sail
             again
             ,
             scarcely
             had
             he
             gone
             up
             twenty
             Leagues
             in
             the
             same
             River
             ,
             but
             he
             broke
             his
             other
             ship
             ,
             of
             the
             planks
             whereof
             he
             was
             constrain'd
             to
             make
             another
             Bark
             ,
             which
             thirty
             men
             made
             an
             end
             of
             only
             in
             two
             months
             and
             an
             half
             ,
             and
             that
             with
             much
             toile
             and
             wearinesse
             .
             Areillana
             in
             this
             mean
             while
             set
             himselfe
             twice
             with
             the
             other
             Bark
             to
             seek
             the
             true
             channel
             of
             the
             Amazone
             ;
             and
             never
             having
             been
             able
             to
             find
             it
             amongst
             so
             many
             arms
             and
             Isles
             of
             that
             River
             ,
             and
             so
             confused
             ,
             he
             finished
             his
             life
             with
             his
             adventures
             ,
             being
             surcharged
             with
             travail
             ,
             grief
             and
             sadnesse
             :
             so
             that
             the
             two
             Barks
             retired
             themselves
             severally
             
             from
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             and
             following
             the
             coasts
             of
             the
             firm
             Land
             of
             America
             ,
             betook
             themselves
             to
             the
             Isles
             of
             Cubagua
             ,
             and
             the
             Marguarite
             ;
             where
             the
             Spaniards
             ,
             that
             were
             but
             few
             now
             surviving
             this
             so
             ruinous
             an
             expedition
             ,
             made
             an
             end
             of
             all
             the
             rest
             of
             their
             lives
             ,
             dying
             there
             of
             sicknesse
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XXXIX
             .
             Of
             Pedro
             D'Orsua
             ,
             
               and
               of
               the
               Tyrant
            
             Lope
             d'Aguirre
             .
          
           
             AS
             all
             the
             Authours
             ,
             that
             have
             imployed
             their
             watchings
             to
             describe
             largely
             unto
             us
             the
             things
             of
             America
             ,
             were
             neither
             good
             enough
             Geographers
             ,
             nor
             good
             enough
             Geometricians
             ,
             to
             disintangle
             the
             difficulties
             ,
             that
             grows
             ordinarily
             in
             such
             matters
             ;
             so
             they
             have
             but
             too
             often
             fallen
             into
             contrarieties
             ,
             that
             make
             their
             Histories
             confused
             ;
             and
             into
             obscurities
             ,
             that
             robs
             their
             Readers
             of
             possibilities
             to
             understand
             them
             .
             Such
             as
             would
             take
             advantage
             at
             depressing
             them
             ,
             will
             somewhat
             strange
             at
             my
             censure
             of
             them
             :
             but
             I
             seeking
             nothing
             but
             truth
             ,
             
             and
             not
             after
             vain-glory
             in
             my
             works
             ;
             will
             passe
             on
             to
             my
             subject
             of
             this
             famous
             River
             ;
             the
             discovery
             whereof
             was
             no
             more
             essayed
             from
             Spain
             its
             self
             ,
             after
             the
             disgraces
             of
             Francis
             of
             Areillana
             ;
             but
             by
             the
             Spaniards
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Peru
             it
             was
             under
             the
             conduct
             of
             
               Pedro
               d'Orsua
            
             in
             the
             year
             1560.
             by
             the
             orders
             of
             the
             Viceroy
             there
             ,
             who
             gave
             him
             a
             little
             Army
             in
             a
             fleet
             well
             enough
             equipped
             .
             The
             embarkment
             for
             this
             expedition
             ,
             was
             on
             the
             River
             of
             Maragnon
             ,
             the
             neerest
             to
             the
             Town
             of
             Lima
             ;
             the
             chief
             of
             that
             Province
             .
             But
             a
             few
             moneths
             after
             their
             departure
             ,
             the
             souldiers
             mutinied
             against
             their
             General
             ,
             and
             put
             him
             to
             death
             ;
             and
             
               Lope
               d'Aguirre
            
             ,
             the
             boldest
             of
             them
             all
             ,
             took
             the
             title
             of
             King
             upon
             him
             ,
             and
             made
             himself
             to
             be
             obey'd
             of
             some
             ,
             by
             threats
             ;
             and
             of
             others
             ,
             by
             promises
             .
             Following
             out
             the
             navigation
             of
             Maragnon
             therefore
             ,
             and
             alwayes
             going
             down
             that
             River
             ,
             he
             entred
             into
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             and
             suffering
             himself
             to
             be
             carried
             down
             by
             the
             currant
             of
             his
             ample
             channel
             ,
             he
             stayed
             chiefly
             at
             the
             mouth
             of
             Rio-negro
             :
             where
             coming
             to
             consider
             of
             the
             greatnesse
             of
             his
             crime
             ,
             and
             the
             danger
             he
             had
             to
             fall
             into
             the
             hands
             of
             the
             Spaniards
             of
             the
             North-sea
             ,
             if
             
             he
             went
             once
             out
             of
             the
             great
             River
             ;
             he
             so
             addressed
             his
             whole
             Fleet
             in
             Rio-negro
             ,
             as
             having
             no
             other
             designe
             than
             to
             rove
             up
             and
             down
             so
             many
             Rivers
             ,
             and
             passe
             through
             so
             many
             Countreys
             ,
             only
             to
             sustain
             his
             tyranny
             .
             But
             fortune
             lesse
             blind
             than
             his
             prudence
             ,
             thrust
             him
             in
             his
             course
             of
             sailing
             into
             the
             River
             of
             Orenoc
             ,
             which
             coming
             to
             end
             in
             the
             Atlantick-sea
             over
             against
             the
             Isle
             of
             the
             Trinity
             (
             subject
             to
             the
             Crown
             of
             Castile
             )
             he
             was
             presently
             there
             made
             to
             stay
             ,
             partly
             by
             his
             own
             souldiers
             ,
             partly
             by
             the
             Catholick
             Kings
             officers
             ,
             and
             led
             to
             the
             punishment
             ,
             which
             his
             felony
             deserved
             ;
             his
             houses
             also
             in
             Peru
             ,
             by
             the
             same
             sentence
             were
             razed
             ,
             and
             so
             continue
             and
             show
             themselves
             yet
             in
             our
             dayes
             .
             But
             a
             voyage
             so
             surprizing
             for
             Geographers
             ,
             and
             so
             ill
             understood
             by
             Authors
             that
             have
             gone
             before
             me
             ,
             because
             not
             able
             to
             take
             up
             the
             strange
             order
             of
             all
             these
             Rivers
             ,
             could
             not
             be
             better
             hitherto
             cleered
             ,
             than
             by
             the
             preceding
             Chapters
             of
             this
             Book
             ,
             especially
             the
             16
             ,
             and
             17.
             
             And
             the
             onely
             difficulty
             which
             presents
             it self
             now
             ,
             is
             onely
             in
             the
             leap
             or
             fall
             of
             Orenoc
             ,
             discovered
             1531.
             by
             
               Diego
               de
               Ordas
            
             ;
             as
             also
             1536.
             by
             
               Alphonse
               de
               Herrera
            
             ,
             coming
             from
             Tinity-Isle
             .
             Herrera
             
             made
             draw
             his
             Barks
             by
             Land
             ,
             till
             he
             was
             above
             that
             leap
             of
             this
             River
             ;
             the
             like
             possibly
             having
             been
             done
             by
             the
             Mutineers
             of
             
               Lope
               d'
               Aguirre
            
             the
             Tyrant
             :
             or
             that
             the
             descent
             of
             the
             same
             leap
             being
             uneasier
             to
             Challops
             ,
             than
             to
             ascend
             it
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             force
             of
             Apanta
             ,
             (
             which
             is
             the
             name
             of
             a
             River
             as
             well
             as
             of
             a
             Province
             )
             it
             is
             possible
             also
             ,
             that
             those
             of
             Aguirra
             have
             passed
             down
             the
             leap
             without
             disenbarking
             any
             ;
             and
             that
             so
             much
             yet
             the
             more
             easily
             ,
             if
             it
             was
             in
             the
             time
             of
             the
             inundation
             (
             which
             is
             ordinary
             in
             all
             those
             Rivers
             )
             which
             raiseth
             the
             boylings
             of
             their
             waters
             above
             the
             rocks
             of
             their
             fall
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XL.
             
               Of
               the
               Unfortunate
               Expedition
               of
            
             Maldonado
             .
          
           
             MEan
             while
             the
             designes
             of
             this
             renowned
             discovery
             ,
             was
             no
             lesse
             vigorously
             embraced
             by
             the
             ambition
             and
             covetousnesse
             of
             the
             Spaniards
             of
             the
             Town
             of
             Cusco
             .
             The
             great
             and
             deep
             River
             of
             Amarumaya
             gave
             them
             the
             occasions
             of
             it
             ;
             
             because
             the
             Province
             of
             Moxa
             ,
             of
             their
             neighbourhood
             ,
             furnisheth
             the
             abundant
             Sources
             of
             it
             .
             And
             the
             first
             amongst
             them
             ,
             that
             had
             a
             thought
             of
             it
             ,
             (
             after
             the
             Inca's
             ,
             that
             had
             attempted
             it
             in
             vain
             )
             was
             
               Gomez
               de
               Tordoya
            
             ,
             having
             got
             the
             priviledge
             from
             the
             Count
             of
             Niebla
             the
             Viceroy
             of
             Peru
             .
             He
             failed
             not
             presently
             to
             make
             the
             necessary
             expences
             for
             it
             ,
             and
             by
             considerable
             advances
             to
             order
             all
             its
             preparations
             .
             But
             his
             power
             expiring
             by
             the
             removall
             of
             the
             Count
             of
             Niebla
             ;
             and
             his
             Successor
             (
             that
             was
             of
             the
             House
             of
             Castro
             )
             conferring
             it
             upon
             
               Gaspar
               de
               Sotelle
            
             ,
             confounded
             all
             things
             by
             this
             change
             .
             This
             last
             to
             authorize
             his
             own
             credit
             ,
             had
             associated
             himself
             with
             the
             
               Inca
               Topacamare
            
             ,
             of
             the
             race
             of
             the
             ancient
             Kings
             ,
             that
             dwelt
             at
             Bileobambe
             .
             And
             if
             the
             too
             great
             number
             of
             Souldiers
             ,
             that
             voluntarily
             offered
             to
             follow
             them
             ,
             had
             not
             cast
             some
             suspicion
             into
             the
             head
             of
             the
             Viceroy
             ,
             and
             the
             spirits
             of
             the
             supream
             Counsell
             ,
             who
             manage
             this
             conquest
             with
             an
             extream
             great
             jealousie
             ;
             Gaspars
             enterprise
             had
             not
             been
             broken
             ,
             and
             the
             same
             priviledge
             granted
             to
             
               Johne
               Alvarez
            
             of
             Maldonado
             .
             Who
             having
             finally
             An.
             1566.
             passed
             the
             Mountains
             of
             the
             
             Andes
             ,
             and
             entered
             into
             the
             famous
             Province
             of
             Moxa
             ,
             gave
             beginning
             to
             that
             unfortunate
             rather
             than
             famous
             expedition
             ,
             in
             going
             aboard
             his
             Rafts
             ,
             or
             Float-boates
             ,
             with
             two
             hundred
             and
             fifty
             Souldiers
             well
             armed
             ,
             and
             an
             hundred
             Horse
             in
             good
             equippage
             ;
             to
             follow
             the
             tossed
             waves
             of
             the
             Amarumaya
             ,
             and
             by
             suffering
             himself
             to
             be
             carried
             by
             his
             fierce
             stream
             ,
             to
             go
             down
             into
             the
             vast
             Fields
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
             But
             fortune
             being
             envious
             at
             the
             glory
             that
             he
             promised
             himself
             from
             this
             famous
             discovery
             ,
             failed
             not
             presently
             to
             overturn
             the
             successe
             .
             
               Gomez
               de
               Tordoya
            
             (
             as
             we
             have
             said
             )
             could
             not
             suffer
             with
             patience
             ,
             neither
             the
             outrage
             of
             calling
             him
             back
             ,
             nor
             the
             losse
             of
             his
             expences
             :
             his
             ressentment
             of
             these
             ,
             followed
             with
             courage
             ,
             disposeth
             him
             to
             sedition
             ,
             seeing
             all
             his
             complaints
             were
             alwaies
             rejected
             ;
             he
             therefore
             now
             carryes
             himself
             upon
             his
             own
             authority
             ,
             to
             put
             the
             same
             enterprise
             in
             expedition
             ,
             and
             that
             against
             the
             discharging
             of
             him
             by
             the
             Viceroy
             .
             By
             his
             own
             boldnesse
             he
             passeth
             the
             Mountains
             and
             the
             Forrests
             of
             those
             unknown
             places
             ,
             and
             being
             followed
             by
             sixty
             Spanish
             Souldiers
             ,
             he
             prevents
             his
             competitor
             by
             a
             precipitated
             march
             .
             
             When
             he
             had
             attain'd
             the
             River
             of
             Amarumaya
             ,
             and
             known
             that
             the
             Fleet
             was
             not
             yet
             passed
             ,
             he
             resolved
             to
             wait
             on
             it
             in
             that
             place
             ,
             and
             to
             fight
             it
             ,
             as
             he
             did
             ,
             soon
             as
             it
             arrived
             .
             The
             medly
             was
             sharp
             ,
             and
             endured
             three
             daies
             ;
             the
             valour
             in
             the
             two
             parties
             was
             equall
             ;
             and
             the
             number
             of
             the
             slain
             and
             hurt
             was
             so
             great
             in
             this
             unfortunate
             rencountre
             ,
             that
             the
             Chonques
             ,
             (
             a
             Neighbouring
             People
             )
             casting
             themselves
             in
             Armes
             upon
             the
             rest
             ,
             put
             all
             to
             death
             ,
             with
             Tordoya
             ,
             none
             escaping
             in
             this
             miserable
             conflict
             ,
             but
             the
             Generall
             Maldonado
             ,
             Father
             
               Diego
               Martin
            
             ,
             a
             Portugall
             ;
             and
             
               Simon
               Lope
            
             ,
             that
             was
             excellent
             in
             artillery
             :
             who
             ,
             after
             having
             stayed
             two
             years
             amongst
             these
             Barbarians
             ,
             returned
             by
             I
             know
             not
             what
             way
             of
             accommodation
             ,
             to
             the
             Province
             of
             Moxa
             ,
             of
             the
             dependance
             of
             Cusco
             ,
             whither
             they
             went
             afterwards
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XLI
             .
             
               Of
               other
               Designes
               for
               the
               Discovery
               of
               this
               River
               .
            
          
           
             THe
             sad
             events
             of
             the
             Fleet
             of
             D'Orsua
             ,
             and
             
               De
               Maldonado
            
             did
             no
             more
             slacken
             the
             courage
             ,
             than
             slaked
             the
             greed
             of
             the
             Spaniards
             in
             research
             of
             immense
             ,
             or
             rather
             imaginary
             Treasures
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
             They
             were
             long
             enough
             time
             both
             in
             Spain
             ,
             and
             America
             ,
             quiet
             ,
             and
             moved
             not
             for
             this
             conquest
             .
             Only
             in
             the
             year
             1621
             ,
             the
             King
             
               Don
               Philip
            
             the
             fourth
             ,
             sent
             Powers
             to
             the
             royal
             Audience
             of
             Kyto
             ,
             to
             treat
             of
             fitting
             conditions
             ,
             for
             the
             discovery
             of
             this
             River
             ,
             with
             those
             of
             his
             Nobility
             ,
             that
             were
             employed
             in
             places
             and
             charges
             of
             that
             Province
             .
             But
             by
             that
             time
             all
             these
             Orders
             (
             in
             order
             to
             Propositions
             ,
             that
             the
             Serjeant
             Major
             
               Vincent
               de
               Villalobos
            
             ,
             Governour
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Kixo
             ,
             had
             made
             for
             any
             that
             took
             that
             charge
             ;
             and
             during
             the
             making
             whereof
             ,
             for
             the
             longsomenesse
             of
             the
             goings
             ,
             and
             comings
             of
             Posts
             ,
             and
             of
             consultations
             ordinarily
             to
             be
             used
             in
             such
             rencontres
             ,
             the
             
             time
             of
             his
             Government
             coming
             to
             expire
             )
             were
             come
             to
             that
             point
             ,
             that
             for
             any
             might
             take
             that
             charge
             ,
             the
             good
             intentions
             of
             the
             Catholique
             King
             in
             this
             ,
             were
             for
             that
             time
             made
             unprofitable
             ,
             not
             only
             by
             the
             change
             of
             the
             Governour
             ,
             but
             also
             by
             the
             death
             of
             his
             Successor
             
               Alonzo
               de
               Miranda
            
             ,
             who
             carried
             himself
             with
             the
             same
             zeal
             ,
             towards
             the
             same
             discovery
             .
             Now
             the
             rumour
             of
             these
             goodly
             and
             noble
             Propositions
             of
             the
             Castilians
             of
             Peru
             passing
             presently
             into
             Brasile
             ,
             the
             emulation
             of
             the
             Portugalls
             made
             them
             presently
             make
             the
             like
             about
             the
             same
             ,
             in
             the
             Court
             of
             the
             Catholique
             King
             there
             ,
             who
             was
             yet
             in
             possession
             of
             their
             Kingdom
             .
             So
             that
             upon
             the
             warmth
             and
             zeal
             that
             
               Benito
               Maciel
            
             Governour
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Maragnon
             witnessed
             that
             he
             had
             for
             the
             discovery
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             by
             that
             side
             of
             its
             mouth
             that
             bounded
             his
             Government
             ;
             the
             Patents
             were
             sent
             him
             1626
             ,
             in
             the
             ordinary
             conditions
             .
             But
             his
             generous
             designes
             were
             yet
             hindered
             by
             the
             Warres
             of
             the
             Hollanders
             against
             the
             Portugalls
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             Pernambouk
             ,
             of
             the
             same
             Kingdom
             of
             Brasile
             ,
             and
             Frontier
             to
             that
             of
             Maragnon
             ,
             who
             feared
             not
             a
             little
             the
             disasters
             of
             
             it
             .
             Mean
             while
             the
             orders
             of
             this
             conquest
             are
             redoubled
             by
             the
             cares
             of
             the
             King
             
               Don
               Philip.
            
             They
             are
             alwaies
             sent
             to
             the
             Governour
             of
             Maragnon
             ;
             and
             
               Francis
               Coeille
            
             of
             Carvaille
             ,
             who
             had
             then
             the
             Government
             of
             it
             ,
             received
             them
             1633
             ,
             and
             34
             :
             who
             notwithstanding
             coming
             to
             consider
             ,
             that
             in
             parting
             his
             Forces
             ,
             for
             to
             send
             some
             of
             them
             ,
             or
             conduct
             them
             himself
             ,
             for
             discovery
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ;
             that
             the
             rest
             that
             stayed
             in
             the
             Province
             ,
             would
             not
             be
             able
             to
             guard
             it
             against
             the
             assaults
             of
             the
             Hollanders
             ,
             who
             from
             the
             year
             1630
             ,
             had
             taken
             the
             famous
             Town
             of
             Olynda
             ,
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Pernambouk
             ,
             and
             possessed
             the
             neigbouring
             coasts
             ;
             the
             expedition
             for
             the
             discovery
             was
             by
             him
             wisely
             delayed
             .
             Thus
             a
             necessity
             to
             defend
             themselves
             ,
             hindered
             yet
             the
             Portugalls
             for
             this
             time
             ,
             to
             aspire
             to
             the
             glory
             of
             an
             enterprise
             so
             much
             desired
             ,
             and
             so
             often
             before
             checked
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XLII
             .
             
               Of
               the
               Religious
               of
               St
            
             Francis
             ,
             
               that
               came
               down
               all
               the
               great
               River
               .
            
          
           
             IT
             was
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             year
             1635
             ,
             that
             Captain
             
               Johne
               de
               Palacies
            
             (
             of
             whom
             we
             have
             spoken
             before
             )
             accompanied
             with
             thirty
             Spanish
             Souldiers
             ,
             and
             six
             religious
             of
             the
             Convent
             of
             St
             Francis
             of
             the
             Town
             of
             Kyto
             ,
             descended
             from
             the
             Mountains
             of
             the
             Cordelier
             into
             the
             Plaines
             of
             Kixo
             ,
             to
             settle
             his
             abode
             (
             as
             he
             did
             without
             hindrance
             as
             to
             the
             Savages
             )
             at
             the
             Village
             of
             Anete
             upon
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             .
             In
             this
             Post
             (
             the
             furthest
             advanced
             of
             all
             those
             that
             the
             Spaniards
             held
             in
             the
             East
             Countries
             of
             the
             Andes
             )
             the
             valour
             of
             
               Johne
               de
               Palacios
            
             ,
             and
             of
             his
             ,
             seem'd
             no
             lesse
             admirable
             ,
             than
             the
             zeal
             of
             the
             religious
             of
             St
             Francis
             ,
             shew'd
             it self
             ardent
             for
             advancing
             the
             Christian
             Religion
             .
             Both
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             exercised
             themselves
             in
             these
             places
             ,
             either
             to
             make
             the
             neighbouring
             Nations
             obedient
             to
             the
             Crown
             of
             Castille
             ,
             or
             to
             gain
             souls
             to
             God
             from
             amongst
             so
             many
             Peoples
             ,
             no
             
             lesse
             fierce
             than
             Savage
             .
             But
             neither
             their
             perseverance
             in
             their
             travalls
             ,
             nor
             their
             courage
             in
             their
             fights
             ,
             nor
             finally
             their
             holy
             and
             zealous
             exhortations
             ,
             could
             ever
             prevail
             any
             thing
             ,
             especially
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             the
             long-hair'd
             People
             ,
             where
             Captain
             
               Johne
               de
               Palacios
            
             1636
             ,
             was
             put
             to
             death
             by
             the
             Barbarians
             .
             Whereby
             all
             his
             Souldiers
             were
             so
             discomforted
             ,
             and
             the
             religious
             themselves
             were
             so
             far
             put
             back
             ,
             that
             abandoning
             all
             of
             them
             presently
             their
             abode
             at
             Anete
             ,
             they
             retired
             all
             to
             their
             ancient
             Houses
             ;
             under
             the
             reserve
             or
             disposall
             of
             Father
             Andrew
             of
             Toledo
             ,
             Father
             
               Dominique
               de
               Brieve
            
             ,
             and
             six
             Souldiers
             only
             that
             were
             resting
             ;
             not
             to
             stay
             any
             longer
             in
             those
             unfortunate
             places
             ;
             but
             to
             go
             all
             into
             a
             little
             Barke
             ,
             and
             to
             expose
             themselves
             to
             the
             rapid
             current
             of
             the
             vast
             Amazone
             ,
             and
             try
             better
             adventures
             in
             his
             waters
             ,
             than
             on
             the
             firm
             Land
             ,
             that
             butted
             on
             his
             banks
             .
             So
             destiny
             hath
             reserved
             the
             Names
             of
             those
             two
             religious
             to
             be
             inserted
             in
             Histories
             ,
             that
             their
             marvellous
             hardinesse
             to
             have
             enterprised
             a
             Voyage
             so
             extraordinary
             for
             so
             many
             circumstances
             ,
             might
             never
             be
             wiped
             out
             of
             memory
             of
             Ages
             to
             come
             .
             For
             if
             Amerique
             and
             Drake
             have
             been
             no
             lesse
             glorious
             ,
             
             for
             having
             been
             but
             the
             seconds
             ,
             the
             one
             for
             touching
             on
             the
             firm
             Land
             of
             America
             ;
             and
             the
             other
             for
             rounding
             the
             world
             ;
             these
             other
             feeble
             and
             new
             Argonantes
             shall
             also
             be
             no
             lesse
             renown'd
             ,
             for
             having
             but
             made
             the
             second
             Navigation
             of
             all
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             .
             In
             end
             after
             much
             wearisomenesse
             endured
             ,
             many
             dangers
             escaped
             ,
             and
             alwaies
             upheld
             by
             Providence
             ,
             these
             two
             Fathers
             of
             St
             Francis
             ,
             the
             six
             Spanish
             Souldiers
             ,
             and
             their
             little
             Barke
             ,
             the
             companion
             of
             their
             glory
             ,
             arrived
             happily
             at
             Para
             a
             Town
             of
             Brasile
             ,
             where
             they
             presently
             fill'd
             the
             eyes
             and
             ears
             of
             all
             the
             People
             with
             admiration
             :
             but
             above
             all
             the
             noble
             courage
             of
             
               Pedro
               Texeira
            
             Captain
             Major
             ,
             who
             commanded
             in
             that
             great
             and
             rich
             Capitanrie
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Maragnon
             ;
             the
             Governour
             Generall
             whereof
             ,
             (
             then
             
               James
               Raymund
            
             of
             Norogna
             )
             resided
             at
             St
             Lewis
             ,
             whether
             the
             two
             religious
             went
             to
             him
             in
             like
             manner
             ,
             to
             give
             him
             as
             much
             content
             by
             the
             pleasant
             relations
             of
             their
             singulare
             adventures
             ;
             as
             emulation
             to
             this
             conquest
             by
             the
             famous
             examples
             of
             their
             memorable
             Voyage
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XLIII
             .
             
               Of
               the
               Departure
               of
            
             Pedro
             Texeira
             
               for
               this
               Discovery
            
             .
          
           
             IN
             end
             fortune
             being
             wearied
             ,
             so
             long
             to
             crosse
             a
             design
             ,
             that
             Spain
             had
             travelled
             with
             ,
             with
             so
             much
             care
             ;
             cast
             her
             favourable
             eyes
             on
             the
             person
             of
             
               Pedro
               Texeira
            
             Captain
             Major
             of
             Para
             in
             Brasile
             ,
             that
             his
             courage
             and
             prudence
             coming
             to
             second
             the
             choice
             that
             she
             had
             made
             of
             him
             ,
             and
             preferred
             him
             to
             so
             many
             Subjects
             of
             merit
             ,
             he
             might
             arrive
             at
             the
             glory
             to
             have
             been
             the
             first
             ,
             to
             make
             the
             whole
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             feel
             the
             heavy
             and
             victorious
             Fleets
             of
             the
             Catholique
             King.
             Now
             the
             necessity
             of
             the
             Portugalls
             self-defence
             ,
             who
             had
             the
             expence
             and
             diversion
             of
             a
             continuall
             Warre
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             Brasile
             to
             maintain
             ,
             could
             not
             allow
             to
             this
             noble
             expedition
             ,
             Forces
             more
             considerable
             ,
             than
             those
             that
             parted
             from
             the
             Town
             of
             Para
             the
             twenty
             eight
             of
             the
             Moneth
             of
             October
             in
             the
             year
             1637
             ,
             under
             the
             conduct
             of
             Captain
             Major
             
               Pedro
               Texeira
            
             (
             of
             the
             same
             Nation
             )
             followed
             by
             fourty
             seven
             Barkes
             ,
             
             both
             great
             ,
             and
             well
             armed
             ;
             by
             seventy
             Portugall
             Souldiers
             ,
             and
             one
             thousand
             two
             hundred
             Indians
             fitted
             to
             the
             Warre
             ;
             by
             eight
             hundred
             Women
             and
             Vallets
             ;
             and
             furnished
             with
             provisions
             meet
             and
             necessary
             for
             so
             long
             ,
             and
             doubtfull
             an
             enterprise
             .
             The
             dexterity
             of
             the
             Marriners
             and
             Rowers
             ,
             and
             the
             favourable
             help
             of
             the
             windes
             ,
             broke
             the
             first
             difficulties
             ,
             that
             the
             Fleet
             could
             have
             had
             ,
             to
             gain
             without
             losse
             and
             danger
             the
             true
             channell
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
             But
             in
             departing
             from
             the
             coasts
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Maragnon
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Countries
             that
             are
             subject
             to
             it
             ,
             the
             Portugalls
             could
             no
             longer
             know
             neither
             the
             bank-sides
             ,
             nor
             the
             right
             wayes
             and
             courses
             of
             the
             great
             River
             ,
             because
             of
             so
             many
             crooked
             Armes
             of
             his
             ,
             that
             he
             castes
             out
             ,
             and
             thereby
             frames
             his
             many
             Islands
             .
             So
             that
             the
             Navigation
             becoming
             longer
             ,
             by
             following
             waies
             uncertain
             ,
             and
             not
             before
             known
             ;
             and
             the
             troubles
             and
             toyles
             inseparable
             from
             a
             Sea-Army
             ,
             that
             must
             often
             disembark
             ,
             to
             camp
             on
             the
             firm
             Land
             ,
             began
             to
             weary
             the
             Indians
             ,
             and
             to
             distaste
             them
             from
             further
             pursuing
             of
             the
             Voyage
             .
             Already
             many
             of
             them
             stole
             away
             ,
             to
             regain
             (
             as
             well
             as
             they
             could
             )
             the
             Land
             
             of
             their
             Nativity
             ;
             and
             those
             that
             stayed
             peaceably
             behind
             in
             the
             Barkes
             ,
             or
             in
             the
             Camp
             ,
             ceased
             not
             to
             make
             their
             mindes
             known
             by
             their
             murmurings
             :
             in
             so
             far
             that
             the
             fear
             of
             a
             greater
             deserting
             of
             him
             ,
             giving
             this
             Generall
             occasion
             of
             just
             unquietnesse
             ,
             he
             set
             himself
             to
             find
             out
             more
             sure
             waies
             to
             prevent
             this
             disorder
             ,
             since
             punishment
             and
             severity
             kept
             out
             hardly
             to
             their
             duty
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             and
             Vallets
             of
             his
             Army
             .
             He
             was
             but
             yet
             half
             way
             come
             in
             his
             Voyage
             ;
             but
             feign'd
             that
             he
             was
             near
             enough
             the
             place
             ,
             where
             the
             Fleet
             should
             arrive
             .
             And
             the
             better
             to
             perswade
             them
             to
             this
             ,
             he
             ordered
             eight
             Barkes
             well
             furnisht
             and
             well
             armed
             ,
             to
             go
             before
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             were
             to
             make
             the
             encampments
             for
             the
             body
             of
             the
             Army
             to
             follow
             ,
             in
             places
             where
             it
             was
             to
             Land.
             But
             in
             truth
             ,
             his
             intent
             was
             in
             this
             ,
             only
             to
             find
             out
             and
             discover
             the
             best
             waies
             ,
             that
             were
             to
             be
             held
             in
             the
             great
             River
             ,
             and
             by
             these
             ambiguities
             to
             keep
             all
             his
             men
             in
             breath
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XLIV
             .
             
               Of
               the
               Arrivall
               of
               the
               Fleet
               at
            
             Peru.
             
          
           
             MEan
             while
             the
             Fleet
             goes
             on
             ,
             her
             Sails
             being
             fill'd
             with
             an
             East-wind
             ,
             alwaies
             favourable
             ,
             and
             triumphs
             over
             the
             rapid
             current
             of
             the
             proud
             Amazone
             .
             Already
             six
             Moneths
             were
             past
             ,
             and
             six
             hundred
             leagues
             had
             been
             measured
             ,
             which
             they
             had
             runne
             ;
             the
             half
             of
             the
             way
             was
             done
             ,
             and
             sundry
             Nations
             had
             been
             discovered
             .
             The
             wildest
             amongst
             them
             fled
             to
             the
             Mountains
             ,
             or
             lesser
             Hills
             ;
             the
             lesse
             fearfull
             stood
             unmoved
             upon
             the
             Bankes
             ;
             the
             more
             confident
             came
             and
             traffiqued
             with
             the
             Camp
             :
             but
             the
             valientest
             ,
             no
             more
             than
             the
             others
             ,
             never
             armed
             themselves
             against
             the
             Fleet
             ,
             nor
             against
             her
             Avantcourriers
             or
             Vantguard
             :
             which
             already
             very
             far
             advanced
             ,
             because
             of
             its
             lightnesse
             ,
             was
             tracing
             and
             following
             on
             the
             channells
             of
             the
             great
             River
             ,
             the
             waies
             that
             were
             streightest
             ,
             and
             least
             oblique
             ,
             and
             marked
             forth
             the
             addresses
             ,
             or
             directions
             ,
             on
             the
             Bankes
             ,
             by
             Trophees
             set
             up
             ,
             or
             by
             Ensignes
             set
             together
             .
             The
             Vantguard
             was
             commanded
             by
             
             
               Bennet
               Rodrigue
               d'Olivera
            
             ,
             a
             Portugall
             ,
             who
             having
             been
             born
             in
             Brasile
             ,
             and
             brought
             up
             as
             it
             were
             amidst
             the
             Americans
             ,
             he
             dived
             presently
             into
             the
             secret
             of
             their
             thoughts
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             least
             of
             their
             actions
             ,
             he
             could
             guesse
             what
             they
             had
             in
             their
             minds
             :
             whence
             he
             was
             as
             well
             feared
             ,
             as
             respected
             by
             all
             the
             Indians
             of
             these
             Countries
             :
             so
             that
             by
             his
             good
             qualities
             ,
             he
             had
             also
             this
             prerogative
             ,
             to
             contribute
             much
             to
             the
             happy
             finishing
             of
             so
             noble
             an
             enterprise
             .
             So
             pursuing
             the
             Voyage
             with
             his
             Vantguard
             of
             eight
             Barkes
             armed
             ,
             he
             attained
             with
             as
             much
             diligence
             ,
             as
             good
             luck
             ,
             the
             Port
             of
             Payamine
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             the
             Kixes
             ,
             the
             24th
             of
             June
             in
             the
             year
             1638
             ,
             while
             the
             Captain
             Major
             with
             all
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Fleet
             followed
             the
             traces
             advices
             ,
             and
             addresses
             ,
             that
             Olivera
             left
             at
             the
             places
             ,
             where
             he
             had
             rested
             with
             his
             Vantguard
             :
             whence
             the
             Souldiers
             of
             his
             Army
             ,
             receiving
             every
             day
             comfort
             ,
             they
             thought
             alway
             ,
             that
             the
             morrow
             was
             to
             be
             the
             last
             of
             the
             Voyage
             .
             Thus
             entertain'd
             with
             this
             hope
             ,
             they
             arrived
             at
             the
             River
             of
             the
             long-hair'd
             People
             ,
             on
             the
             Mouth
             of
             which
             ,
             
               Pedro
               Texcira
            
             made
             fourty
             Portugalls
             ,
             and
             three
             hundred
             Indians
             of
             his
             Troopes
             ,
             to
             encamp
             ,
             
             and
             gave
             orders
             to
             
               Pedro
               d'Acosta
               Savela
            
             (
             who
             was
             appointed
             to
             the
             command
             of
             them
             )
             to
             stay
             in
             this
             place
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             depart
             thence
             ,
             till
             he
             heard
             from
             him
             ;
             leaving
             there
             moreover
             
               Pedra
               Bayon
            
             a
             Captain
             also
             of
             infantrie
             .
             And
             himself
             continuing
             his
             Navigation
             with
             some
             few
             persons
             ,
             he
             came
             likewise
             to
             the
             Haven
             of
             Payamine
             towards
             the
             end
             of
             September
             ,
             having
             passed
             one
             thousand
             two
             hundred
             leagues
             in
             a
             continuall
             going
             up
             the
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             since
             the
             28th
             of
             October
             of
             the
             year
             before
             .
             After
             that
             ,
             from
             thence
             taking
             his
             way
             by
             Land
             ,
             and
             crosse
             the
             Mountains
             of
             the
             Andes
             ,
             he
             came
             no
             lesse
             happily
             ,
             than
             gloriously
             to
             the
             Town
             of
             Kito
             ,
             where
             he
             was
             received
             with
             such
             Acclamations
             and
             Triumphs
             ,
             as
             the
             greatnesse
             and
             successe
             of
             his
             Enterprise
             did
             deserve
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XLV
             .
             
               Of
               the
               Orders
               of
               the
               Viceroy
               for
               the
               Return
               of
               the
            
             Portugalls
             .
          
           
             AFter
             that
             the
             Royal
             Audience
             of
             the
             Town
             of
             Kito
             ,
             had
             received
             from
             the
             Portugalls
             all
             the
             informations
             that
             were
             needfull
             on
             a
             businesse
             of
             such
             importance
             ,
             which
             look't
             towards
             the
             discovery
             ,
             or
             conquest
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ;
             it
             would
             not
             for
             all
             that
             deliberate
             upon
             it
             ,
             nor
             proceed
             to
             things
             so
             weighty
             ,
             without
             giving
             advertisement
             thereof
             to
             the
             Count
             of
             Chinchon
             Viceroy
             of
             Peru.
             Who
             with
             the
             other
             Officers
             of
             the
             King
             of
             Spaine
             ,
             having
             considered
             all
             the
             circumstances
             of
             a
             successe
             so
             advantagious
             ,
             sent
             the
             Audience
             his
             Orders
             from
             the
             Town
             of
             Lima
             ,
             the
             chief
             of
             the
             whole
             Kingdom
             ,
             dated
             the
             20th
             of
             November
             in
             the
             year
             1638
             ,
             to
             send
             back
             with
             all
             diligence
             the
             Portugalls
             ,
             by
             the
             way
             that
             they
             came
             to
             the
             Town
             of
             Para
             ,
             giving
             them
             and
             furnishing
             them
             with
             all
             things
             necessary
             and
             fit
             ,
             for
             fear
             that
             Brasile
             suffered
             not
             inconvenience
             by
             the
             Hollanders
             ,
             
             through
             so
             great
             and
             farre
             an
             absence
             of
             so
             many
             worthy
             Persons
             of
             service
             :
             and
             to
             perswade
             them
             to
             receive
             into
             their
             company
             two
             faithfull
             Persons
             ,
             that
             were
             Dependants
             on
             the
             Crown
             of
             Castile
             ,
             to
             give
             an
             account
             to
             his
             Catholique
             Majesty
             ,
             of
             all
             that
             was
             discovered
             ,
             and
             should
             be
             discovered
             along
             the
             great
             Amazone
             in
             the
             return
             of
             a
             like
             Voyage
             .
             Presently
             after
             the
             Orders
             of
             the
             Viceroy
             were
             published
             through
             the
             Town
             of
             Kito
             ,
             sundry
             Spaniards
             ,
             especially
             Religious
             ,
             presented
             themselves
             for
             the
             choice
             ,
             to
             go
             on
             that
             Voyage
             .
             But
             as
             
               Don
               Johne
               Vasquez
               d'Acogna
            
             ,
             Lieutenant
             Generall
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             the
             same
             name
             ,
             and
             Knight
             of
             the
             order
             of
             Calatrave
             ,
             was
             making
             offers
             much
             more
             advantagious
             for
             the
             Crown
             of
             Castile
             ,
             proposing
             to
             make
             Levies
             ,
             pay
             the
             Souldiers
             ,
             buy
             Provisions
             ,
             and
             bear
             all
             other
             charges
             in
             favour
             of
             this
             conquest
             ,
             the
             Count
             of
             Chinchon
             broke
             presently
             the
             design
             ,
             judging
             it
             no
             waies
             convenient
             to
             the
             service
             of
             the
             Catholique
             King
             ,
             that
             that
             Personage
             should
             then
             leave
             his
             Charge
             .
             And
             Father
             
               Christopher
               d'Acogna
            
             ,
             his
             Brother
             ,
             a
             Spanish
             Jesuite
             ,
             who
             hath
             merited
             to
             live
             as
             long
             in
             the
             memories
             
             of
             men
             ,
             as
             the
             great
             Amazone
             shall
             runne
             in
             the
             Fields
             of
             America
             ,
             had
             the
             good
             hap
             of
             this
             nomination
             :
             wherein
             he
             behaved
             himself
             with
             so
             much
             zeal
             towards
             God
             ,
             so
             much
             fidelity
             towards
             his
             Prince
             ,
             so
             much
             affection
             towards
             the
             Souldiers
             ,
             and
             so
             much
             care
             to
             remarke
             ,
             and
             put
             in
             writ
             all
             the
             circumstances
             of
             the
             great
             River
             ,
             that
             his
             glory
             is
             beyond
             all
             praise
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XLVI
             .
             
               Of
               the
               Camp
               of
               the
            
             Portugalls
             
               in
               the
               Province
               of
               the
            
             long-hair'd
             Nation
             .
          
           
             VVHile
             all
             this
             is
             in
             preparing
             by
             the
             diligence
             of
             
               Alonzo
               Perez
               de
               Salazar
            
             ,
             President
             of
             the
             Royal
             Audience
             of
             Kito
             ,
             for
             the
             return
             of
             the
             Portugalls
             ;
             and
             the
             Rendesvows
             of
             the
             Fleet
             ,
             and
             the
             Troops
             ,
             is
             put
             upon
             the
             20th
             of
             Feburary
             1639
             ,
             in
             the
             Town
             of
             Archidona
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             Haven
             of
             Napo
             ,
             a
             great
             deal
             more
             convenient
             in
             all
             things
             ,
             than
             that
             of
             Payamino
             :
             let
             us
             go
             visit
             the
             Camp
             of
             the
             Portugalls
             on
             the
             River
             of
             the
             Chevelu's
             or
             long-hair'd
             People
             ,
             untill
             the
             Army
             come
             to
             it
             again
             in
             
             its
             coming
             down
             .
             It
             was
             left
             in
             this
             place
             by
             the
             prudence
             of
             the
             Captain
             Major
             Texeira
             ,
             as
             well
             to
             content
             the
             Provinces
             of
             the
             Crown
             of
             Custile
             ,
             as
             to
             give
             the
             lesse
             jealousie
             to
             the
             Spaniards
             of
             Peru
             ,
             in
             keeping
             far
             enough
             off
             from
             the
             limits
             of
             that
             Kingdom
             .
             At
             the
             first
             ,
             the
             Camp
             had
             good
             correspondence
             with
             the
             Savages
             of
             that
             Countrey
             ;
             it
             had
             victuals
             and
             provisions
             enough
             for
             buying
             .
             But
             this
             peaceable
             commerce
             could
             not
             last
             long
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             late
             death
             of
             Captain
             
               John
               de
               Palacies
            
             ,
             who
             was
             defait
             by
             the
             Savages
             of
             this
             Countrey
             and
             Province
             .
             Some
             of
             the
             Camp
             desired
             to
             revenge
             it
             ,
             and
             chastise
             their
             boldnesse
             ;
             but
             others
             feared
             to
             get
             hard
             measure
             and
             rough
             handling
             from
             them
             .
             Thus
             the
             least
             occasion
             coming
             to
             sow
             the
             discord
             ,
             and
             three
             Indians
             of
             the
             Portugalls
             having
             been
             put
             to
             death
             by
             the
             Natives
             ;
             these
             fierce
             people
             put
             themselves
             in
             arms
             ,
             to
             defend
             their
             own
             lives
             ,
             and
             their
             Countries
             .
             In
             so
             great
             a
             danger
             ,
             the
             Portugalls
             lost
             not
             their
             courage
             ;
             and
             as
             having
             been
             used
             to
             this
             long
             before
             ,
             not
             to
             suffer
             such
             a
             licentiousnesse
             amongst
             the
             Native
             Indians
             where
             they
             were
             ;
             they
             set
             themselves
             presently
             to
             punish
             them
             for
             this
             .
             
             And
             after
             they
             had
             killed
             some
             of
             them
             ,
             and
             taken
             alive
             more
             than
             seventy
             ,
             they
             kept
             them
             as
             slaves
             ,
             untill
             they
             all
             either
             died
             ,
             or
             escaped
             by
             flight
             .
             But
             after
             this
             the
             Portugalls
             could
             have
             no
             provision
             but
             by
             the
             point
             of
             their
             Sword
             ,
             and
             by
             continuall
             excursions
             of
             their
             men
             ,
             sent
             from
             their
             Camp
             ;
             both
             giving
             and
             receiving
             also
             a
             great
             deal
             of
             hurt
             ,
             above
             all
             in
             their
             Vessels
             ,
             whereof
             some
             were
             saccaged
             ,
             or
             spoil'd
             ,
             and
             the
             lesse
             strong
             of
             them
             quite
             undone
             by
             these
             Barbarians
             .
             But
             in
             the
             snares
             and
             ambushes
             ,
             as
             many
             Portugalls
             as
             were
             taken
             alive
             ,
             their
             throats
             were
             cruelly
             cut
             ,
             which
             amounted
             to
             some
             considerable
             losse
             to
             them
             ;
             though
             that
             of
             the
             enemies
             was
             far
             greater
             .
             Thus
             the
             prudence
             and
             valour
             of
             
               Pedro
               d'Acosta
            
             ,
             the
             courage
             and
             fidelity
             of
             
               Pedro
               Bayon
            
             ,
             and
             as
             well
             the
             discipline
             ,
             as
             obedience
             of
             the
             Souldiers
             ,
             can
             never
             receive
             their
             just
             enough
             praises
             ,
             for
             having
             maintain'd
             their
             Camp
             thus
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             the
             long-hair'd
             People
             ,
             for
             eleven
             whole
             Moneths
             ,
             and
             without
             any
             other
             News
             from
             their
             own
             ,
             than
             the
             return
             of
             the
             Fleet
             ,
             upon
             which
             they
             went
             all
             aboard
             again
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XLVII
             .
             
               Of
               the
               Return
               of
               the
               Fleet
               of
               the
            
             Portugalls
             .
          
           
             ALl
             things
             being
             ready
             ,
             and
             the
             embarking
             at
             an
             end
             towards
             the
             end
             of
             February
             1639
             ,
             the
             Fleet
             of
             the
             Portugalls
             began
             their
             Return
             from
             the
             Haven
             of
             Napo
             on
             the
             River
             of
             the
             same
             name
             :
             and
             after
             having
             sailed
             thirty
             leagues
             on
             the
             current
             of
             this
             River
             strong
             and
             swift
             enough
             ,
             it
             entered
             into
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             at
             the
             Junto
             of
             the
             Rivers
             ,
             a
             much
             celebrated
             and
             famous
             place
             ,
             whereat
             the
             adventurous
             Areillana
             gave
             the
             first
             beginnings
             to
             the
             whole
             discovery
             .
             In
             going
             down
             ,
             the
             course
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             served
             them
             for
             Sailes
             ,
             and
             the
             Marriners
             or
             Rowers
             lesse
             troubled
             with
             work
             rested
             them
             often
             ,
             and
             sleeped
             sweetly
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             murmuring
             noise
             the
             billows
             made
             ,
             that
             pusht
             forward
             their
             Ships
             .
             All
             the
             Peoples
             also
             and
             Nations
             upon
             the
             bankes
             ,
             are
             pretty
             favourable
             to
             it
             :
             commerce
             of
             victuals
             and
             of
             merchandise
             ,
             being
             opened
             to
             it
             on
             all
             sides
             .
             The
             civility
             of
             the
             Homagues
             
             appeared
             to
             it
             very
             pleasant
             ;
             and
             the
             generosity
             of
             the
             Yorimans
             ,
             seemed
             yet
             more
             obliging
             .
             But
             arriving
             at
             Rio-negro
             the
             twelfth
             of
             October
             1639
             ,
             the
             undiscreet
             greediness
             of
             the
             Portugalls
             stays
             the
             course
             and
             happiness
             of
             these
             civilities
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             own
             good
             voyage
             .
             The
             Portugalls
             could
             get
             no
             riches
             in
             Brasile
             ,
             but
             by
             the
             number
             of
             their
             slaves
             ;
             and
             the
             Souldiers
             being
             angry
             for
             having
             gained
             nothing
             in
             all
             this
             long
             expedition
             ,
             force
             the
             Captain-major
             to
             leave
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazone
             ,
             and
             to
             enter
             into
             that
             of
             Rio-negro
             ,
             to
             take
             from
             them
             there
             by
             force
             of
             Arms
             their
             slaves
             ,
             which
             are
             in
             great
             multitudes
             among
             the
             Nations
             that
             inhabit
             on
             that
             River
             .
             The
             Sails
             were
             already
             spread
             ,
             and
             the
             East
             wind
             blew
             on
             their
             poup
             ,
             and
             the
             fear
             of
             an
             unbridled
             licence
             made
             many
             fear
             a
             greater
             change
             ;
             when
             Father
             
               Christopher
               d'Acogna
            
             a
             Spanish
             Jesuite
             ,
             pushed
             on
             by
             an
             ardent
             zeal
             to
             see
             the
             accomplishment
             of
             so
             long
             and
             hazardous
             an
             enterprize
             ,
             presents
             himself
             to
             the
             Generall
             
               Pedro
               Texeira
            
             ,
             and
             gives
             him
             a
             protestation
             written
             and
             sealed
             with
             his
             own
             hand
             ,
             as
             on
             the
             behalf
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             interest
             of
             the
             Catholick
             King
             :
             and
             exhorts
             him
             ,
             to
             remove
             the
             Souldiers
             from
             
             their
             resolution
             by
             his
             Authority
             ,
             or
             to
             command
             absolutely
             to
             strike
             Sail
             ,
             for
             returning
             to
             the
             course
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
             This
             action
             so
             vigorously
             undertaken
             ,
             and
             worthy
             of
             praise
             ,
             deserved
             to
             see
             no
             worse
             success
             ,
             than
             presently
             it
             did
             :
             the
             Sails
             struck
             ,
             the
             Souldiers
             in
             silence
             ,
             the
             Mariners
             obedient
             ,
             the
             Ships
             carried
             along
             again
             by
             the
             currant
             of
             the
             great
             River
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XLVIII
             .
             
               Of
               the
               arrivall
               of
               the
               Fleet
               at
            
             Brasile
             .
          
           
             AFter
             the
             Portugalls
             of
             the
             Fleet
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             had
             lost
             the
             sight
             of
             the
             higher
             lands
             of
             the
             point
             of
             the
             Comanares
             on
             the
             great
             and
             famous
             mouth
             of
             Rio-negro
             ,
             which
             seemed
             to
             themselves
             to
             run
             back
             from
             them
             ;
             visited
             also
             in
             their
             passage
             the
             warlike
             and
             valiant
             Nation
             of
             the
             Topinambes
             ,
             in
             the
             fashions
             that
             we
             have
             before
             described
             ;
             and
             heard
             in
             these
             places
             (
             as
             before
             the
             Spaniards
             of
             Areillana
             had
             done
             )
             the
             rare
             and
             pleasant
             tales
             or
             fables
             of
             the
             Amazones
             (
             which
             we
             reserve
             to
             the
             Chapter
             following
             ,
             to
             give
             you
             an
             account
             
             of
             them
             )
             the
             deep
             Bosphore
             ,
             (
             into
             which
             the
             waters
             of
             the
             great
             River
             ,
             and
             of
             all
             the
             others
             that
             augment
             it
             ,
             shut
             up
             themselves
             into
             one
             strait
             Channell
             of
             about
             a
             good
             quarter
             of
             a
             League
             )
             gives
             them
             for
             the
             second
             time
             a
             free
             and
             sure
             passage
             ;
             that
             so
             following
             out
             their
             navigation
             with
             the
             like
             felicity
             ,
             but
             yet
             receiving
             from
             the
             T●payses
             the
             testimony
             of
             a
             mutuall
             good
             will
             ,
             they
             might
             finally
             arrive
             at
             the
             Town
             of
             Para
             in
             Brasile
             ,
             the
             twelfth
             of
             December
             1639
             ,
             as
             they
             did
             :
             but
             with
             so
             much
             glory
             and
             reputation
             not
             only
             to
             the
             Captain-major
             
               Pedro
               Texeira
            
             ,
             but
             also
             the
             Portugall
             Officers
             and
             Souldiers
             of
             this
             famous
             expedition
             ,
             that
             their
             memories
             ingraven
             on
             tables
             of
             brass
             ,
             shall
             no
             less
             endure
             in
             ages
             to
             come
             ,
             than
             the
             great
             Amazone
             shall
             in
             America
             .
             And
             forasmuch
             as
             Father
             
               Christopher
               d'Acogna
            
             ,
             and
             Father
             Andrew
             of
             Artieda
             ,
             both
             Spaniards
             and
             Jesuits
             ,
             were
             deputed
             by
             the
             Royall
             audience
             of
             Kito
             to
             assist
             in
             the
             name
             of
             the
             Catholick
             King
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Crown
             of
             Castill
             ,
             to
             this
             important
             discovery
             ,
             and
             no
             less
             renowned
             navigation
             ;
             as
             also
             thereafter
             to
             go
             into
             Spain
             ,
             to
             give
             an
             account
             of
             all
             to
             the
             Counsell
             of
             the
             Indies
             :
             these
             two
             religious
             Fathers
             
             heap'd
             with
             honour
             and
             praise
             ,
             failed
             not
             to
             go
             there
             1640
             ,
             where
             after
             they
             had
             laid
             out
             in
             the
             presence
             of
             the
             King
             himself
             
               Don
               Philip
            
             the
             fourth
             ,
             the
             greatnesses
             and
             marvells
             of
             the
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ;
             as
             also
             the
             glory
             and
             importance
             of
             such
             a
             conquest
             ;
             Father
             d'Acogna
             presently
             published
             all
             the
             circumstances
             ,
             and
             remarks
             that
             he
             had
             made
             ,
             in
             a
             very
             short
             work
             ;
             from
             which
             we
             drew
             the
             better
             part
             of
             this
             our
             Book
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             XLIX
             .
             
               Of
               the
            
             Amazones
             of
             America
             .
          
           
             THat
             Asia
             may
             not
             vaunt
             her self
             of
             her
             reports
             of
             Amazones
             ,
             whether
             true
             ,
             or
             fabulous
             ,
             America
             yeelds
             nothing
             to
             her
             in
             this
             point
             .
             Let
             not
             the
             fields
             of
             Themiscyra
             triumph
             any
             more
             in
             the
             renown
             of
             her
             famous
             women
             ;
             the
             Province
             of
             Apanta
             is
             no
             less
             famous
             for
             her
             heroick
             Dames
             .
             Neither
             let
             the
             River
             of
             Thermodoon
             be
             puft
             up
             any
             more
             with
             the
             glory
             of
             its
             conqueresses
             ;
             seeing
             the
             River
             of
             Coruris
             is
             as
             famous
             for
             her
             fair
             she-Warriors
             .
             His
             famous
             sources
             are
             honoured
             with
             their
             rich
             habitations
             .
             
             The
             Mountains
             of
             Guyana
             ,
             fertile
             in
             mines
             of
             gold
             and
             silver
             are
             their
             confines
             on
             the
             North-side
             ;
             and
             the
             Mount
             Yacamabe
             ,
             proud
             above
             all
             the
             rest
             ,
             is
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             their
             fair
             and
             fertile
             Valleys
             .
             The
             first
             notice
             that
             the
             Spaniards
             had
             of
             them
             ,
             came
             to
             them
             from
             the
             generous
             Prince
             Aparia
             1541
             ,
             who
             told
             the
             first
             wonders
             of
             them
             to
             the
             adventurous
             Francis
             of
             Areillana
             :
             and
             the
             consent
             of
             all
             the
             Nations
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ,
             in
             favours
             of
             this
             report
             ,
             as
             true
             ,
             hath
             from
             them
             given
             the
             name
             for
             ever
             to
             this
             admirable
             River
             .
             For
             all
             this
             ,
             the
             guesses
             at
             this
             matter
             are
             not
             very
             certain
             ;
             but
             the
             famous
             actions
             of
             the
             goodly
             Ladyes
             of
             America
             ,
             during
             the
             warrs
             of
             all
             these
             conquests
             ,
             do
             not
             a
             little
             confirm
             the
             appearances
             thereof
             .
             For
             these
             have
             often
             appeared
             in
             Arms
             at
             the
             head
             of
             Battalioes
             ,
             as
             is
             to
             be
             seen
             in
             the
             Histories
             of
             Acosta
             ,
             and
             of
             Herrera
             :
             and
             in
             fighting
             with
             their
             own
             hands
             ,
             they
             have
             sustained
             the
             assaults
             of
             the
             enemies
             ,
             and
             oblieged
             the
             Indians
             at
             the
             same
             time
             to
             imitate
             the
             effects
             of
             their
             great
             courage
             .
             The
             valour
             of
             that
             noble
             Lass
             which
             1536
             ,
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             Bogota
             ,
             slew
             five
             Spaniards
             with
             arrows
             shot
             from
             her
             own
             hands
             ,
             before
             
             she
             fell
             dead
             at
             their
             feet
             ,
             will
             for
             ever
             be
             renowned
             .
             And
             those
             goodly
             and
             great
             women
             ,
             which
             presented
             themselves
             armed
             on
             the
             head
             of
             the
             Americans
             ,
             upon
             the
             Bank
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ,
             near
             to
             Coruris
             (
             as
             we
             have
             related
             before
             )
             gave
             much
             credit
             to
             the
             first
             opinion
             of
             these
             Amazones
             of
             the
             new-world
             .
             This
             is
             not
             yet
             enough
             for
             us
             to
             perswade
             our selves
             of
             the
             truth
             of
             these
             valiant
             and
             warlick
             Ladies
             :
             the
             royall
             audience
             also
             of
             Kito
             ,
             hath
             sometimes
             received
             considerable
             informations
             of
             it
             .
             That
             audience
             a
             long
             time
             applyed
             its
             cares
             to
             have
             sound
             out
             the
             knowledge
             of
             these
             Amazones
             ;
             and
             the
             depositions
             that
             to
             them
             were
             made
             thereof
             at
             sundry
             times
             ,
             agree
             all
             in
             this
             point
             :
             That
             in
             the
             vast
             fields
             of
             this
             America
             ,
             there
             was
             one
             Region
             peopled
             with
             
               warrioresse
               women
            
             ,
             which
             living
             and
             maintaining
             themselves
             without
             men
             ,
             had
             no
             communication
             with
             them
             ,
             but
             on
             some
             certain
             dayes
             of
             the
             year
             ,
             to
             have
             by
             them
             children
             ,
             or
             daughters
             like
             unto
             themselves
             .
             And
             in
             the
             Town
             of
             Pasto
             subject
             to
             the
             same
             audience
             ,
             an
             Indian
             woman
             gave
             assurance
             ,
             that
             she
             her self
             had
             been
             in
             their
             Countrey
             ;
             and
             by
             her
             other
             Relations
             agreed
             with
             the
             precedent
             
             circumstances
             .
             But
             the
             most
             singular
             testimonies
             of
             it
             ,
             that
             have
             been
             given
             to
             the
             Spaniards
             ,
             or
             Portugalls
             ,
             was
             1639
             in
             descending
             the
             great
             River
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             great
             habitation
             of
             the
             Topinambes
             ,
             and
             East-point
             of
             their
             famous
             Isle
             .
             This
             Nation
             as
             generous
             as
             valiant
             ,
             was
             never
             wearied
             with
             reciting
             the
             wonders
             of
             these
             Amazones
             .
             They
             spoke
             of
             their
             policy
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             valour
             ,
             much
             like
             what
             the
             Grecians
             and
             Latines
             have
             sung
             of
             the
             policy
             and
             valour
             of
             the
             Amazones
             of
             Asia
             .
             And
             not
             to
             stay
             longer
             on
             this
             discourse
             ,
             be
             it
             true
             ,
             or
             be
             it
             fabulous
             ,
             I
             will
             conclude
             it
             with
             this
             renowned
             name
             of
             the
             Comapoyares
             ,
             under
             which
             the
             Amazones
             of
             America
             are
             every
             where
             known
             only
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             L.
             
               Of
               the
               qualities
               of
               the
               Air
               and
               grounds
               of
               the
               great
            
             Amazone
             .
          
           
             BUt
             can
             one
             thus
             put
             an
             end
             to
             this
             work
             ,
             without
             doing
             incomparable
             wrong
             to
             the
             River
             of
             the
             Amazones
             ?
             Can
             one
             pass
             with
             silence
             ,
             and
             without
             reproach
             
             the
             rest
             of
             so
             many
             wonderfull
             advantages
             ,
             and
             prerogatives
             ;
             or
             without
             injustice
             the
             admirable
             effects
             ,
             wherewith
             prodigall
             nature
             honours
             and
             glorifies
             it
             ?
             No
             certainly
             ;
             and
             contrary
             to
             my
             first
             purpose
             ,
             I
             consent
             to
             pass
             lightly
             over
             again
             these
             matters
             ,
             howsoever
             pleasant
             and
             provoking
             to
             stay
             more
             upon
             them
             ;
             referring
             to
             the
             weak
             curiosity
             of
             an
             ability
             limited
             and
             given
             to
             such
             things
             ,
             the
             vain
             research
             of
             Animals
             ,
             Fruits
             ,
             and
             Plants
             ,
             of
             this
             unmeasurable
             Countrey
             .
             In
             which
             neither
             doth
             the
             heat
             ever
             choak
             ;
             nor
             the
             cold
             ever
             seaze
             it
             ;
             the
             Air
             is
             alwayes
             alike
             ,
             because
             its
             Winter
             (
             as
             in
             the
             rest
             of
             America
             )
             proceeds
             of
             no
             other
             occasion
             ,
             but
             from
             inundations
             ,
             which
             hinder
             the
             productions
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             or
             retard
             them
             for
             some
             Moneths
             :
             and
             not
             from
             any
             recesse
             or
             withdrawing
             of
             the
             Sun
             ,
             which
             every
             day
             there
             riseth
             ,
             and
             setteth
             at
             the
             same
             hour
             .
             What
             marvels
             should
             not
             one
             be
             perswaded
             of
             ,
             from
             an
             heaven
             so
             benign
             and
             favourable
             ?
             Let
             none
             after
             this
             wonder
             ,
             to
             know
             that
             the
             consecrated
             Hosties
             of
             the
             Father
             Jesuites
             for
             their
             Mass
             ,
             are
             kept
             fresh
             and
             sound
             during
             so
             long
             a
             voyage
             ,
             on
             the
             waters
             (
             which
             comes
             not
             so
             to
             pass
             elsewhere
             )
             and
             let
             none
             refuse
             any
             
             longer
             to
             believe
             ,
             that
             Flies
             and
             other
             such
             troublesome
             Beasts
             ,
             are
             not
             met
             with
             in
             these
             places
             ,
             as
             in
             others
             under
             the
             torride
             Zone
             ,
             where
             they
             are
             so
             ordinary
             ,
             and
             every
             where
             so
             many
             ,
             that
             the
             abode
             in
             those
             places
             would
             be
             much
             happier
             ,
             were
             it
             not
             for
             the
             inconveniences
             that
             these
             very
             Beasts
             infest
             them
             with
             .
             But
             what
             ought
             the
             land
             and
             grounds
             then
             of
             so
             noble
             a
             climate
             to
             be
             ?
             Doth
             not
             this
             also
             agree
             to
             all
             the
             other
             prerogatives
             of
             this
             admirable
             River
             ?
             And
             as
             the
             base
             and
             foundation
             of
             the
             happinesses
             of
             all
             these
             Provinces
             ,
             must
             not
             this
             also
             be
             equally
             goodly
             and
             rich
             in
             all
             its
             parts
             ?
             All
             its
             banks
             are
             enriched
             and
             crowned
             with
             fair
             trees
             alwayes
             green
             ,
             and
             of
             incomparable
             greatness
             .
             The
             field
             and
             champany
             grounds
             are
             large
             ,
             and
             all
             covered
             with
             flowers
             diverse
             and
             variable
             .
             Every
             where
             its
             Valleys
             are
             enameled
             with
             green
             ,
             and
             alwayes
             moist
             .
             Its
             hills
             and
             mountains
             are
             all
             loaded
             with
             woods
             and
             forrests
             pleasant
             to
             behold
             .
             Plants
             and
             Simples
             are
             every
             where
             in
             great
             abundance
             ;
             also
             honey
             of
             Bees
             ,
             that
             serves
             both
             for
             nourishment
             and
             for
             medicine
             :
             and
             which
             is
             yet
             more
             marvellous
             ,
             a
             sort
             of
             oyl
             so
             excellent
             ,
             that
             it
             no
             wayes
             gives
             place
             to
             
             the
             balm
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             most
             precious
             of
             the
             ancient
             world
             ,
             for
             all
             sorts
             of
             hurts
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             LI.
             
               Of
               the
               fertility
               of
               the
               earth
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               waters
               ,
               for
               food
               to
               men
               .
            
          
           
             AS
             to
             the
             most
             ordinary
             aliments
             ,
             that
             serve
             for
             nourishing
             innumerable
             Nations
             ,
             and
             infinite
             peoples
             ,
             that
             labour
             the
             unmeasurable
             fields
             of
             the
             Realm
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             ;
             the
             first
             in
             order
             of
             nature
             are
             diverse
             and
             various
             fruits
             ,
             which
             the
             happy
             and
             rich
             grounds
             of
             those
             Countries
             bring
             forth
             ;
             like
             indeed
             for
             kind
             to
             those
             of
             all
             the
             rest
             of
             America
             ;
             but
             more
             excellent
             ,
             ingreater
             plenty
             ,
             and
             of
             better
             substance
             .
             After
             them
             ,
             follow
             Fish
             ,
             in
             so
             great
             abundance
             and
             multitude
             ,
             not
             only
             in
             the
             great
             River
             ,
             and
             others
             less
             ,
             but
             also
             in
             an
             infinite
             of
             Lakes
             ,
             which
             the
             ordinary
             debordments
             and
             overflowings
             of
             their
             Rivers
             ,
             make
             in
             the
             neighbouring
             plains
             ;
             that
             one
             needs
             never
             fail
             to
             take
             them
             with
             their
             hands
             only
             ;
             and
             yet
             more
             easily
             ,
             when
             by
             retreat
             of
             the
             Rivers
             ,
             the
             Lakes
             are
             dried
             up
             by
             
             the
             heat
             of
             the
             Sun.
             In
             the
             great
             diversity
             of
             so
             many
             Fishes
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             new
             world
             ,
             the
             Sea-Veal
             ,
             or
             Seal
             ,
             and
             the
             Tortoise
             ,
             are
             not
             the
             least
             considerable
             ,
             whether
             for
             greatness
             ,
             substance
             ,
             or
             delicacy
             .
             And
             the
             fishing
             of
             them
             is
             wonderfull
             ,
             and
             prodigious
             ,
             as
             also
             the
             way
             to
             keep
             them
             both
             ,
             long
             time
             alive
             .
             Lastly
             comes
             the
             hunting
             of
             Venison
             ,
             as
             of
             all
             other
             lesser
             prey
             ,
             or
             game
             ,
             whether
             with
             Hair
             ,
             or
             Feather
             ,
             in
             the
             same
             abundance
             ,
             and
             with
             the
             same
             ease
             ,
             that
             in
             all
             other
             parts
             of
             America
             .
             But
             the
             Partridges
             ,
             and
             the
             Hens
             of
             it
             ,
             came
             from
             Peru
             ,
             whither
             the
             Spaniards
             had
             at
             first
             carried
             them
             .
             And
             for
             a
             witness
             infallible
             of
             all
             these
             admirable
             circumstances
             ,
             we
             need
             but
             to
             alledge
             the
             example
             of
             the
             Camp
             of
             the
             Portugalls
             :
             which
             lodging
             every
             day
             on
             land
             ,
             during
             so
             long
             a
             voyage
             ,
             as
             well
             in
             going
             up
             ,
             as
             coming
             down
             the
             great
             Amazon
             ,
             never
             failed
             to
             send
             presently
             the
             half
             of
             their
             men
             ,
             some
             of
             them
             to
             hunt
             with
             dogs
             ;
             some
             of
             them
             to
             fish
             with
             arrows
             (
             the
             other
             half
             remaining
             to
             set
             up
             their
             hutts
             ,
             and
             draw
             their
             trenches
             )
             whence
             they
             returned
             in
             a
             few
             hours
             so
             loaded
             with
             fish
             ,
             and
             lesser
             beasts
             of
             prey
             of
             all
             sorts
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             Camp
             had
             sufficient
             ,
             and
             in
             abundance
             .
             But
             as
             
             we
             have
             spoken
             enough
             of
             the
             bread
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             meal
             made
             in
             those
             parts
             ,
             of
             the
             Yoka
             ,
             of
             Mays
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Mandioka
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             rest
             of
             America
             ;
             we
             shall
             adde
             only
             here
             ,
             that
             their
             drinks
             are
             likewise
             made
             of
             them
             ,
             which
             serve
             them
             as
             well
             ordinarily
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             common
             rejoycings
             of
             all
             those
             peoples
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             LII
             .
             
               Of
               the
               richness
               of
               Trade
               for
               strangers
               .
            
          
           
             FInally
             to
             shut
             up
             and
             make
             an
             end
             of
             this
             work
             ,
             by
             recitall
             of
             the
             great
             riches
             ,
             which
             will
             one
             day
             make
             the
             commerce
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             considerable
             to
             all
             Europe
             ;
             we
             shall
             begin
             (
             without
             speaking
             more
             of
             gold
             and
             silver
             ,
             or
             of
             its
             Rivers
             and
             Mountains
             to
             the
             same
             purpose
             )
             from
             the
             abundance
             ,
             and
             quality
             of
             its
             woods
             ,
             and
             trees
             ,
             the
             most
             excellent
             in
             all
             the
             world
             ,
             and
             the
             best
             to
             build
             whole
             Fleets
             with
             ,
             and
             Ships
             as
             great
             ,
             as
             any
             have
             been
             in
             the
             Ocean
             ;
             because
             all
             the
             Banks
             ,
             as
             well
             of
             the
             great
             ,
             as
             of
             other
             lesser
             Rivers
             ,
             are
             all
             covered
             with
             Cedars
             so
             fair
             ,
             and
             great
             ,
             that
             
             they
             surprize
             the
             sight
             of
             such
             as
             consider
             them
             ;
             Father
             d'Acogna
             having
             measured
             himself
             one
             of
             the
             greatest
             of
             them
             ,
             of
             more
             than
             six
             ells
             in
             circumference
             .
             Next
             to
             them
             we
             shall
             mention
             Ebeny
             ,
             and
             the
             wood
             of
             Brasile
             ,
             both
             so
             precious
             ,
             and
             so
             much
             sought
             after
             ;
             which
             are
             so
             perfect
             there
             ,
             and
             in
             so
             great
             multitude
             in
             all
             these
             fields
             ,
             that
             they
             can
             never
             be
             spent
             .
             In
             the
             third
             place
             ,
             we
             shall
             mention
             the
             Cocos
             tree
             ,
             so
             thick
             along
             all
             those
             Banks
             ,
             that
             the
             very
             Hutts
             of
             the
             Camp
             of
             the
             Portugalls
             ,
             were
             made
             of
             no
             other
             than
             of
             the
             fair
             branches
             of
             these
             .
             They
             bear
             the
             best
             fruit
             of
             any
             in
             all
             the
             Indies
             ;
             and
             with
             a
             little
             travail
             they
             can
             yeeld
             each
             of
             them
             ,
             seven
             or
             eight
             crowns
             every
             year
             .
             After
             these
             comes
             Tobacco
             ,
             which
             would
             be
             better
             ,
             and
             more
             abundant
             in
             all
             those
             Provinces
             ,
             than
             in
             all
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             if
             it
             were
             followed
             here
             with
             a
             happy
             culture
             .
             After
             this
             Canes
             the
             Sugar
             ,
             whereof
             more
             excellent
             comes
             ,
             and
             more
             abundant
             than
             elsewhere
             ,
             would
             never
             fail
             ,
             nor
             dry
             up
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             inundations
             ,
             which
             keep
             the
             fields
             alwayes
             fresh
             ,
             by
             the
             number
             of
             Lakes
             ,
             which
             are
             there
             made
             thereby
             ;
             and
             whereby
             milles
             and
             other
             engines
             to
             that
             purpose
             ,
             might
             
             easily
             be
             made
             ,
             by
             the
             conveniency
             of
             the
             woods
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             running
             waters
             of
             so
             many
             Rivers
             ;
             whence
             it
             would
             come
             to
             pass
             ,
             that
             the
             work
             about
             it
             would
             be
             less
             expensive
             ,
             and
             the
             revenue
             by
             it
             would
             be
             greater
             than
             ordinary
             .
             Finally
             comes
             the
             Cotton
             to
             be
             spoken
             of
             ,
             which
             is
             here
             every
             where
             in
             extreme
             great
             abundance
             .
             Then
             the
             Orock
             ,
             which
             dyes
             Scarlet
             of
             a
             prefect
             good
             colour
             .
             Lastly
             the
             Pyte
             ,
             whereof
             Thread
             or
             Yarn
             most
             excellent
             is
             made
             ,
             exceeding
             fine
             and
             delicate
             ,
             yet
             very
             common
             in
             all
             the
             Provinces
             of
             the
             great
             Amazone
             .
             And
             for
             conclusion
             ,
             here
             are
             the
             Fistulecane
             ,
             the
             Salsaparilla
             ,
             the
             Oyls
             like
             to
             the
             most
             precious
             Baumes
             ;
             the
             Gums
             ,
             and
             odoriferous
             Rozins
             ,
             and
             other
             like
             riches
             ,
             which
             will
             be
             discovered
             in
             time
             coming
             ,
             in
             these
             happy
             Countries
             ,
             to
             make
             this
             renowned
             commerce
             alwayes
             greater
             ,
             and
             more
             considerable
             .
          
        
         
           FINIS
           .
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           A
           first
           Advertisement
           to
           Geographers
           ,
           upon
           the
           Longitudes
           of
           America
           .
        
         
           FOrasmuch
           as
           the
           knowledge
           of
           the
           Longitudes
           of
           the
           Globe
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           is
           as
           important
           ,
           as
           necessary
           ,
           in
           the
           Theory
           ,
           and
           practice
           of
           Geography
           ,
           of
           the
           Sphere
           ,
           of
           Astronomy
           ,
           of
           Navigation
           ,
           of
           Astrology
           ;
           it
           must
           not
           be
           thought
           strange
           ,
           if
           so
           many
           excellent
           persons
           ,
           and
           knowing
           men
           have
           ever
           bended
           themselves
           to
           establish
           these
           the
           most
           perfectly
           ;
           or
           ,
           to
           say
           better
           ,
           the
           least
           imperfectly
           ,
           that
           was
           possible
           to
           them
           .
           But
           as
           the
           difficulties
           of
           it
           have
           never
           been
           well
           overcome
           ,
           at
           least
           to
           the
           Use
           and
           Application
           ;
           so
           I
           cannot
           now
           consent
           to
           the
           last
           Cart
           ,
           and
           recentest
           Topography
           of
           South
           -
           America
           ,
           touching
           this
           Longitude
           :
           in
           which
           Cart
           there
           is
           but
           fifty
           eight
           degrees
           ,
           and
           twenty
           minutes
           of
           difference
           between
           
             Port
             Vieux
          
           (
           or
           old
           )
           and
           Cape
           St.
           Augustine
           ,
           where
           South
           -
           America
           is
           broadest
           ,
           and
           longest
           .
           For
           as
           before
           ,
           the
           Spaniards
           made
           its
           breadth
           but
           of
           fifty
           one
           degrees
           ,
           and
           the
           Portugalls
           ,
           of
           fifty
           five
           ,
           (
           both
           the
           one
           ,
           and
           the
           other
           being
           moved
           thereto
           by
           reasons
           of
           State
           and
           policy
           ,
           because
           of
           the
           
           debate
           about
           the
           Moluccoes
           )
           and
           after
           them
           ,
           the
           moderner
           observers
           of
           this
           difference
           of
           Longitudes
           ,
           extend
           it
           to
           fifty
           eight
           ,
           as
           we
           have
           said
           :
           so
           this
           change
           could
           not
           have
           been
           made
           ,
           but
           by
           observation
           of
           Eclipses
           made
           under
           divers
           Meridians
           .
           Whence
           it
           follows
           also
           ,
           that
           this
           new
           Longitude
           of
           the
           West-coasts
           of
           America
           ,
           is
           not
           yet
           exact
           enough
           ,
           because
           of
           the
           differences
           ,
           that
           are
           ordinarily
           found
           in
           such
           astronomicall
           Observations
           ;
           whether
           through
           the
           fault
           and
           littleness
           of
           the
           instruments
           ,
           or
           the
           negligence
           of
           the
           Observers
           ,
           who
           seek
           the
           hours
           and
           minutes
           of
           them
           ,
           by
           Astrolabes
           ,
           and
           not
           by
           the
           way
           of
           Sphericall
           Triangles
           :
           to
           say
           nothing
           of
           the
           difficulties
           about
           Parallaxes
           in
           the
           Eclipses
           of
           the
           Sun
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Phenombres
           in
           the
           Eclipse
           of
           the
           Moon
           ,
           which
           hinder
           the
           taking
           exactly
           of
           the
           time
           of
           her
           immersion
           ,
           and
           emersion
           ,
           under
           and
           out
           of
           the
           shadow
           of
           the
           Earth
           .
        
         
           But
           to
           let
           it
           be
           seen
           ,
           that
           I
           am
           not
           the
           only
           man
           ,
           that
           take
           to
           my self
           this
           licence
           ,
           to
           suspect
           and
           give
           little
           trust
           to
           the
           exactness
           of
           these
           Observations
           ,
           so
           as
           thereby
           definitively
           to
           regulate
           Longitudes
           ,
           with
           neglect
           of
           itinerary
           distances
           ,
           which
           (
           being
           well
           managed
           )
           often
           supply
           in
           some
           sort
           
           the
           others
           too
           great
           incertitude
           :
           I
           shall
           here
           set
           down
           the
           examples
           ,
           which
           
             John
             Kepler
          
           ;
           that
           famous
           Astronomer
           ,
           thought
           good
           himself
           to
           set
           down
           at
           the
           end
           of
           the
           Catalogue
           of
           the
           Towns
           ,
           of
           the
           Rodolphine
           Tables
           ,
           that
           he
           might
           show
           the
           varieties
           of
           the
           difference
           of
           Longitudes
           ,
           found
           out
           by
           diverse
           Observations
           of
           the
           same
           Eclipses
           ,
           between
           the
           Meridians
           of
           Rome
           ,
           and
           Norimberg
           ,
           as
           followeth
           .
           Regiomontanus
           makes
           it
           of
           thirty
           six
           minutes
           of
           an
           hour
           ,
           or
           of
           nine
           degrees
           of
           the
           equator
           ;
           and
           with
           him
           ,
           many
           more
           .
           Stafler
           ,
           and
           Verner
           of
           eighteen
           minutes
           of
           an
           hour
           ,
           or
           of
           font
           degrees
           ,
           and
           an
           half
           .
           
             Shoner
             ,
             Mercator
          
           ,
           and
           Hondius
           ,
           regulate
           it
           to
           twelve
           minutes
           of
           an
           hour
           ,
           or
           to
           three
           degrees
           .
           And
           leaving
           others
           ,
           Kepler
           himself
           hath
           reduced
           it
           to
           four
           minutes
           of
           an
           hour
           ,
           or
           to
           one
           degree
           only
           .
           So
           that
           the
           varieties
           of
           the
           difference
           of
           these
           two
           Meridians
           ,
           in
           so
           little
           a
           distance
           ,
           as
           they
           stand
           in
           ,
           coming
           to
           eight
           whole
           degrees
           ;
           with
           how
           much
           more
           reason
           may
           we
           doubt
           of
           the
           true
           Longitude
           of
           the
           West-coasts
           of
           the
           South
           and
           North
           -
           America
           ?
           Now
           these
           diversities
           are
           no
           less
           frequent
           every
           where
           else
           ,
           as
           may
           be
           verified
           by
           the
           difference
           of
           the
           Meridians
           of
           the
           
           same
           Rome
           ,
           and
           of
           Toledo
           in
           Spain
           ,
           set
           down
           in
           Authors
           of
           Astronomy
           ,
           and
           Geography
           .
           For
           Kepler
           the
           last
           and
           painfullest
           of
           all
           ,
           reduces
           it
           to
           sixteen
           degrees
           ;
           and
           according
           to
           others
           ,
           it
           amounts
           often
           to
           thirty
           .
           Which
           notwithstanding
           we
           have
           made
           an
           essay
           to
           remedy
           (
           as
           much
           as
           the
           matter
           doth
           permit
           )
           in
           our
           Geographicall
           Tables
           ,
           by
           more
           exact
           cares
           and
           researches
           ,
           than
           those
           of
           this
           curious
           Author
           Kepler
           himself
           ;
           which
           being
           not
           yet
           Printed
           ,
           yet
           
             Monsieur
             Morin
          
           the
           Kings
           professor
           of
           the
           Mathematicks
           ,
           hath
           not
           thought
           ill
           to
           draw
           out
           of
           them
           ,
           that
           which
           he
           hath
           set
           at
           the
           beginning
           of
           his
           Abridgement
           of
           the
           Rodolphine
           Tables
           ,
           as
           preferable
           to
           any
           other
           Catalogue
           of
           Towns
           ,
           that
           he
           could
           then
           meet
           with
           to
           serve
           his
           purpose
           .
        
         
           After
           these
           Reasons
           brought
           ,
           I
           would
           now
           willingly
           consent
           ,
           that
           the
           Longitude
           of
           the
           West-coast
           of
           America
           were
           made
           shorter
           by
           ten
           degrees
           at
           least
           ,
           that
           the
           difference
           of
           the
           Longitudes
           of
           the
           Town
           of
           Kito
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Point
           of
           Zaparara
           were
           made
           of
           fourty
           seven
           degrees
           ,
           and
           so
           the
           distance
           from
           the
           one
           to
           the
           other
           ,
           in
           a
           straight
           Line
           ,
           of
           nine
           hundred
           fourty
           Geometricall
           Leagues
           .
           And
           this
           would
           agree
           better
           ,
           
           and
           not
           be
           so
           far
           different
           from
           the
           total
           number
           of
           measures
           observed
           in
           the
           navigation
           of
           the
           great
           River
           of
           the
           Amazones
           ,
           as
           is
           to
           be
           seen
           in
           the
           eighth
           Chapter
           of
           this
           Book
           ;
           through
           all
           which
           (
           that
           we
           might
           change
           nothing
           ,
           out
           of
           our
           own
           opinion
           )
           we
           have
           set
           down
           the
           Longitudes
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           ordinary
           and
           recentest
           Carts
           of
           South
           -
           America
           .
           But
           surely
           it
           ought
           to
           be
           made
           broader
           by
           Geographers
           ,
           that
           shall
           go
           over
           it
           again
           ,
           to
           find
           place
           there
           for
           all
           that
           we
           faithfully
           relate
           unto
           them
           in
           this
           work
           ,
           that
           so
           the
           great
           Amazone
           ,
           and
           so
           many
           other
           Rivers
           ,
           that
           run
           unto
           him
           ,
           and
           Provinces
           ,
           that
           are
           discovered
           upon
           them
           ,
           may
           commodiously
           be
           lodged
           ,
           and
           in
           their
           own
           naturall
           extent
           .
           In
           which
           case
           the
           East-coast
           of
           this
           same
           America
           to
           the
           turn
           of
           the
           Cape
           of
           St.
           Augustine
           ,
           should
           be
           kept
           in
           the
           same
           degrees
           and
           minutes
           of
           its
           longitude
           ;
           and
           all
           the
           rest
           from
           thence
           towards
           the
           West
           ,
           augmented
           unto
           ten
           degrees
           ,
           and
           compassed
           in
           the
           just
           and
           fitting
           Geometricall
           proportions
           ,
           as
           well
           in
           regard
           to
           Meridians
           ,
           as
           to
           the
           Longitudes
           .
           And
           the
           same
           ampliation
           being
           made
           over
           North
           -
           America
           ,
           you
           will
           find
           his
           East-coast
           drawn
           back
           by
           four
           or
           five
           degrees
           ,
           conformably
           to
           the
           assurances
           
           that
           the
           first
           English
           gave
           ,
           that
           sail'd
           to
           Virginia
           ;
           and
           to
           the
           report
           of
           
             John
             Laet
          
           in
           his
           third
           Book
           of
           America
           .
           Whereunto
           I
           offer
           my self
           willingly
           to
           contribute
           my
           cares
           and
           studies
           ,
           in
           favours
           of
           such
           ,
           as
           will
           undertake
           it
           ;
           making
           use
           ,
           and
           serving
           my self
           ,
           in
           all
           these
           Geographicall
           procedures
           ,
           with
           the
           precepts
           of
           the
           true
           ,
           and
           new
           doctrine
           of
           the
           eighth
           Book
           of
           my
           
             Geometricall
             Theorems
          
           ,
           Printed
           1654
           ,
           as
           well
           for
           the
           Longitudes
           ,
           as
           itenerary
           distances
           :
           which
           I
           there
           shew
           ,
           that
           they
           ought
           alwayes
           to
           be
           in
           great
           Circles
           ,
           and
           not
           in
           parallells
           ,
           reduced
           to
           certain
           proportions
           .
           Which
           last
           is
           a
           Rule
           altogether
           contrary
           to
           the
           truths
           of
           Geometry
           ,
           however
           Mathematicians
           ,
           and
           Geographers
           ,
           that
           preceeded
           the
           impression
           of
           that
           Book
           ,
           have
           generally
           taught
           the
           Maxime
           of
           it
           ,
           without
           adverting
           ,
           or
           considering
           so
           notable
           an
           errour
           ;
           
             That
             the
             shortest
             distance
             from
             one
             point
             to
             another
             ,
             on
             the
             Globe
             of
             the
             Earth
             ,
             is
             alwayes
             described
             ,
             or
             led
             by
             a
             great
             Circle
             ,
          
           &c.
           
           See
           the
           eighth
           Book
           of
           my
           foresaid
           Theorems
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           A
           second
           Advertisement
           to
           Geographers
           about
           the
           restitution
           of
           Longitudes
           .
        
         
           BUt
           to
           get
           a
           perfecter
           knowledge
           as
           well
           of
           the
           Longitudes
           ,
           that
           fit
           America
           ,
           as
           those
           that
           concern
           the
           East
           -
           Indies
           ;
           we
           have
           resolved
           to
           set
           down
           here
           a
           method
           to
           find
           them
           easily
           by
           the
           motion
           of
           the
           Moon
           ,
           upon
           firm
           land
           ,
           in
           this
           manner
           .
           1.
           
           Draw
           on
           a
           right
           horizontall
           Plain
           ,
           that
           is
           very
           smooth
           and
           white
           ,
           a
           very
           exact
           meridian
           Line
           :
           and
           with
           the
           same
           exactness
           observe
           the
           height
           of
           the
           Pole
           ,
           by
           a
           quadrant
           that
           can
           mark
           minutes
           ,
           and
           if
           possible
           ,
           half
           minutes
           ;
           as
           it
           is
           easie
           now
           to
           get
           such
           an
           one
           ,
           by
           the
           new
           inventions
           of
           dividing
           the
           Alhidades
           of
           it
           .
           2.
           
           On
           the
           night
           of
           the
           full
           Moon
           ,
           take
           the
           horizontall
           height
           of
           a
           fixt
           Star
           ,
           untill
           the
           shadow
           of
           a
           Plummet
           hung
           ,
           made
           by
           the
           Moon
           ,
           shall
           be
           just
           upon
           the
           Meridian
           ;
           but
           with
           this
           caution
           ,
           that
           the
           height
           of
           the
           Star
           observed
           ,
           be
           at
           least
           of
           thirty
           degrees
           ,
           to
           avoid
           refractions
           ;
           and
           that
           the
           same
           Stars
           distance
           from
           the
           Meridian
           be
           reasonable
           enough
           for
           a
           greater
           exactness
           .
           3.
           
           Seek
           the
           true
           distance
           of
           the
           foresaid
           Star
           from
           the
           Meridian
           of
           your
           
           Hemisphere
           by
           this
           Rule
           .
           As
           the
           Rectangle
           contained
           in
           the
           Sinuses
           of
           the
           complement
           of
           the
           elevation
           of
           the
           Pole
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           complement
           of
           the
           declination
           of
           the
           Star
           ,
           is
           to
           the
           quadrat-side
           of
           the
           whole
           Sinuse
           ;
           so
           the
           Rectangle
           contained
           in
           the
           Sinuses
           of
           the
           summe
           or
           totall
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           difference
           of
           the
           half
           of
           the
           complement
           of
           the
           observed
           height
           of
           the
           Star
           ;
           and
           of
           the
           half
           of
           the
           difference
           of
           the
           complement
           of
           the
           declination
           of
           the
           Star
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           complement
           of
           the
           elevation
           of
           the
           Pole
           ,
           is
           unto
           the
           quadrat-side
           of
           the
           Sinuse
           of
           the
           half
           of
           the
           true
           distance
           of
           the
           Star
           from
           the
           Meridian
           .
           But
           if
           the
           declination
           and
           right
           ascension
           of
           the
           Star
           ,
           which
           you
           make
           use
           of
           for
           this
           astronomicall
           Observation
           ,
           be
           not
           set
           down
           to
           your
           hand
           ,
           in
           the
           same
           Table
           of
           its
           longitudes
           and
           latitudes
           ;
           you
           shall
           find
           it
           by
           the
           Rules
           of
           my
           sixth
           Book
           of
           Geometricall
           Theorems
           aforesaid
           ,
           whither
           I
           refer
           you
           .
           4.
           
           Double
           the
           foregoing
           half
           of
           the
           distance
           found
           ,
           and
           substract
           that
           from
           the
           right
           ascension
           of
           the
           Star
           observed
           ,
           if
           it
           be
           in
           the
           Eastern
           part
           of
           the
           heavens
           ;
           but
           adde
           it
           to
           its
           right
           ascension
           ,
           if
           the
           Star
           be
           in
           the
           West
           part
           of
           the
           heavens
           :
           and
           the
           summe
           of
           the
           addition
           ,
           or
           the
           residue
           after
           
           the
           substraction
           ,
           will
           be
           the
           true
           right
           ascension
           of
           the
           Meridian
           of
           the
           Moon
           ,
           in
           degrees
           ,
           minutes
           ,
           and
           seconds
           of
           the
           equator
           .
           5.
           
           In
           the
           Ephemerids
           ,
           or
           in
           the
           Astronomicall
           Tables
           ,
           take
           the
           Node
           of
           the
           Moon
           ascendant
           ,
           or
           descendant
           ,
           in
           signs
           ,
           degrees
           ,
           minutes
           ,
           and
           seconds
           of
           the
           Ecliptick
           according
           to
           the
           hour
           of
           your
           observation
           after
           your
           best
           esteem
           :
           to
           wit
           ,
           that
           which
           is
           nearest
           to
           that
           right
           ascension
           of
           the
           Moon
           ,
           or
           of
           the
           midst
           of
           heaven
           ,
           which
           is
           all
           one
           .
           But
           in
           the
           Rule
           of
           the
           precedent
           Article
           ,
           if
           the
           Pole
           be
           North
           ,
           the
           declination
           also
           of
           the
           fixed
           Star
           must
           be
           Northern
           ;
           and
           contrarily
           .
           6.
           
           With
           the
           same
           right
           ascension
           of
           the
           Moon
           and
           of
           the
           Meridian
           ,
           take
           also
           in
           the
           same
           Tables
           ,
           (
           or
           by
           the
           sixth
           Book
           of
           my
           Theorems
           )
           the
           midst
           of
           heaven
           ,
           in
           signs
           ,
           degrees
           ,
           minutes
           ,
           and
           seconds
           in
           the
           Ecliptick
           ;
           and
           the
           Angle
           of
           the
           Meridian
           and
           of
           the
           Ecliptick
           only
           in
           degrees
           ,
           minutes
           ,
           and
           seconds
           ;
           which
           we
           shall
           alwayes
           hereafter
           call
           
             the
             midst
             of
             heaven
          
           ,
           to
           shun
           a
           longer
           title
           ,
           or
           repetition
           .
           7.
           
           Substract
           from
           the
           
             midst
             of
             heaven
          
           ,
           the
           Node
           of
           the
           Moon
           ;
           or
           from
           the
           Node
           of
           the
           Moon
           ,
           the
           midst
           of
           heaven
           ,
           that
           you
           may
           finde
           alwayes
           lesse
           residue
           than
           ninety
           degrees
           :
           
           and
           this
           distance
           of
           the
           Node
           of
           the
           Moon
           from
           the
           midst
           of
           heaven
           ,
           will
           be
           the
           base
           of
           a
           Sphericall
           Triangle-Obliquangle
           ,
           whereof
           the
           lesser
           Angle
           will
           alwayes
           be
           of
           five
           degrees
           ,
           and
           no
           minutes
           ;
           and
           the
           greater
           Angle
           alwayes
           the
           Angle
           of
           the
           Meridian
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Ecliptick
           of
           the
           foregoing
           Article
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           seventh
           Book
           of
           my
           Theorems
           .
           8.
           
           Seek
           the
           Arch
           of
           the
           Meridian
           contained
           between
           the
           Orbite
           of
           the
           Moon
           and
           the
           Ecliptick
           Circle
           ,
           by
           this
           Rule
           .
           As
           the
           totall
           Sinuse
           ,
           or
           Sine
           ,
           is
           to
           the
           Sine
           of
           the
           distance
           of
           the
           Node
           of
           the
           Moon
           in
           the
           midst
           of
           heaven
           ;
           so
           is
           the
           Sine
           of
           the
           Angle
           of
           five
           degrees
           ,
           to
           the
           Sine
           of
           the
           perpendicular
           .
           And
           as
           the
           totall
           Sine
           ,
           is
           to
           the
           Sine
           of
           the
           complement
           of
           the
           preceding
           distance
           ;
           so
           is
           the
           tangent
           of
           the
           Angle
           of
           five
           degrees
           ,
           to
           the
           tangent
           of
           the
           complement
           of
           the
           Angle
           sought
           for
           .
           9.
           
           Take
           the
           difference
           of
           this
           Angle
           sought
           for
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Angle
           of
           the
           midst
           of
           heaven
           ,
           and
           you
           shall
           have
           the
           second
           Angle
           sought
           for
           ,
           in
           degrees
           ,
           minutes
           ,
           and
           seconds
           .
           Then
           as
           the
           total
           Sine
           is
           to
           the
           Sine
           of
           the
           complement
           of
           the
           second
           Angle
           required
           ;
           so
           the
           tangent
           of
           the
           complement
           of
           the
           precedent
           perpendicular
           ,
           is
           to
           the
           tangent
           of
           
           the
           complement
           of
           the
           Arch
           of
           the
           Meridian
           ,
           contained
           between
           the
           midst
           of
           heaven
           ,
           and
           the
           center
           of
           the
           Moon
           .
           10.
           
           Finally
           ,
           as
           the
           Sine
           of
           the
           Angle
           of
           five
           degrees
           ,
           is
           to
           the
           Sine
           of
           the
           precedent
           Arch
           of
           the
           Meridian
           ;
           so
           the
           Sine
           of
           the
           Angle
           of
           the
           midst
           of
           heaven
           ,
           is
           to
           the
           Sine
           of
           the
           argument
           of
           the
           latitude
           of
           the
           Moon
           :
           which
           argument
           ,
           you
           must
           substract
           or
           adde
           to
           the
           Node
           of
           the
           Moon
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           disposall
           of
           the
           probleme
           ,
           for
           getting
           in
           signs
           ,
           degrees
           ,
           minutes
           ,
           and
           seconds
           ,
           the
           place
           of
           the
           Moon
           in
           her
           Orbite
           ,
           11.
           
           With
           the
           precedent
           argument
           of
           the
           latitude
           of
           the
           Moon
           ,
           take
           in
           the
           astronomick
           Tables
           its
           reduction
           to
           the
           Ecliptick
           in
           minutes
           and
           seconds
           ,
           that
           you
           may
           either
           substract
           ,
           or
           adde
           the
           same
           (
           according
           to
           the
           title
           of
           the
           same
           Tables
           )
           to
           the
           place
           of
           the
           Moon
           in
           her
           Orbite
           ;
           and
           you
           shall
           have
           the
           true
           longitude
           ,
           or
           the
           true
           place
           of
           the
           Moon
           in
           the
           Ecliptick
           ,
           in
           signs
           ,
           degrees
           ,
           minutes
           ,
           and
           seconds
           .
           As
           also
           in
           the
           same
           Tables
           ,
           her
           true
           latitude
           ,
           (
           if
           you
           desire
           it
           )
           with
           the
           same
           argument
           ;
           seeing
           in
           all
           these
           observations
           ,
           the
           Moon
           is
           alwayes
           near
           her
           copulations
           .
           12.
           
           Compare
           the
           two
           longitudes
           of
           the
           Moon
           ,
           found
           out
           in
           this
           manner
           ,
           on
           the
           same
           night
           ,
           but
           
           in
           diverse
           Meridians
           ,
           and
           take
           the
           difference
           of
           them
           :
           as
           also
           her
           hourly
           motion
           ,
           at
           the
           time
           of
           both
           the
           observations
           ,
           because
           the
           hours
           ,
           minutes
           ,
           and
           seconds
           of
           hours
           ,
           that
           shall
           agree
           to
           the
           degrees
           ,
           minutes
           and
           seconds
           of
           the
           Ecliptick
           of
           that
           difference
           ,
           being
           turned
           into
           degrees
           and
           minutes
           of
           the
           Equator
           ,
           will
           give
           the
           true
           difference
           of
           the
           Longitudes
           contained
           between
           the
           two
           Towns
           ,
           where
           the
           two
           observations
           have
           been
           made
           .
        
         
           Now
           all
           the
           secret
           of
           this
           easie
           and
           new
           method
           ,
           consists
           in
           this
           ,
           that
           the
           center
           of
           the
           body
           of
           the
           Moon
           is
           necessarily
           in
           the
           Circle
           of
           the
           Meridian
           ,
           when
           she
           is
           full
           ,
           or
           very
           near
           her
           opposition
           ,
           the
           shadow
           of
           the
           Plummet-Line
           ,
           coming
           just
           upon
           the
           true
           Meridian-Line
           of
           the
           place
           ,
           where
           the
           observation
           is
           made
           :
           and
           in
           this
           ;
           that
           nothing
           more
           being
           required
           to
           be
           added
           ,
           but
           the
           plain
           heighth
           of
           one
           fixt
           Star
           ,
           and
           without
           Parallax
           ,
           the
           operation
           may
           be
           made
           in
           any
           Moneth
           of
           the
           year
           ,
           without
           staying
           for
           a
           tedious
           restitution
           of
           Astronomy
           ,
           and
           without
           being
           put
           to
           the
           charges
           of
           great
           Instruments
           Horizontall
           and
           Verticall
           ,
           which
           are
           otherwise
           necessary
           to
           the
           practice
           of
           this
           Science
           of
           finding
           out
           longitudes
           ,
           which
           
           
             Nonius
             ,
             Horoncius
             ,
             Frisius
             ,
             Kepler
             ,
          
           and
           Morinus
           the
           perfectlyest
           of
           them
           all
           ,
           have
           painfully
           travelled
           in
           .
           But
           this
           is
           enough
           for
           the
           Geographers
           ,
           and
           Mathematicians
           ,
           that
           are
           dispersed
           over
           the
           world
           ,
           and
           ought
           to
           labour
           in
           the
           restitution
           of
           Geography
           :
           to
           whom
           notwithstanding
           I
           could
           wish
           an
           exacter
           knowledge
           of
           Astronomy
           ,
           and
           of
           Trigonometry
           ,
           that
           they
           might
           the
           more
           easily
           arrive
           at
           the
           glory
           of
           perfecting
           this
           goodly
           science
           ,
           no
           less
           pleasant
           ,
           than
           necessary
           .
        
         
           And
           for
           conclusion
           ,
           we
           shall
           in
           favours
           of
           an
           Astronomer
           ,
           that
           will
           make
           this
           observation
           of
           the
           Moon
           in
           his
           own
           particular
           ,
           that
           he
           may
           compare
           it
           ,
           with
           that
           of
           the
           Rodolphine
           Tables
           ;
           tell
           him
           ,
           that
           the
           longitude
           of
           the
           Town
           of
           Rome
           on
           the
           globe
           of
           the
           earth
           ,
           is
           fourty
           degrees
           ;
           and
           that
           its
           Meridian
           is
           the
           same
           ,
           that
           it
           hath
           in
           the
           Rodolphine
           Tables
           ,
           which
           are
           the
           best
           of
           all
           other
           astronomick
           ones
           ,
           if
           you
           correct
           but
           the
           equations
           of
           the
           Center
           ,
           and
           the
           intervalls
           of
           the
           Planets
           ,
           by
           the
           fifth
           Book
           of
           our
           Geometricall
           Theorems
           .
           As
           also
           for
           the
           choice
           of
           the
           equation
           of
           the
           time
           ,
           if
           you
           use
           that
           equation
           ,
           which
           proceeds
           from
           the
           difference
           of
           the
           two
           right
           ascensions
           ,
           to
           
           wit
           ,
           of
           the
           
             middle
             place
          
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           
             true
             place
          
           of
           the
           Sun
           ,
           in
           the
           Ecliptick
           ;
           because
           that
           amongst
           so
           many
           divers
           and
           various
           equations
           of
           the
           time
           ,
           that
           the
           most
           excellent
           Authors
           have
           yet
           given
           ,
           or
           established
           ,
           that
           alone
           seems
           to
           me
           Geometricall
           and
           exact
           ;
           as
           we
           have
           said
           elsewhere
           ;
           and
           that
           the
           errours
           of
           other
           wayes
           will
           amount
           sometimes
           to
           four
           of
           five
           degrees
           ,
           in
           longitudes
           upon
           the
           earth
           .
           But
           as
           the
           foundation
           of
           that
           doctrine
           depends
           on
           the
           equall
           motion
           of
           the
           Sun
           in
           the
           Ecliptick
           ,
           and
           not
           at
           all
           in
           the
           equator
           ,
           the
           opinion
           that
           we
           have
           of
           it
           ,
           is
           more
           from
           the
           appearances
           of
           truth
           ,
           than
           from
           any
           design
           we
           have
           to
           contradict
           .
        
         
           FINIS
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           A
           Table
           of
           the
           Chapters
           .
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               I.
               
            
             OF
             the
             greatness
             of
             the
             River
             of
             the
             
               Amazones
               .
               page
               1
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               II.
               
            
             Of
             the
             great
             Kingdome
             of
             this
             Amazone
             ,
             if
             reduced
             to
             one
             by
             conquest
             .
             3
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               III.
               
            
             Of
             the
             Nations
             of
             this
             great
             Kingdome
             .
             6
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               IV.
               
            
             Of
             their
             Arms
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             Commerce
             .
             8
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               V.
               
            
             Of
             their
             Customes
             and
             Religion
             .
             9
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               VI.
               
            
             Of
             the
             great
             
               Cordeliere
               .
               11
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               VII
               .
            
             Of
             the
             sources
             of
             the
             great
             River
             of
             the
             
               Amazones
               .
               13
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               VIII
               .
            
             Of
             the
             length
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             course
             of
             this
             River
             .
             15
          
           
           
             
               CHAP.
               IX
               .
            
             Of
             the
             longitudes
             ,
             latitudes
             ,
             and
             measures
             of
             Leagues
             and
             Distances
             observed
             in
             this
             great
             River
             .
             18
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               X.
               
            
             Of
             the
             same
             ,
             continued
             upon
             the
             same
             River
             ,
             unto
             the
             Atlantique-Sea
             .
             23
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XI
               .
            
             Of
             the
             breadth
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Islands
             of
             this
             River
             .
             26
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XII
               .
            
             Of
             its
             depth
             ,
             and
             of
             its
             portableness
             or
             navigation
             .
             28
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XIII
               .
            
             Of
             the
             Bosphore
             or
             Strait
             of
             the
             
               Amazone
               .
               31
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XIIII
               .
            
             Of
             the
             three
             first
             Rivers
             that
             enter
             into
             that
             of
             the
             
               Amazones
               .
               33
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XV.
               
            
             Of
             the
             Agarick
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             
               Putomaya
               .
               36
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XVI
               .
            
             Of
             the
             great
             Caketa
             ,
             a
             considerable
             River
             .
             39
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XVII
               .
            
             Of
             the
             River
             of
             
               Maragnon
               .
               43
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XVIII
               .
            
             Of
             the
             Amarumaya
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             
               Madera
               .
               46
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XIX
               .
            
             Of
             the
             other
             Rivers
             ;
             and
             of
             the
             '
             Province
             of
             the
             
               Kixes
               .
               49
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XX.
               
            
             Of
             the
             Province
             of
             the
             long-hairs
             ,
             and
             of
             that
             of
             the
             
               Homagues
               .
               52
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXI
               .
            
             Of
             the
             condition
             of
             slaves
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             neighbour-Nrtions
             .
             55
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXII
               .
            
             Of
             the
             Province
             of
             Corosirara
             ,
             and
             other
             neighbour-Nations
             .
             57
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXIII
               .
            
             Of
             the
             Gold-mine
             of
             the
             Swanes
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             neighbouring-Nations
             .
             60
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXIV
               .
            
             Of
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Yoriman
               .
               62
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXV
               .
            
             Of
             the
             Province
             of
             Surina
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             neighbouring-Nations
             .
             65
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXVI
               .
            
             Of
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Caribane
               .
               68
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXVII
               .
            
             Of
             Rio-negro
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             
               Camsware
               .
               71
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXVIII
               .
            
             Of
             the
             Province
             of
             Cayana
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             neighbouring-Nations
             .
             73
          
           
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXIX
               .
            
             Of
             the
             Isle
             of
             the
             
               Topinambes
               .
               76
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXX
               .
            
             Of
             the
             Bosphore
             of
             the
             Amazone
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             neighbouring-Nations
             .
             79
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXXI
               .
            
             Of
             the
             Province
             and
             River
             of
             
               Tapayse
               .
               81
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXXII
               .
            
             Of
             the
             rich
             and
             great
             Province
             of
             
               Coropa
               .
               84
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXXIII
               .
            
             Of
             the
             great
             mouth
             of
             the
             River
             of
             the
             
               Amazones
               .
               86
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXXIV
               .
            
             Of
             the
             great
             Province
             of
             
               Guyana
               .
               89
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXXV
               .
            
             Of
             the
             Province
             of
             Maragnon
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Town
             of
             
               Para.
               91
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXXVI
               .
            
             Of
             the
             Entries
             into
             the
             River
             of
             the
             
               Amazones
               .
               94
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXXVII
               .
            
             Of
             the
             first
             discovery
             of
             this
             River
             .
             96
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXXVIII
               .
            
             Of
             the
             second
             Expedition
             of
             Areillana
             on
             the
             same
             River
             .
             99
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXXIX
               .
            
             Of
             
               Pedro
               d'Orsua
            
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Tyrant
             
               Lope
               de
               Aguirre
               .
               101
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XL.
               
            
             Of
             the
             unfortunate
             Expedition
             of
             
               Maldonado
               .
               104
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XLI
               .
            
             Of
             other
             designs
             for
             discovery
             of
             this
             River
             .
             108
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XLII
               .
            
             Of
             the
             Friers
             of
             
               St.
               Francis
            
             ,
             that
             went
             down
             all
             this
             River
             .
             111
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XLIII
               .
            
             Of
             the
             departure
             of
             
               Peter
               Texeira
            
             for
             the
             discovery
             of
             it
             .
             114
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XLIV
               .
            
             Of
             the
             aarivall
             of
             the
             Fleet
             at
             
               Peru.
               117
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XLV
               .
            
             Of
             the
             Orders
             of
             the
             Viceroy
             for
             the
             return
             of
             the
             Portugall
             Fleet.
             120
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XLVI
               .
            
             Of
             the
             Camp
             of
             the
             Portugalls
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             the
             long-haired
             ,
             or
             
               Chevelues
               .
               122
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XLVII
               .
            
             Of
             the
             return
             of
             the
             Portugall
             Fleet.
             125
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               XLVIII
               .
            
             Of
             the
             arrivall
             of
             the
             Fleet
             at
             
               Brasile
               .
               127
            
          
           
             
               CHAP
               XLIX
               .
            
             Of
             the
             Amazones
             of
             
               America
               .
               129
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               L
            
             Of
             the
             qualities
             of
             the
             Aire
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Land
             of
             the
             great
             
               Amazone
               .
               132
            
          
           
           
             
               CHAP.
               LI.
               
            
             Of
             the
             fertileness
             of
             the
             land
             and
             the
             waters
             for
             nourishment
             of
             men
             .
             135
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               LII
               .
            
             Of
             the
             riches
             of
             Commerce
             for
             strangers
             .
             137.
             
          
           
             1.
             
             Advertisement
             to
             Geographers
             on
             the
             longitudes
             of
             
               America
               .
               140
            
          
           
             2.
             
             Advertisement
             to
             Geographers
             on
             the
             restitution
             of
             longitudes
             .
             146
          
        
         
           FINIS
           .